Specifications 1 RECEIVED
1 S 1 2 00
CITY G g RD
BIJILD DIVISION
1
Tigard Senior Center
I Garden Room Addition
I 8815 SW O'Mara Street
Tigard, Oregon
I 560 CrAAik
City of Tigard
A.. •v•d Plans [ II
"1 B IA Date X1 C
PROJECT MANUAL
I A� PROJECT NO. 208109
� C L D t9 � ► September 3, 2008
I PAUL I. BOUNDY C°"
' !- ' .,
■.— i
I go
(j) • Wi • *t 4' 16
- 'c City of Tigard
I OF � �` 13125 SW Hall Blvd. •
OFFICE COPY Tigard, Oregon 97223
I •
LRS Architects, Inc.
I 720 NW Davis Street, Suite 300
Portland, Oregon 97209
503 - 221 -1121
I
I
I
I
1
Tigard Senior Center • Table of Contents: 00 0110
I
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00.0110 Table of Contents
DIVISION 01 .GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 01 1100 Summary of Work
01 2500 Substitution Procedures
Substitution Request Form
01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures
01 2900 Payment Procedures
01 3100 Project Management and Coordination
I 01 3300 Submittal Procedures
01 3516 Alteration Project Procedures
01 4115 Design -Build Requirements
01 4200. Definitions and Reference Standards
I 01 4500 Quality Control
01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 6000 Product Requirements
I 01 •
7329 Cutting and Patching
017400 Cleaning
01 7419 Construction Waste Management
01 7700 Closeout Procedures
•
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
' 02 4119 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
•
03 3000 Cast -In -Place Concrete
DIVISION 05 METALS
' 05 5000 Metal Fabrications
05 7310 Ornamental Aluminum Railings
' DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 1000 Rough Carpentry
' 06 1733 Wood I- Joists
06 2000 Exterior Finish Carpentry
06 4000 Architectural Woodwork • .
1
1
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
Tigard Senior Center Table of Contents: 00 0110
' • Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
•
' DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 1814 Pedestrian Traffic Deck Membrane •
07 2100 Thermal Insulation
' 07 2500 Weather Barriers
•
07 2616 Below -Grade Vapor Retarders •
07 4646 Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding
' 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07 9200 Joint Sealants •
DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS
1 08 1213 Hollow Metal Frames
08 1400 Wood Doors
• 08 4113 Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts
08 5410 Composite Windows and Doors
•
08 7100 Door Hardware
08 8000 Glazing
08 9000 Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
•
' 09 2900. Gypsum Board
09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories
09 6517 Linoleum Flooring
09 8110 Acoustic Insulation and.Sealant
09 9000 Painting
PS
' 21 DIVISI 050 21 Common FIRE W SU ork Results f or Fire Suppression
21 1300 Fire - Suppression Sprinkler System
1 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING •
22 0050 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods
I 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 1005 Plumbing Piping •
22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 3000 Plumbing Equipment
22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures
•
1 •
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1 •
' Tigard Senior Center Table of Contents: 00 0110
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) .
23 0050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods •
23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
' 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 0713 Duct Insulation
23 2300 Refrigerant Piping
' • 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 3300 Air Duct Accessories
23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 4000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices
23 5400 Split System Heating and Cooling
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
I 26 0500 Common Work Results for Electrical
26 0519 Conductors and Connectors
26 0526 Grounding
' 26 0533 Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings
26 0553 Identification
26 2000 Secondary Distribution System
' 26 2726 Wiring Devices and Plates
26 2816 Disconnect Switches
26 5100 Interior Lighting
26 5600 Exterior Lighting
1 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS •
•
27 0500 Common Work Results for Communications
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK •
1 31 1000 Site Clearing
31 2000 Earth Moving •
1 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 1313 Concrete Paving
32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
32 3219 Unit Masonry Retaining Walls
1 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 •
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Summary of Work: 01 1100
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008 •
PART1 GENERAL . • .
I 1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
1. Scope of work.
2. Type of Contract.
I 3. Use of. premises.
4. Work restrictions.
5. Specification formats and conventions.
' 1.2 , SCOPE OF WORK
A. Project Identification: Tigard Senior Center, Garden Room Addition.
I 1. Project Location: 8815 SW O'Mara, Tigard, Oregon. ,
B. Owner: City of Tigard, 13125 SW Hall Blvd., Tigard, Oregon 97223.
I C. Architect: LRS Architects, Inc., 720 NW Davis Street, Suite 300, Portland, Oregon 97209.
1. Contract Documents prepared for the Project by LRS Architects, Inc. are dated
I September 3, 2008.
D. The Work of the Contract includes tenant improvement renovations as indicated in the
Drawings and as specified in this Project Manual, including Modifications incorporated into the
I Contract Documents.
1. Project consists of a one story, Type V -B construction, wood frame addition to a two
story public building, A -3 occupancy, with fire sprinklers.
I 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. ,
•
'' 1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall confine construction operations, including storage of materials and
1 equipment,.to within the staging area established by the Owner.
• 1. Contractor's use of area established for construction operations is limited only by
Owner's right to perform work or to retain other Contractors for portions of Project.
I
2. Use of Owner's property oytside staging area will not be permitted except under
unusual circumstances for limited periods of time as approved by Owner.
•
B. Maintain clear access to project at all times for emergency vehicles, delivery of materials, and
I Owner and Owner's employees access.
C. Contractor shall make arrangements with city and county agencies for use of public property
I for construction purposes and pay all fees required for such use.
D. Contractor is responsible for necessary cleaning and repair of adjacent streets resulting from
Contractor's operations.
. . •
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
-1
Tigard Senior Center Summary of Work: 01 1100
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
E. Use of Existing Building:
1. Maintain existing building•in a weathertight condition throughout the construction
period.
2. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
3. Take all 'precautions necessary to protect the building during the construction period.
I
1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. • On Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during
normal business working hours of 8 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday except as otherwise
indicated.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
•
1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONVENTIONS • A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49
Division format and The Construction Specifications Institute's (CSI) "MasterFormat" 2004
Edition numbering system.
1. Division 01 - General Requirements: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of •
the. Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms; words, and phrases when used in particular
situations, as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language:
a. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated.
b. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
c. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires.
d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words as singular,
where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
a. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be preformed by
•
Contractor.
b. Subjective or indicative language may be used for clarity to describe
• responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others
• when so noted.
c. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, .
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
•
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Substitution Procedures: 01 2500
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes procedures for the following:
1. Contractor's responsibilities concerning substitutions. •
2. Substitutions requests during the bidding period.
I 3. Substitutions requests after award of Contract.
4. Substitutions not permitted.
•
B. Related Sections:
1 1. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards, for applicability of industry
standards to products specified. . •
2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for requirements governing Contractor's
1 selection of products and product options.
1.2 DEFINITIONS • .
1 A. Substitutions: Contractor proposals for changes in products, materials, equipment, and
methods of construction required by the Contract Documents made during bidding and after
award of Contract are considered to be requests for substitution.
1 1. The following are not considered to be requests for substitution:
a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect.
b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the
I Contract Documents.
c. Contractor's determination of and compliance with regulations and orders
issued by governing authorities. •
I B. Substitutions accepted during the bidding period are accepted by Addendum prior to award of
Contract, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents.
•
I C. Substitutions requested and accepted after award of contract are accepted only by Change
Order, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
1 A. • .
Contractor's responsibilities for substitution requests made after award. of Contract are as
follows:
I
. 1. • Investigate proposed products and determine they are equal or superior in all
respects to products specified.
2. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified.
I 3. Make changes in, and coordinate, the Work as may be required to incorporate and
install accepted substitutions.
4. Waive all claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent which are
related to substitutions.
I 1.4 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Acceptability of different materials or products shall be determined by methods set forth in this •
1 Section.
•
LRS Architects, Inc. -
1 . .
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Substitution Procedures: 01 2500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1
B. Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution, and decision of
Architect will be final.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1. SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD
A. Submit request for approval of a substitution on CSI Substitution Request Form; Copy
included at the end of this Section.
B. All substitution requests must be received in the Architect's office no less than 5 working days 1
prior to Bid Date, unless'otherwise.stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders.
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after award of Contract, except due to
unforeseen circumstances.
B. Architect will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution after award of Contract
when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If
the following conditions are not met, Architect will return the requests without action except to
record noncompliance with these requirements.
1. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract time.
a. Architect will not consider the request if the product cannot be provided as a
result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
2. The specified product cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority,
and the requested substitution can be approved.
3. The specified product cannot be coordinated with other materials and the Contractor
certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
4. The specified product cannot provide the required warranty and the Contractor '
certifies that the proposed substitution provides the warranty.
5. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, or
other considerations after deducting additional Owner's cost of compensation to the
Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction,
and similar considerations.
C. Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or
Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not
constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.
2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED
•
A. Substitutions indicated or implied on submitted Shop Drawings or Product Data without first
requesting approval in accordance with requirements of this Section.
B. Where manufacturers,, products, or systems listed in the Specifications are not followed with
"or approved" or "Substitutions: Provide in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500,"
it is intended that substitutions are not permitted.
END OF SECTION 1
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
I Advancement
of Construction
Technology
t SUBSTITUTION REQUEST • LRS Architects, Inc.
TO:
1 PROJECT:
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Page Paragraph Description
I PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
I - Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test
data adequate for evaluation of request including identifying applicable data portions.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposed substitution
I required for its proper installation.
Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct:
I 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction
costs caused by proposed substitution.
I 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty
requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution.
I Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are
equivalent or superior to specified Item.
I Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in
Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution.
Submitted by:
I .
Name (printed or typed) General Contractor (if after award of Contract)
I Signature For use by LRS
Firm Name I . Approved I : Approved as Noted
I 1 • Not Approved 1 Received Too Late
Address
By
City, State, Zip Date
1 Remarks
I Date
Telephone Fax
2007 Edition
If After Award of Contract:
I Reason for Substitution Request:
I List of Attachments:
Tigard Senior Center Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
•
I A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and
processing the following Contract modifications:
1. Requests for Interpretation.
I 2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
3. Proposal Requests.
4. Construction Change Directives.
5. Change Orders.
1 B. Related Documents and Sections:
1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for administrative procedures for handling
I request for substitutions made after Contract award.
2. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for requirements for inclusion of contract
modifications in record documents.
t 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES •
• A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner and Contractor to identify each person who
is responsible for executing Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
I 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Request for Interpretation (RFI):
I 1: Written request submitted by Contractor to Architect on standard form requesting
interpretation of Contract documents.
I 2. An RFI shall only be used as a vehicle for confirming or verifying an issue through an
interpretation of the Contract Documents; responses that result in change to Contract
Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time must be
documented in a Change Order.
1 B. Architects Supplemental Instructions (ASI):
• 1. Architect's written order of instruction to Contractor, signed by Architect, that
I authorizes minor changes in Work that do not change Contract Sum or Contract
Time.
• C. Proposal Request (PR):
I 1. Initiated by Architect: Written request by Architect to Contractor to quote change to
Contract Sum and /or Contract Time for proposed change to Contract Documents.
2. Initiated by Contractor: Written request by Contractor to Architect proposing change
I
to Contract Documents accompanied with quotation for change to Contract Sum
and /or Contract Time.
•
Construction Change Directive (CCD):
I D.
• 1. Written order prepared by Architect, signed by Owner and Architect, directing
Contractor to proceed with change to Contract Documents which affect Contract Sum
I and /or Contract Time, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order after change to
Contract Sum and /or Contract Time has been determined.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
. 1
Tigard Senior Center Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I September 3, 2008 •
E. Change Order (CO):
1. Prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their
I
agreement to a change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum
and/or Contract Time. .
1.4 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI): I
A. Submit RFIs numbered in sequential order, reviewed by Contractor with resPect to . .
Construction Documents, with the following information: I
1. Project name and address. - -
2. Architects name.
3. Contractors name. I
4. Date of RFI.
5. Drawing and /or Specification reference. .
6. Signature of Contractor's reviewer.
7. Indicate "URGENT" on RFIs that may cause impact to the project schedule.
I
B. Architect will receive RFIs only from the Contractor; Architect will not accept RFIs directly from
subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities. I
• C. Architect will receive only legible, properly prepared RFIs.
•
• 1. Unreadable facsimile machine RFIs, illegibly written RFIs, or RFIs with incomplete
I
information, will be returned promptly without action.
2. RFIs may be transmitted to Architect by facsimile machine.
a. Architect will return response by same method received from Contractor. •
I
3. Architect will review RFIs with respect to Contract Documents and return response
within 7 calendar days.
•
a. RFIs marked "URGENT" will take precedence, in order received, over I
outstanding RFIs and be answered by Architect as soon as possible. ,
D. Contractor, in being fully familiar with Construction Documents, shall not be relieved of I
responsibility to coordinate the Work to prevent adverse impact to Project schedule when
submitting RFIs to Architect for interpretation of Contract Documents.
1.5 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI) 1
A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions may include supplementary or revised Drawings and /or
Specifications to describe minor changes to Contract Documents. I
B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions will be executed on AIA Form G 710, or other similar
form designated by Architect. • .
1.6 ' PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR) 1
A. Proposal Request Initiated by Architect: .
' 1. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and is not an instruction or
I
authorization to execute the change, or an order to stop Work in progress.
2. Proposal Request may include supplementary or revised Drawings and /or
Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents. I
LRS Architects, Inc. I
1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600
I Garden Room Addition 3
September 3, 2008
3. Contractor shall submit cost and/or time quotations to Architect within 10 working
I days following receipt of Proposal Request.
B. Proposal Request Initiated by Contractor:
I 1. Proposal Request is for a change in the Work accompanied by a. detailed quotation of
impact on Contract Sum and /or Contract Time.
2. Proposal Request may include revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe a
I proposed change to Contract Documents.
3. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and does not authorize the
Contractor to execute the change or stop Work in progress without the Architect's and
Owner's authorization. .
I 4. Contractor initiated Proposal Requests may take the form of a "Claim" where
• Contractor finds it necessary for proper execution of the Work, to propose a change
in the Work that is not shown or indicated in Contract Documents, and may affect
1 Contract Sum and /or Contract Time, which for which no Proposal Request or
Construction Change Authorization has been issued by the Architect. •
a. Contractor's determination that Architect's response to an RFI that affects
Contract Sum and /or Contract Time may be addressed in a Proposal
i Request.
5. Architect shall respond to Contractor initiated proposals within 10 working days
I following receipt of Proposal Request.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD)
I A. A Construction Change Directive is issued in lieu of a Proposal Request when time is of the
essence and change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time cannot be determined prior to
start of the work.
I B. A Construction Change Directive is executed on AIA Form G714 or other similar form
designated by Architect, and may include supplementary or revised Drawings and/or
Specifications to describe change to the Contract Documents.
I C. Both Owner and Architect will sign and date a Construction Change Directive that directs the
Contractor to proceed with change to the Contract Documents prior to determination of cost
and /or time.
' D. Contractor shall submit to Architect itemized change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time
within 10 working days when possible, and no more than 30 calendar days, except for the
following conditions:
I 1. Unit prices have been agreed upon and quantities cannot be determined until work
described in the CCD has been completed.
2. Owner has agreed that Contract Sum and /or Contract Time of can be determined at
I completion of work described in the CCD.
E. When Owner, Architect, and Contractor concur on change to Contract Sum and /or Contract
Time, as described in the General Conditions for "Construction Change Directives," the
I change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time will be included in a Change Order.
•
1.8 CHANGE ORDERS
I A. Architect will prepare each Change Order utilizing AIA Document G701, or other similar form
acceptable to Owner.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600
Garden Room Addition Page 4
1
September 3, 2008
•
B. Changes to Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time listed or indicated in Change Orders
shall include or be determined by methods described in the General Conditions, and as.
follows:
• 1. Proposal Requests approved for change to Contract Documents by Owner and
Architect that have not been converted to a Construction Change Directive.
2. Construction Change Directives where Owner, Architect, and Contractor have agreed
to change in Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time.
3. Changes to Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time that have not been
documented by Proposal Request or Construction Change Directive, but have been
agreed upon by Owner, Architect, and Contractor.
1.9 DOCUMENTATION FOR CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
A. Cost and Time Quotations: Support quotation for changes in the Work with sufficient •
substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation, to include the following:
1. Labor expended in hours and unit cost.
2. Equipment cost.
3. Products, with quantities used and unit cost, including purchase source.
4. Taxes, Insurance, and Bonds.
5. Credit for deleted work where applicable with same documentation as required for
cost increases for additional work.
6. Overhead and profit, determined after credits have been deducted from additions.
7. Justification for change in Contract Time. .
B. For claims for Work not authorized through Proposal Requests or Construction Change
Directives, provide supporting documentation for each claim for additional cost as indicated
above for cost and time quotations with the following additional information:
1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of Order.
2. • Dates and hours work performed, and by whom.
3. Timecard records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for products used including quantities and unit costs.
5. Receipts and invoices for equipment utilized, including dates and time of use.
6. Provide the same documentation indicated above for subcontracts same as required
for Contractor's own forces.
C. Document requests for Product substitutions according to requirements of Section 01 2500. •
1.10 CORRELATING CHANGE ORDERS WITH OTHER REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Revise Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment to record each Change Order as
separate item of work with adjustment to Contract Sum and Contract Time as described in
Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures.
B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.
C. Revise Subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by modifications to 1
Contract Documents.
D. Record modifications in Record Documents.
END OF SECTION
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Payment Procedures: 01 2900
I
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY •
I A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. . .
Section 01 2600: Contract Modification Procedures, for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
I 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
•
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
I .
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative
schedules and forms, including:
•
I a. Application for Payment forms w with Continuation Sheets. -
b. List of Subcontractors, principle suppliers, and fabricators.
c. Submittals Schedule.
1 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Owner within 48 hours of bid submission.
a. Submit more detailed Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible
I date but no later than 7 days before date scheduled for submittal of initial
Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
I items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification
Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the. Schedule of Values:
1 a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
I d.
e. Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
2. For Schedule of Values submitted to Owner within 48 hours of bid submission, use
I Attachment F form included in the Bid Package. For detailed Schedule of Values,
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
. following for each item listed:
I a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1 1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one - hundredth percent,
adjusted to total 100 percent.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
Tigard Senior Center Payment Procedures: 01 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1
September 3, 2008
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the
Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract
amounts, where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total to equal the Contract Sum. . I
5. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for
Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored,
but not yet installed.
a. _ Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing for items stored off -site.
6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. •'
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each
item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work -in -place mayy be shown either as separate line items or
distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
•
7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for Payment
when Change Orders or Construction.Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1
•
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. '
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment date is as agreed to by the
Owner and the Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for
Payment is the period indicated in that Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703.
D. Application Preparation: Compete every item of form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Match entries with data on the Schedules of Values.
2. ' Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
• before last day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each application for payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
F. Waivers of Mechanic Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from subcontractors, sub - subcontractor, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested in previous
applications, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Payment Procedures: 01 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 2.
3. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers. .
4. Submit final Application for payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
I entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. . Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
I G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
I 2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. •
4. Products list
I 5. Submittals Schedule.
• 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits. •
9. Initial progress report.
I 10. Report of preconstruction conference.
11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
12. Performance and payment bonds.
I 13. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
I for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
. statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. .
I 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
3. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with this
application include the following:
1 a. ' Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
I
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Final cleaning.
f. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
I g. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
h. List of incomplete Work recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
I • I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
I 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. Evidence that claims have been settled.
I 5. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
6. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
1 - .
•
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1 1 1
•
Tigard Senior Center Payment Procedures: 01 2900
Garden Room Addition - Page 4
September 3, 2008
7. Assurance that incomplete Work not accepted, if applicable, will be completed without
undue'delay.
8. Evidence that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
9. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
10. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) •
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
1
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
•
I 1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following: •
1. . General Project coordination procedures. .
I 2.
3. Coordination Drawings.
Project meetings.
4. Construction schedule.
5. Submittal schedule.
1 6. Field Engineering.
•
B. Related Sections:
' I 1. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures. ,
2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for coordinating selection of products.
3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for coordinating progress and final cleaning. •
1 4. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for coordinating Contract closeout
requirements._
• 1.2 - COORDINATION '
'. A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Specification Sections to ensure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection,
I and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, .
I before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Coordinate storage or staging areas for all trades.
1 B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution t� each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list
• of attendees at meetings.
I
C. Administrative Procedures:
1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
I construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to
ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are
not limited to, the following:
I a. Preparation of Contractor's construction Schedule.
b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
c. Installation and removal of-temporary facilities and controls.
d. Delivery and processing of submittals.
e. Progress meetings.
f. Preinstallation conferences. .
g. Startup and adjustment of systems.
I h. Project closeout activities.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1 .
Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out
with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
E. Coordination of Key Personnel: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations,
submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other_personnel in
attendance at Project site.
1. Identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities.
2. List addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone
numbers.
3. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, and temporary field office. Keep list
current at all times.
1.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if. limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or
if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate
entities.
1. Content: Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
• Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard
• printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components for architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicated required installation sequences.
c. Indicate dimensions shown on Contract Documents and make specific note
of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and
minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for
• resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult
installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. •
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS • 1
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated. 1
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
• 2. ' Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute agenda. to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions, and agreements achieved. Distribute •
- meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 72
hours after each meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: •
1. Schedule a preconstruction conference before.starting construction, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days after execution of
Agreement.
a. Hold conference at Project site or other location agreeable to Owner and
Architect.
b. Conduct meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. ,
LRS Architects, Inc. •
.1
•
I .
I Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other
concerned parties deemed necessary.
3. All participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters
I relating to the Work.
4. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following: .
•
I a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items.
c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs).
f. Procedures for testing and inspection.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of Contract Documents. •
I i. Submittal procedures.
j. Routing of correspondence.
k. Preparation of Record Documents. .
I I. Use of premises.
k. Work restrictions.
m. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
n. Construction waste management and recycling.
I o.
p. Site access, traffic, and parking availability and rules.
Office, work, and storage areas.
q. First aid.
r. • Security. •
I s. Progress cleaning.
t. Owner's occuancy requirements.
5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes.
1 C. Preinstallation Conferences:
1. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity
• 2. that requires coordination with other construction.
Attendees: Contractor and its superintendent, installer and representatives of
manufacturer's and fabricator's involved in or affected by the installation and its
coordination or integration with other materials and installations•that have preceded or
I will follow. Include code enforcement personnel if required by local codes.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
•
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Related Change Orders.
c. Submittals.
d. Review of mockups.
e. Possible conflicts or compatibility problems.
f. Time schedules.
g. Weather limitations.
• h. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
i. Warranty requirements.
j. Acceptability of substrates.
•
k. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
m. Installation procedures.
n. Coordination with other work. 1 o. Protection of adjacent work.
•
4. Do not proceed with installation if conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of
Work and reconvene conference at earliest feasible date.
5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present
and to parties who should have been. present.
D. Progress Meetings:
1
1. Conduct progress meetings at Project site at regular scheduled intervals.
a. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment request. 1
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and each
• subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concemed with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of immediate future activities.
a. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Work. - 1
•
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that affect progress, including topics for discussion
as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be
completed within the Contract Time.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
I b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements. .
•
I 2) Sequence of operations.
3).. Status of submittals. •
4) Progress cleaning.
•
5) Status of correction of deficient items.
I 6)
7) Field observations.
Requests for interpretation (RFIs).
8) Status of Proposal Requests.
•
9) Status of Change Orders.
I 10) Project administration issues.
5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to Owner and
Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers,
I or other entities concerned with current progress.
6. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
I 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal bar -chart type
I Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days after date established for commencement
of Work.
I B. Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first working day of each
week with a continuous vertical line.
1. Include start-up, finish, duration, slack time, approval dates, material ordering,
I delivery dates, anticipated shutdowns, partial occupancy and Owner use, Completion
Date and other such information required to allow Owner's monitoring of progress of
project and identifying critical path of events required to meet Completion Date.
•
2. Use same breakdown of units of Work as indicated in Schedule of Values.
1 C. Distribution: Following response to initial,submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates.
I D. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
1. Bring significant deviations from Schedule immediately to Owner's and Architect's
1 attention.
1.6 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE .
I A. Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
• fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
I 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontract, the Schedule of Values, and
•
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1
1 •
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Engineering Services:
1
1. Provide field engineering services as required for construction.
2. Locate and maintain an accurate benchmark on or near site that has been .
established by a Registered Surveyor. Relate subsequent elevations of finish grades
and building elements directly to this benchmark.
B. Existing Control Points: '
1. Protect control points prior to starting Work, and preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
2. Make no changes or relocations of control points without prior written notice to
Architect's Representative.
3. Report to Architect's Representative when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or
requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
C. Instrument Layout:
1. Use site benchmarks and existing elevation control points to establish lines and
levels, located and laid out by survey instrumentation.
2. Locate water supply, storm and sanitary sewer lines. •
3. Locate edge and level of paving, curbs, walks, and sloping landscape.
4. Locate building foundations, column locations, and floor levels.
5. Locate controlling lines and levels required for plumbing, mechanical and electrical
Work within 5 feet of building perimeter. •
D. Corrections:
1. Record changes in elevations or location of Work on project record Documents.
2. Report errors in horizontal and vertical dimensions and grades prior to starting Work.
E. Verification and Coordination: 1
1. Verify dimensions of new and existing Work.
a. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawings, modify to accommodate.
If field measurements differ significantly, notify Architect prior to commencing
Work. '
2. Coordinate locations of openings through floors, roofs and walls with Architectural,
• Mechanical and Electrical Drawings.
F. Documentation:
1. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work when requested by
Architect.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 ,
Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
I Garden, Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes- administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of Work, including Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
•
B. Related Sections: •
' 1. • Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for substitutions submittal requirements.
2. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for Applications for Payment and Schedule of
Values submittal requirements.
I 3. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for Coordination Drawings,
Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittals Schedule, and distribution of meeting
and conference minutes submittal requirements.
. 4. Section 01'4500: Quality Control, for test and inspection reports submittal
I requirements.
5. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for Record Drawings, Record Specifications,
Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and warranties submittal requirements.
6. Sections with specific requirements for submittals indicated in those Sections.
I
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
. action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
I 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .
•
•
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
I construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
I 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
•
I a. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. •
b. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with these provisions.
I B. • .
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100, Project Management and
Coordination, for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
• ' related construction activities.
I C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as •
follows. .
.' 1. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
2. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit •
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including
resubmittals.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc. ' •
•
1 •
• I
Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
.3. Initial Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal.
a. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.
Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
delayed for coordination.
•
4. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
5. Resubmittal Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each
submittal. •
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches, on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
2. Include the following information on label:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Name of manufacturer.
•
g. Submittal number, including revision identifier.
•
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g. 06 1000.01).
Resubmittals should include an alphabetic suffix (e.g. 06 1000.01A).
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail reference, as appropriate.
j. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
• k. Other necessary identification.
E. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each submittal.
• F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. '
•
1. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form.
2. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than
1
•
Contractor.
H. Resubmittals: make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others necessary as necessary for
performance of construction activities.
J. Use for Construction: Use only submittals with mark indicating Architect's final release.
•
K. Submittal Log: Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing current status
of submittals at all times. Make log available to Owner and Architect for review upon request.
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
I 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
I A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
2.2 PRODUCT DATA •
I A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard printed
1 data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not Product Data.
B. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
I 1. Product Data, such as general product brochures containing information on other
products that are not required or proposed for Work, which are not clearly marked to
indicate which products and options are applicable to Project will be returned by
Architect without review or action.
I C. Include following information, as applicable:
I 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. •
2. Manufacturer's product specifications.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
4. Standard color charts.
I 5. •Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
6. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
7. Testing by recognized testing agency. •
8. Performance characteristics and capacities.
I 9.
10. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring.
• 11. Printed performance curves.
12. Operational range curves.
I 13.
14. Mill reports.
Notation of coordination requirements.
D. Colors and Patterns: Except where specific color and pattern is indicated in Contract
I Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in specified products,
submit minimum 2 color and pattern charts to Architect for selection.
E. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
I F. Number of Copies: Submit the following for each required submittal:
1. 2 copies for Architect.
I 2. Number of copies as required for Maintenance manuals.
3. Number of copies as required by Contractor for distribution. •
G. Architect will retain 2 copies and return remainder to Contractor, marked with action taken •
1 and, where applicable, corrections or modifications required.
1. Distribute Product Data necessary for performance of construction activities.
I 2. Retain number of copies required for maintenance manuals. .
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. .
•
- 1
Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
•
2.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to a scale sufficiently 1
large to show pertinent aspects of item and its method of connection to Work. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are permitted.
B. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as
applicable:
1. Dimensions; Identify dimensions established by field measurement. 1
2. Identification of products.
3. Fabrication and installation drawings.
4. Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed
' wiring.
6. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
7. Templates and patterns.."
8. Schedules.
9. Design calculations.
10. Compliance with specified standards.
11. Notation of coordination requirements. •
12. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
13. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full -size drawings, at least 8 -1/2 by 11
inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches
D. Number of Copies: Submit 3 opaque copies of each submittal.
1. One copy will be returned to Contractor marked with Architect's action taken and,
where applicable, corrections or modifications required.
2. Contractor is responsible for reproduction and distribution of final Shop Drawings as
reviewed and necessary for performance of construction activities.
2.4 SAMPLES
A. • Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these 1
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of those characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
B. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 1
1. Generic description of Sample.
2. Product name and name of manufacturer.
3. Sample source.
4. Submittal number, and number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
C. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
D. Field Samples: Full -size examples erected on -site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials and to establish Project standard.
LRS Architects, Inc. - • 1
•
•
•
1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
I E. . .
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors, textures, and patterns available. .
I 1. Submit 2 color charts. Architect will return 1 color chart with options selected.
F. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used in the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically
I identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and
texture variations expected.
1. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following:
1 a. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components.
b. Small cuts or containers of materials.
c. Complete units•of repetitively used materials.
I
d. Swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
e. Color range sets. •
f. Components used for independent testing and inspection.
I 2. Number or Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 1 sample and
return remainder of sets to Contractor.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
I techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated. .
b. If variation in color, pattern, or texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
I material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets that show
approximate limits of variations, or number of units indicated in individual
Specification Sections.
1 2.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by Specification Sections.
I 1. Number of Copies: 2 copies for Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will
not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications.
I a. Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for
preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an
office or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
I 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4500,
Quality Control.
4. Welding, Installer, Manufacturer, Product and Material Certificates: Prepare written
I • statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying compliance with requirements in
the Contract Documents.
1 ' •
1
• .
• •
1 .. •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
• .
1
• Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
•
B. The following are Informational Submittals:
1. Test and Inspection Reports. 1
2. Coordination Drawings.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. •
4. Qualification Data. • I
5. Welding Certificates.
6. Installer Certificates.
7. Manufacturer Certificates.
8. Product Certificates. •
9. Material Certificates.
• 10. Material Test Reports.
11. Research /Evaluation Reports.
12. Compatibility Test Reports.
13. Field Test Reports. •
• -
14. Maintenance Data.
15. Design Data.
16. Manufacturer's Instructions.
17. Manufacturer's Field Reports
18. Material Safety Data Sheets.
a. Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.
b. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the
entire submittal for resubmittal.
2.6 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
•
B. Delegated Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design -
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed
by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services. •
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. • Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for I
. compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.
•
1. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. • '
B. Approval Stamp: Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section
title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying
that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract
Documents.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
' Tigard Senior Center Submittal Procedures: 01 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
•
•
' 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
•
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, mark with an action stamp, and return to Contractor.
' C. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When a submittal is marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN,"
' . Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of
Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
2. Final- But - Restricted Release: When a submittal is marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS
NOTED," Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations
' or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment
depends on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When.a submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT,"
•
do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, or other activity.
•
a. Revi or prepare a new submittal according to notations and resubmit.
' Repeat as necessary to obtain an action releasing submittal.
b. ' Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "REVISE AND
RESUBMIT," at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
' 4. Submittals for Record:
a. Where a submittal is for record purposes or special processing or other
activity, Architect will return submittal marked "RECORD ONLY."
D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, return it
marked " RECORD ONLY or will reject and return it if it does not appear to comply with
requirements.
' E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect may not review submittals not required by the Contract
. Documents. Such submittals may be returned to sender without action, or discarded.
•
END OF SECTION .
1
1
•
1.
1
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Alteration Project Procedures: 01 3516
I Garden Room Addition Page 1 .
September 3, 2008
•
•
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY .
I A. Section Includes:
1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work.
2. Transition and adjustments.
1
•
3. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.
•
B. Related Sections:
I 1.
2. Section 01 1100: Summary of Work, for Owner occupancy during construction.
Section 01 7320: Cutting and Patching.
3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for cleaning during construction. •
4. Section 02 4116: Structure Demolition.
I PART PRODUCTS
•
2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
U .
A. New Materials: As specified in product. Sections; match existing Products and Work for .
patching and extending work.
1 1. Where new materials are indicated in the Drawings and product Section for material
is not included in the Project Manual, provide new materials specified in the Drawings. .
I B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where
necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION . •
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work.
I 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work.
Replace and restore at completion.
B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals,
I and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.
C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from .concealed spaces.
I D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work
and finishes.
E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather .
1 and extremes of temperature and humidity.
3.3 INSTALLATION
I A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to
accommodate Owner occupancy.
I .
LRS Architects, Inc. -
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Alteration Project Procedures: 01 3516
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Project Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical
work. I
C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of
restoring Products and finishes to specified condition.
D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures restore existing plumbing,
heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full operational condition.
F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections.
3.4 • TRANSITIONS
A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. I .
•
B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
recommendation to Architect.
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors,
walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 . inch or more occurs, submit to Architect a recommendation
for providing a smooth transition.
C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. 1
3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES •
A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing 1 •
other imperfections.
•
B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
1
3.7 FINISHES
• A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections.
1
B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be
matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
3.8 CLEANING
A. In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Sections, clean Owner occupied areas affected
by Work of this Project.
• END OF SECTION
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
•
Tigard Senior Center Design -Build Requirements: 01 4115
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Certain components of the Work under this project are Design Build. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete
responsibility for the design, calculations, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and •
•
.I installation of the Design Build portions or components as required in this Section. The
Applicant is responsible for submitting to the City of Tigard, all Design Build documents
required for the separate approval for each Design Build item. There are no exceptions.
Design Build components of this Work are defined as complete, operational systems,
' provided for their intended use.
•
B. The Architect's or Engineer of Record's review of Design Build submittals shall be for design
intent and shall not lessen nor shift the responsibility from the Applicant or the assigned
subcontractor to the Owner nor to the design professional. The Owner shall not be
responsible for paying for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or
overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by the Applicant or the subcontractor to
I coordinate their Work with the Work of other trades on the project or to provide the Design
Build portion or component in a timely manner to meet the schedule of the project. •
C. City of Tigard Requirements: Follow the City of Tigard's requirements current at the time of
' submission. The Applicant is responsible for coordinating and submitting all material required
by the City so that the City's review will not adversely affect the construction schedule. At or
• near the time of application, the Applicant shall meet with the City to identify Design Build
1 components and how they are to be submitted and processed.
D. Design Build Components of the Work: Design Build components known at this time: •
1. Metal fabrications.
2. Ornamental aluminum Railings.
3. Wood I- Joists.
1 4. Unit masonry retaining walls.
E. Refer to systems descriptions in technical Sections of these Specifications for additional
information on Design Build work.
' 1.2 DEFINITIONS
•
' . A. Applicant: Person applying for building permit and person coordinating Design Build systems
with basic building and with each other. Includes coordination of required submittals.
B. Architect or Engineer of Record: Architect or Engineer registered in state that Project is
' located, engaged by the Owner to provide plans and computations, and establish design
criteria for Design Build components and specifications required by the Building Official for
principle Project systems. Includes staff, consultants, and consultants' staffs.
C. Contractor: Entity engaged by the Owner to construct the Project. Includes employees,
subcontractors, suppliers, and their employees.
•
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
I
•
Tigard Senior Center Design -Build Requirements: 01 4115
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
•
D. Design Build Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in state that Project is located,
engaged by the Contractor to provide plans, computations, and specifications required by the
Building Official for a designated builder- designed specialty system, in accordance with
criteria set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications.
•
E. Seal: Certification that plans, computations, and specifications were designed and prepared
under the direct supervision of the Engineerwhose name appears thereon. .
•
F. Review Stamp: Certification that the Architect or Engineer has reviewed plans, computations,
and specifications bearing the seal of the Design Build Engineer, verifying conformance with
information given and design concept set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications.
G. Approval Stamp: Certification that the Building Official has reviewed a submittal and finds it
acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. . Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures.
B. Design Build submittals are required to show complete criteria, design assumptions, details,
calculations, submittals, instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with
other trades, unless noted otherwise in the specific Specification Section.
C. Complete submittals shall be submitted with the Design Build Engineer's seal and calculations •
• for that portion of Work. Submittals without required calculations, without the Design Build
Engineer's seal, and which have not been-reviewed by the Contractor will not be reviewed by
the Architect or Engineer of Record. • 1
1.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A. • Some Design Build components are shown in the Contract Documents for design intent. The
purpose is to have the Contractor responsible for providing, coordinating, and installing the
Design Build component.
•
B. Design Build components attached to the structural frame or supplemental to the structural 1
frame shall be designed for the anticipated loads as outlined in the Contract.Documents.
These Design Build components shall be coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
C. Load reactions at the interface between the Design Build components and the structural
frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by the Architect or Engineer of Record.
. END OF SECTION
•
•
1
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
t Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
•
' 1.1 DEFINITIONS
' A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved ": When used to'convey Architect's action on the Contractor's applications and
requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of
' • the Contract.
C. "Reviewed ": When used in lieu of "Approved" to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's
submittals, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of
1 the Contract.
•
D. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," have the same meaning as
1 "directed."
E. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
' Drawings, in the Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
F. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
' jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
control performance of the Work.
G. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
H. "Install ": Operations at the Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
"Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
' J. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
' K. "Experienced ": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being
familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
' authorities having jurisdiction.
L. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project
site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project located.
M. - "Testing Agencies ": Independent entities engaged to perform specific inspections or tests,
either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of
those inspections or tests.
•
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. . Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. . •
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated. •
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its.construction activity. Copies of applicable standards
are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with the most stringent requirement when compliance with
two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels.
•
1. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the
Architect for decision before proceeding.
• E. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
•
A. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are
subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 800- 872 -2253
• • Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) 202- 272 -0080 1
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board 202- 272 -0080
•
www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations 888- 293 -6498
Available from Government Printing Office •202- 512 -1530
www.gpoaccess.govecfr/index.html
•
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 800 - 872 -2253
1
•
Available from Access Board 202- 272 -0080
www.access- board.gov
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center • • Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other
I . Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
M Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202 - 862 -5100
www.aluminum.org .
I AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers 216 - 241 -7333
www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council 202 - 737 -0202
I www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847 - 303 -5664
www.aamanet.org
I - AASHTO American Association of State Highway and 202 -624 -5800 .
Transportation Officials
I www.transportation.org
•
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and 919 - 549 -8141
Colorists (The)
I www.aatcc.org
ACI American Concrete Institute / ACI International 248 -848 -3700
www.aci- int.org
1 AFPA American Forest & Paper Association 800 - 878 -8878
www.afandpa.org 202 -463 -2700
I AGA American Gas Association 202 - 824 -7000
www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) 703- 548 -3118
www.agc.org
-
• AHA American Hardboard Association
(See CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 202- 872 -5955
www.aham.org
I Al Asphalt Institute 859- 288 -4960
www.ashpaltinstitute.org
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) 202 -626 -7300
I www.aia.org •
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 303 - 792 -9559 .
I www.aitc- glulam.org
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America 800 - 395 -2522
. www.alca,org 703- 736 -9666
I ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee, Incorporated 301 - 972 -1700
www.alsc.org
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
Garden Room Addition Page 4 I
•
September 3, 2008
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 847 - 394 -0150 I
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute 202 - 293 -8020
www.ansi.org
I
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association 253 - 565 -6600
www.apawood.org
ARI Air- Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 703 - 524 -8800 1
www.ari.org
•
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 202 - 207 -0917 I
www.asphaltroofing.org
•
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 800- 548 -2723
www.asce.org 703- 295 -6300
I
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 800-527 -4723
Air- Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 404 -636 -8400
I www.ashrae.org
ASME ASME International 800 -843 -2763 -
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
I
www.asme.org .212- 591 -7722
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 440- 835 -3040
www.asse- plumbing.org
I
ASTM ASTM International 601 - 832 -9585 .
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
1
AWCI AWCI International 703 - 534 -8300
www.awci.org
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 800 -449 -8811 I
www.awinet.org 703 - 733 -0600
AWPA American Wood- Preservers' Association 334- 874 -9800
I
www.awpa.com .
AWS American Welding Society 800443-9353
I www.aws.org 305 -443 -9353
AWWA American Water Works Association 800- 926 -7337
www.aws.org 305- 794 -7711
I
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212 - 297 -2122
www.buildershardware.com
CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 630 - 584 -1919 '
www.cisca.org
•
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 423 - 892 -0137
I
www.cispi.org
LRS Architects, Inc. I
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
I Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 • Page 5
I CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 301 - 596 -2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
I CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association •
www.cppa- info.org 202 -462 -9607
• CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) 800 - 882 -8846
I www.carpet- rug.com 706- 278 -3176
CRSI • Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute .847- 517 -1200
. www.crsi.org •
I . CS Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards 202 - 512 -1800
CSA CSA International 800 -463 -6727 • I (Formally: IAS - International Approval Services) 416 - 747 -4000
www.csa-international.org
•
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) 800 -689 -2900
• www.csinet.org 703 -684 -0300
DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703 - 222 -2010
I www.dhi.org
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. 914 - 332 -0040
www.asce.org
I FMG FM Global 401- 275 -3000
(Formally FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com •
1 GA Gypsum Association 202- 289 -5440
www.gypsum.org
I GANA Glass Association of North America 785- 271 -0206
www.glasswebsite.com
•
GSI •Geosynthetic Institute 610- 522 -8440
I
www.geosynthetic-instituie.org
• HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
I (Partof NAAMM) . •
HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association 703 -435 -2900
www.hpva.org
1 • IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) • 212 -419 -7900
• www.ieee.org
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 212 - 248 -5000
www.iesna.org
ITS Intertek 800 - 345 -3851
I www.intertek.com 607- 753 -6711 .
•
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
I .
.
1 .
1
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
Garden Room Addition Page 6 '
September 3, 2008
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315-646-2234
www.igee.org
I
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613- 233 -1510
www.igmaonline.org
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 74901' 11 1
www. iso. ch
LMA Laminating Materials Association I
(Now part of CPA)
MPI The Master Painters Institute 888 -674 -8937
www.paintinfo.com
. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 312 - 332 -0405 -
www:naamm.org I
NAIMA The North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 703 -684 -0084
www.naima.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association 202- 775 -3550
I
www.ncma.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 301 -657 -3110
I
www.necanet.org
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association .
1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847 - I
Rosslyn, VA 22209
703 - 841 -3200
• www.nema.org •
- NFPA National Fire Protection Association 800- 344 -3555 •
www.nfpa.org . - 617 -770 -3000
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301 - 589 -1776
I
www. nfrc. org
NGA National Glass Association 703- 442 -4890
www.glass.org I
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 800 - 933 -0318
www.natlhardwood.org 901- 377 -1818 I
NLGA National Lumber Grades Association 604 - 524 -2393
www.nlga.org
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association ' 800- 323 -9545
I
www.nrca.net 847- 299 -9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 888 - 846 -7622
I
• www.nrmca.org 301- 587 -1400
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association 800 -342 -1415
www.ntma.com 703- 525 -8788
I
LRS Architects, Inc. . - I
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Definitions. and Reference Standards: 01 4200
I
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Seattle) 800- 524 -4215
I Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Portland) • 503- 295 -0333
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
I (Now WDMA)
PCA Portland Cement Association 847- 966 -6200
wwvii. portcement. org.
I RCSC ` Research Council on Structural Connections 800 -644 -2400
www.boltcouncil.org - 312 - 670 -2400
I RFC' Resilient Floor Covering Institute 301- 340 -8580
www.rfci.com
SDI Steel Door Institute 440- 899 -0010
II www. steeldoor. org
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315 -646 -2234
www.sgcc.org
I SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(Now IGMA)
. I SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 703 - 803 -2980
National Association, Inc.
www.smacna.org
I SWRI . Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute 816 -472 -7974
www.swrionline.org .
I TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. 864 -646 -8453
www.tileusa.com
TPI Truss Plate Institute 608- 833 -5900
1 www.tpinstg.org
UL Underwriter's Laboratory, Incorporated 800- 704 -4050
www.ul.com 847 - 272 -8800
I WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 800- 283 -1486
www.wclib.org 503 -639 -0651
I WCSC Window Covering Safety Council 800 - 506 -4636
www.wclib.org 212 -661 -4261
I WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association 800 - 550 -7889
www.wmmpa.com 530 -661 -9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association 800 - 725 -0333
I www.wsrca. com 650- 548 -0112
WWPA Western Wood Products Association 503 - 224 -3930
www.wwpa.org
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200
Garden Room Addition Page 8 •
September 3, 2008
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IBC International Building Code
ICC International Code Council, Inc. 703- 931 -4533
www.iccsafe.org
- • ICC -ES ICC Evaluation. Service, Inc. 800 -423 -6587 1
www.ice - es.org 562 -699 -0543
OSSC State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code 1
NES (Formally: National Evaluation Service — See ICC -ES)
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800-638-2772
www.cpsc.org 301 - 504 -6816
EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202- 272 -0167 1
www.epa.org -
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800 - 321 -6742
www.osha:gov - 202- 693 -1999
END OF SECTION
•
•
1
1
•
•
1
•
•
1
•
1.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Quality Control: 01 4500
• Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
•
I A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
1. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including
reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing
1 authorities.
a. Requirements do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
I 2. . , ,
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
• specified or indicated.
I B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching, for requirements for repair and restoration of
construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. -
2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for independent testing of concrete mix
design and for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. .
3. Section 09 6517: Linoleum Flooring, for independent testing requirements for
I concrete slab moisture vapor emissions.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
I A. Owner will contract separately for services of independent testing laboratory to perform
specified inspection and testing.
B. Inspections and testing costs required by defective Work or improperly -timed notices shall be •
paid by Contractor:
C. Utilization of testing laboratory services shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to •
perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1 1.3 RETESTING
A. Contractor responsible for retesting and associated cost where results of inspections and
1 tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
1.4 ASSOCIATED SERVICES
1 A. Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests.
B. Provide auxiliary services as requested.
I . C. Notify agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. _
• D. Auxiliary services include, but are not limited to, following:
I 1. Providing access to Work.
2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
E. Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum, of delay.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Quality Control: 01 4500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
F. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.
1. Except where indicated as responsibility of testing agency, Contractor is responsible
for taking samples.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Inspection and Testing Agencies:
1. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying
with American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements
for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in types of inspections
and tests to be performed.
2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in State where Project is
•
located.
B. Duties of Testing Agency:
1
1. Testing agency shall cooperate with. Architect and Contractor in performing its duties.
2. Agency shall provide qualified personnel perform inspections and tests. I
3. Agency shall notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities of deficiencies observed
in Work during performance of its services.
4. - Except as otherwise specified, testing laboratory shall secure, handle, and store
samples and specimens for testing. '
C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test
to:
1. Architect , 1
2. Contractor
3. Governmental agencies requiring submission of reports
4. Other persons as directed by Architect.
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 1701 of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on
2003 Edition of the International Building Code.
B. Following Sections contain requirements for special inspections: .
1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete
2. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS 1
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations.
1
1. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
' Tigard Senior Center Quality Control: 01 4500
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
t B. When specified in•individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe:
1. Site conditions
' 2.
3. Conditions of surfaces and installation
Quality of workmanship
4. Start-up of equipment
5. Test, adjust, and balance of equipment applicable, and to initiate instructions when
1 necessary.
C. Individuals to report.observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or
installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
' D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review.
3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
•
A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged construction.
1. Restore substrates and finishes.
1 .2. Comply with Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching.
B. Protect construction ex_ posed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired
• construction.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of
responsibility for inspection and testing:
3.4 EVALUATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Satisfactory completion of Work will be judged on results of laboratory and site tests and
' inspections.
B Results of tests and inspections that indicate Work does not comply with requirements of
Contract Documents will be considered deficient.
1 C. Contractor has responsibility to remove and replace deficient Work at Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
•
•
1
•1 •
•
•
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000
• Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PARTI GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
• ' A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, security and
- protection facilities.
1.2 USE CHARGES •
1 • A. General: Include cost or use charges for temporary facilities in the Contract Sum. Allow other
entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited.to,
Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
' B. Existing Utility Services: Water and electric power from Owner's existing systems is available
for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of
' authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to:
1. Building code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police and fire department rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
•
1 B. Standards: Comply with the following:
•
1. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations."
2. ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and
• Demolition."
3. NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities. "..
1 C. Electric Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
D. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
•
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.
B. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop
or persist on -site.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities. -
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
Tigard Senior Center Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1
•
A. Provide new materials, or use undamaged, used materials in serviceable conditions, suitable
for use intended. 1
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job -built construction with
lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes, of sufficient size and
fumished to accommodate needs of construction personnel.
1. Use of Owner's existing building will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
2. Provide enclosed space within field office adequate for project meetings.
1
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Use of Owner's existing building will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL- rated, with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self - contained, liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, or open flame, or salamander heating units is
• prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by UL, FM, or
another a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
• PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION •
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as •
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000
I Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 3
I D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel.
I 1. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of the fixtures and facilities. •
2. . Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
1 Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
E. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
I F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that will provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
I 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system. ,
I G. Heating: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity.
I H. . Telephone: Provide temporary telephone service in common use facilities for use by all
personnel engaged in construction activities.
1. Provide one telephone line in each field office. •
I 2.
3. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a facsimile machine in each field office.
Make telephone and facsimile service available to use by the Owner and Architect.
4. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including the following:
I a.
b. Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
•
I e. Engineer's office.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractor's field and home offices. .
•
I 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES
A. • Dewatering Facilities and Drains: comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
I Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
�. Project Identification Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
I 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
C. • Water Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419,
I Construction Waste Management.
•
D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees.
I 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools
and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
• 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES
A. Environmental Protection:
1. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and
by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
• air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or that other undesirable effects.
2. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize
complaints from persons or firms near the site.
B. Site Enclosure Fence: Provide site enclosure fence in manner that will prevent people and
animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially • •
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft, or similar violations of security.
• D. . Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structural adequate barricades,, including warning signs and lighting.
1. Provide appropriate warning signs to inform personnel and the public of hazards
being protected against.
E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses until permanent
fire protection facilities are operable.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire safe locations.
•
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire protection equipment.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
5. Develop and post information for overall fire prevention and protection program for
personnel at Project site.
6. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection when required by code or
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities to minimize waste and .
abuse.
•
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need for its service has 1
ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the 1
Contractor. •
2. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs.
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
D. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the
construction period.
END OF SECTION
1
•
•
1
1
1
•
•
1
111 •
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Product Requirements: 01 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART 1. GENERAL •
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
selection of products for use in the Project.
B. Related Sections:. .
1 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures.
2. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards.
•
I 1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work.
•
I 1. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of
similar intent. •
2. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including
make or model number or other designation, listed in the manufacturer's published
I product literature._
B. "Materials" are products shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated,
I processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that
requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit a complete list of major
I products proposed for use in the Project. .
1. Include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and installing
Subcontractor's name.
1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source to the fullest
1 extent possible.
B. Compatibility of Products: When given the option of selecting products, Contractor is
I responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with
previously selected products and construction methods, or products that have been specified
to which the selected products must be compatible. •
1.5 . PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING . .
I A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
I B. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at the site.
C. • Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, or other losses.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Product Requirements: 01 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
D. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
F. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of
quantity or counting of units.
G. Store products subject to damage by weather above ground, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure, and with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
1. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION ,.
• A. General: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and
are new at the time of installation.
B. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is
named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions are permitted.
C. Semi - proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers
are named, provide one of the products indicated that complies with Specifications. No
• substitutions are permitted.
D. Nonproprietary Specifications: When products or manufacturers are not listed, the Contractor
may use any product by any manufacturer that complies with the Specifications and
referenced standards.
1
E. Product Substitutions: Where products or manufacturers are named and accompanied by the
• term "equal," "approved," or "approved equal," comply with Section 01 2500, Substitution
Procedures, to obtain approval of an unnamed product. 1
F. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where a product or assembly listing exact -
characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides those characteristics
and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
G. Performance Specification Requirements: Where compliance with performance requirements
are specified, provide products that comply with those requirements and are recommended by
the manufacturer for the application indicated.
•
H. Specified Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance with an imposed code,
standard, or regulation is specified, provide a product that complies with that code, standard,
or regulation.
I. Visual Matching: Where matching a sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a
proposed product matches satisfactorily.
J. Visual Selection: Where product P
requirements include the phrase " .. as selected from •
q
manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures, .. " or a similar phrase, the Architect will
select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected that complies with other
111
specified requirements.
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Product Requirements: 01 6000
' Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
•
' K. Inappropriate Product Selections: If Contractor believes specified product, method, or system
is inappropriate for use Contractor shall notify the Architect before performing Work in
question.
' 1. If notice of objection is not received prior to delivery to site, it will be assumed by
Owner that Contractor agrees specified products, methods, and systems are
appropriate for use in the Project.
PART 3 EXECUTION
•
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
I A. • Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in
the applications indicated.
' 1. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other
Work.
2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary from damage and deterioration.
' B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions,
consult Architect for further instructions.
' END OF SECTION
•
1 •
1
•
•
•
•
1
•
1
•
1 '
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center . Cutting and Patching: 01 7329
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008 •
I PART 1 . •GENERAL -
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching of Work required to:
1. Make several parts fit properly.
2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill -timed work.
I 3.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
Remove and replace defective work.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for coordinating cutting and
patching with other construction activities.
2. Section 01 3516: Alteration Project Procedures, for building alterations.
I 3. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for cutting and patching operations related to
inspection and testing.
4. Section 02 4119: Selective Demolition, for demolition of selected portions of the
•
building for alterations.
I 5. Refer to individual Sections forspecific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching:
6. Divisions 22, 23 and 26, for mechanical and electrical requirements and limitations
I applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves structural elements,
submit for approval a proposal describing procedures. Include the following information in the
proposal:
1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be performed, and why it
I cannot be avoided.
2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance of visual
elements. Include structural calculations.
I 3. • 4. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work.
Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and when work will
be uncovered for Architect's observation.
5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect.
II 6. Submit cost estimate and secure Architect's approval of cost estimate and type of
reimbursement before proceeding with'cutting and patching
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change
. their Toad carrying capacity of load deflection ratio.
I 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements.
B. . Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their capacity to .
I , perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in the Architect's opinion would
• reduce the visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.
1 1. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unacceptable manner.
1 ,
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Cutting and Patching: 01 7329
•
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
I
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a manner as to not void 1
any warranties required or existing.
PART2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use new materials identical to existing materials.
•
B. For exposed surfaces where identical materials are not available, use materials that visually
match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible.
C. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of existing materials. I
PART 3 EXECUTION
• 3.1 INSPECTION I
A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during ,
• cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. ,
• B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work.
C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify Architect and 1
secure direction before proceeding further.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION ' I
•
A: Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as required to I
maintain structural integrity of Work.
B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. .
3.3 " GENERAL. PERFORMANCE 1
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with ,
requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 1
B. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces.
3.4 CUTTING 1
• A. Perform cutting and demolition by methods that will provide the least damage to other•
portions of Work.
I B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility of service
interruption or damage.
C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or diamond -core drill.
I
', 1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Cutting and Patching: 01 7329
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I D. When masonry construction must be pierced, furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in .
• opening and grout in place neatly.
1. Leave grout surface to.match existing finish.
I 2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation.
3. Pack between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant.
4. At penetrations of fire- resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction,
' completely seal voids with fire- resistant rated materials as require to maintain
I assembly of fire- resistant rating of penetrated element, or as required by Building
Code.
3.5 PATCHING
A. . .
.Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation complying with
tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction involved.
I B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is-required, restore existing plumbing, heating,
ventilation, air - conditioning, electrical, and similar systems to full operational condition.
C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that are durable and
I as invisible as possible.
1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity of seam.
I 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break.
3. For assembly, refinish entire unit.
4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining work in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
I D. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new work is not
possible, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for terminating surface along
straight line at natural line of division.
1 • 1. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect, for approval,
. recommendation for providing smooth
1 3.6 CLEANING .
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed.
I END OF SECTION
•
•
1
1
1
1
1 . .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Cleaning: 01 7400
' Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
PART1 GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY -
' A. This Section includes requirements for maintaining Project buildings and site in a standard of
cleanliness during construction period.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 500: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities.
2. Section 01 7419: Construction Waste Management
3. • Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures.
1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with applicable requirements of
1
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials as needed to maintain specified standard of
' cleanliness.
2.2 COMPATIBILITY
' A. Use only cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with surfaces being cleaned,
as recommended by manufacturer of material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
•
3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not
1 required for construction of this Work.
1. Completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from job site and dispose of
in a legal manner.
2. Provide.adequate storage for items and waste to be removed from job site, observing
requirements for fire and environmental protection.
•
•
B. Storage Areas: Maintain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access,
' which does not impeding traffic or drainage.
1. Inspect arrangement of stored materials weekly. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service
' arrangements.
C. Site and Structures:
•
' 1. Inspect site and structures weekly, and more often if necessary, and pick up all scrap,
debris, and waste material.
a. Remove such items to place designated for their storage. Maintain site in a
1 neat and orderly condition.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Cleaning: 01 7400
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
2. Sweep interior spaces clean as often as necessary to maintain a clean environment.
a. Clean, for purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free
from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable
effort and a hand -held broom.
3. As required prior to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures or applicable
portions thereof to degree of cleanliness recommended by manufacturer of
succeeding material.
4. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish flooring daily at times while
Work is being performed in space in that finish materials are installed to keep floor
free from foreign material that may be injurious to finish.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
1
A. . "Final Cleaning," for purpose of this Section, and except as may be specifically provided
elsewhere, shall be interpreted as meaning level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled
cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to Substantial Completion, remove from Project site all tools, surplus materials,
equipment, scrap, debris, and waste.
C. Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas at approaches to site. I
D. Exterior Surfaces:
1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials,
smudges, and other foreign matter.
2. , Hose down entire exterior surfaces of structure if necessary to achieve a uniform
degree of cleanliness. •
E. Interior Surfaces:
1. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, 1
smudges, and other foreign matter.
2. Remove paint droppings, spots, and stains.
3. Clean both sides of glass surfaces. •
4. Polished surfaces: Apply polish recommended by manufacturer of material to be
polished.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Construction Waste Management: 01 7419
I Garden Room Addition - Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS
I A. Waste materials produced as a result of this project shall be reused or recycled to minimize
impact of construction waste on landfills and to minimize expenditure of energy and cost in
fabricating new materials. _
I 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Reuse or recycle debris generated as a result of work performed on project when practicable
Y 9 P P 1 P
and cost effective.
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 ON -SITE MATERIALS SORTING AND STORAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Verify recycling facilities or waste processor requirements for preparation of materials to be
I
accepted and to what degree materials can be contaminated.
B. Recycle the following waste materials:
1 1. Wood
2. Metals (ferrous and non - ferrous)
•
3. Cardboard
I 4. Drywall • 5. Masonry and Concrete
6. Office paper
•
I C. Coordinate with local hauler to provide separate containers for recycled materials listed
above.
1. Subcontractors shall follow source separation requirements for each waste, and use
I appropriate on -site container for each type of waste material.
2. Provide separate containers for non- recyclable materials.
D. Rebates: Paid or credited by . hauler /recycler to Contractor.
II E. Inform field personnel and subcontractors about recycling program, and continuously monitor
program to verify proper source separation and to avoid contamination of recyclable
I materials.
F. Recycling Processors and Facilities:
' 1. Comprehensive list of recycling facilities in Portland Metro are available from local
building permit office or by contacting Metro at 503 - 234 -3000. •
I END OF SECTION .
1 -
1
LRS Architects, Inc. .
Tigard Senior Center Closeout Procedures: 01 7700
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout
including, but not limited to, the following:
• 1. Inspection procedures. ,
I 2. Project record documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Startingand Adjusting.
1 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
•
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate
Sections.
I C. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for requirements for Applications for Payment
I for Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities.
3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for final cleaning requirements.
I 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the
I following.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's Punch List), the
value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
I 2.
3. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,
• . final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
I access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates,
and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys,
I 6. and similar final record information. -
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise • Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction to Owner's personnel.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
• 10. ' Terminate and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Complete final cleanup requirements required in Section 01 7400.
12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes, including
touchup painting..
1 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion.
1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or without
I completing inspection, advise the Contractor that based on limited inspection, the
construction is not sufficiently complete for Substantial Completion.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 • . _.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Closeout Procedures: 01 7700
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
2. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection, or will
notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by •
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate. can be issued.
a. Architect will reinspect when assured by Contractor that Work identified in
previous inspection has been competed and corrected.
b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to
reimburse Architect for time and expenses.
c. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for
final acceptance.
1
3. Owner will allow Contractor no longer than 30 calendar days from Date of Substantial
Completion to remedy deficiencies.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the 1
following.
1. Submit a final Application for Payment, according to requirements of Section 01 2900.
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to
be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified
copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved
for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements:
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance.
1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or advise the
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
2. Architect will prepare the final Certificate for Payment after inspection, or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate can
be issued.
a. Architect will reinspect when Work identified in previous inspection as
incomplete is competed and corrected.
b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to
reimburse Architect for time and expenses.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Submit three copies•of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected
1
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. .
1. Organize . list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. -
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and budding systems.
1
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. ,
•
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Closeout Procedures: 01 7700
Garden Room Addition Page 3 •
September 3, 2008
I 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
' a.. Project name. •
b. Date.
I c.
d. Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
•
I 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS . . .
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from
deterioration and loss.
I B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of black line white prints of Contract
Documents or Record CAD Drawings required.
I 1. Mark the Record Drawings to show the actual installation and construction where
installation or construction varies from that shown originally. Require individual or
entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor,
I or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Drawings:
a. Record data as . soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the
markup before enclosing concealed installations.
I 2. Mark record sets with erasable red - colored pencil, clearly describing change by
graphic line and note. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different
categories of the Work at the same location..
1 a. Call attention to entries by a "cloud" drawn around areas affected.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
1 from original Drawings.
a. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: Show on Record Drawings, by dimension
• accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of items shown
I schematically on Drawings. Clearly identify item by accurate note such as
"cast iron drain ", "galy. water", and the like. Show, by symbol or note, vertical
location of ite•( "under slab ", "in ceiling plenum ", "exposed ", and the like).
Relate by identification descriptive to Specifications.
I b. Show final location of electrical junction boxes and outlets, telephone and
data outlets, supply and return registers, and like.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
I numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawings; include the designation "PROJECT
. RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind
I . each set with durable paper cover sheets with identification.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one complete copy of Project Specifications, including
addenda and contract modifications.
I 1. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation or from that
indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
2. Mark copy with proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
I equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note. related Change Orders and other modifications, where applicable.
I.
LRS Architects, Inc. •
Tigard Senior Center Closeout Procedures: 01 7700
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with
actual 'performance of the Work. Bind miscellaneous records and identify each in same
format as specified for Operation and Maintenance Manuals, ready for continued use and
reference.
1. One set of evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies •
having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Certificates of Inspection.
b. Certificates of Occupancy.
•
2.. One set of certificates of insurance for products and completed operations.
3. One set of evidence of payment and release of liens.
4. One copy of list of Subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors,
including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for
emergency service at all times including nights, weekends, and holidays. •
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as
follows:
• 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and -
P 9 Y P Y
equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
2. Maintenance Data: Included manufacturer's information, list of spare parts,
maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and
routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Submit one set of warranties, organized into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the Project Manual, in same format as specified for Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not applicable) •
PART 3 EXECUTION
•
3.1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Prior to request for certification of Substantial Completion, start equipment and operating
1
components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
units, and retest.
B. • Adjust equipment and operating components for proper operation.
1
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1 ,
•
Tigard Senior Center Closeout Procedures: 01 7700
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
• September 3, 2008 .
I 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and
equipment not part of a system. .
I 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
. operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
I 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification dates, times, length of
r • instruction, and course content.
I B. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation,
operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.
111 END OF SECTION
1
1
•
•
1
1 .
.
1 LRS Architects , Inc.
I .
1
Tigard Senior Center . Selective Demolition: 02 4119
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008. • .
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY •
•
I . A. Section Includes: .
1. Demolition and removal of selected building equipment and fixtures.
2. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.
I 3. . Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
4. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 01 1100 Summary of Work,.for use of the premises and Owner occupancy
during construction.
2. Section 01 3516: Alteration Project Procedures, for transition of new and existing •
I construction after completion of selective demolition.
3. . Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Controls, for temporary construction,
environmental protection measures, and security at Owner occupied areas.
I 4. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching, for cutting and patching procedures.
5. Division 22: Plumbing, for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating plumbing)
items.
6. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating and Air - conditioning, for demolishing, cutting,
I patching, or relocating HVAC items.
7. Division 26: Electrical, for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS . •
I A. . . .
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose off-site, unless indicated `
• to . be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
I B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
I D. Existing to Remain: Existing construction items of construction to remain without removal.
1.3 . MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
I A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain on Owner's property, demolished materials become Contractor's property
I and shall be removed from Project site. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate sequence of demolition and removal
work, interruption of utility services, coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility
services, use of elevator and stairs, locations of temporary partitions and means of egress,
and coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building.
1 B. Utility Survey: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities.
1 .
. . LRS Architects, Inc. .
1
•
• Tigard Senior Center Selective Demolition: 02 4119
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
•
1. ANSI A10.6: "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition."
2. NFPA 241: "Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations."
3. Applicable local codes for demolition work, safety of structure, and dust control.
B. Obtain required permits from governing authorities.
C. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning of demolition operations.
. D. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction..
• E. Conduct predemolition conference at Project site.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72
hours to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. -
1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without prior written notice
to the Owner.
• B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities. Do not •
close or obstruct egress width to exits.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of Work. 1
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed
by Owner under a separate contract.
E. Utility Service: Notify affected utility companies of selective demolition before starting work
and comply with their requirements for maintaining service, and disconnecting existing
services, where required.
• 1. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during demolition operations.
2. Maintain fire protection facilities in service during demolition operations.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. '
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS 1-
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials, or materials that visually match existing
surfaces if identical materials are not available. .
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
• 1
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center Selective Demolition: 02 4119
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification
I Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. - Prior to start of Work, examine work to be removed and work to remain to determine nature of
1 work and conditions under which selective demolition will be conducted.
1. Make necessary probes to determine extent and kind of protection required.
2. When applicable, verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
I 3. Where existing conditions are found to be conflict with representations of Contract
Documents, submit written notification and request clarification.
a. Do not perform Work related to conflicting conditions until clarification is
1 obtained.
B. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
I any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
3.2 PREPARATION
I A. Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities serving area to be
demolished. Mark location of existing utilities to remain.
I
•
B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated, or as required to
separate the public and occupied areas from areas of Work.
C. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
1 D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1 E. Protect existing materials which are not to be demolished or removed. •
F. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to prevent movement, settlement,
or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or
I
collapse of construction to be demolished.
3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1 A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
I and as indicated. -
C. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members.
D. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect. Do not
resume operations until directed. •
E. Removed and Salvaged Items: Clean, pack or crate with identification marked on containers,
1 store in a secure area until delivery to Owner, and transport to Owner's storage area.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Selective Demolition: 02 4119
Garden Room Addition Page 4
•
September 3, 2008
F. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Clean and repair to functional reuse, pack or crate with
identification marked with identification, protect from damage during storage, and reinstall in
locations indicated. Comply with requirements for new materials and equipment:
G. Existing Items to Remain: Protect against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to suitable storage and reinstalled in
their original locations after demolition operations are complete.
H. Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition. Perform
patching work in accordance with Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. 1
I.
•
Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses.
J. Do not burn demolished materials on site. V 1
K. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
L. Upon completion of work, leave areas in clean condition. Remove temporary partitions,
barriers, and construction.
END OF SECTION 1
1
•
1
•
1
1
•
•
1
1
•
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
•
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1:1 SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete forming .
• 2. Concrete reinforcing.
I 3.
4. Concrete accessories.
Concrete footings and foundation walls. •
5. Floor slabs -on- grade.
6. Vapor Emission Control System.
I B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for special inspection and independent testing
requirements.
2. Section 07 2616: Below -Grade Vapor Retarders .
3. Section 09 6517: Linoleum Flooring, for floor slab moisture requirements affecting
I • Work of this Section.
4 . Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving.
5. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes.
I 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION
• A. Anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete, supplied under provisions of Section 05 5000:
Metal Fabrications.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
I 1. Submit manufacturers product information on concrete accessory materials, including
sealer, hardener, and their VOC content.
I a. Provide schedule of specific areas to receive each type of product specified
for interior slab -on -grade treatment, such as sealers, hardeners, and Vapor
Emission Control System. Identify name of each product proposed for use.
I B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to
fabrication of reinforcing.
I 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 315.
2. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar.
•
. C. Mix Design Data: Submit a mix design formula, with supporting test data per ACI, at least 10
I days prior to delivery of concrete. .
D. Test Reports: Submit-copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work.
I 1. • Submit copies of inspection and independent testing reports required in Section
01 4500, Quality Control.
E. Certificates: Submit letter from concrete supplier that concrete delivered meets specified
1 requirements. '
1 -
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center
•
Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I
September 3, 2008
F. Batch Ticket: Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency.
1. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket Information. I
G. Reinforcement Test Reports: Submit two copies of mill test reports on grade 60 reinforcing
prior to placing concrete.
I
H. Documentation that application of Vapor Emission Control System for concrete slabs -on-
grade has been certified by manufacturer of product. I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. Reinforcing Steel Standards: I
1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice"
2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Commentary on
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ,
3. ASTM A615 and Supplement #1.
4. ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Mix Design Qualifications: Employ testing laboratory or concrete supplier acceptable to
I
Architect to perform materials evaluation, testing, and design of concrete mixes.
C. Plant Certification: Ready Mix Plant to comply with NRMCA certification regulations.
1. Ready Mix Plant and Equipment: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94. I
D. Test concrete slabs -on -grade for moisture vapor emissions prior to application of finish floor
materials as described in Sections 09 6517.
I
1. Owner will engage an Independent Testing Laboratory in accordance with
requirements of Section 01 4500.
2. Provide test results to installers of work of Sections 09 6517.
I
E. Application of moisture vapor emission and alkalinity barrier to be certified by manufacturer of
Vapor Emission Control System. I
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete mix design and placement requires special inspection per State Building Code
Section 1701. I
1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre - installation conference within two weeks prior to commencing Work of this
1
section.
B. Review installation procedures, testing procedures, and coordination required with related
I
Work, concrete design mixes, concrete admixtures, including placement of concrete on vapor
retarder and application of Vapor Emission Control System.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1
•
A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked.
1. Tag to indicate bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings '
shown on Shop Drawing placement diagrams.
LRS Architects, Inc. I
•
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
I Garden Room Addition _ Page 3 .
September 3, 2008
1 B. Store reinforcement in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive
rust.
I 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS ,
A. Temperature and Weather Requirements: '
I 1. D not place concrete when temperature or weather will affect performance or
appearance of concrete.
2. Maximum wind velocity for unprotected floor slabs,-stairs, ramps, and walks: 15 mph.
3. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 40 degrees F.
I 4. No precipitation expected within 8 hours for unprotected concrete surfaces.
B. Substrate Requirements:
I 1. Do not place concrete on muddy or frozen soil.
2. Remove water and ice from footing trenches.
3. Remove ice from formed surfaces.
I 4. Remove water and ice from underslab vapor retarder.
PART2 PRODUCTS
I 2.1 . FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood, metal,' or other acceptable panel -type materials to
provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.
1 1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to
joint system shown on Drawings.
I B. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces. •
1. Formulate form - release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form - facing materials.
1
C. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass- fiber - reinforced plastic
I form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh.concrete on forms and to prevent spelling
of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in
•
I concrete surface. .
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
I A. Reinforcing Bars: Intermediate grade steel conforming with "Specifications for Billet -Steel
Concrete Reinforcing Bars ", ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, unless specifically noted as
grade 40. .
1 B. Weld Type Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60. .
C. • Reinforcing Accessories:
I 1. Chairs for Support of Reber: "Concrete Brick," Precast concrete or fiber - reinforced
concrete, of greater strength that concrete; do not use steel devices over vapor
retarder. •
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2. Reinforcing Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gauge, double annealed iron wire.
D. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS 1
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C. I
B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
•
C. Water: Clean; free of oils, acids, organic material 1
• D. Admixtures:
1. Air - Entraining: ASTM C 260.
2. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A water reducing or Type D water reducing
and retarding.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 1
A. Vapor Emission and Control System: Concrete sealer, hardener and curing compound for
interior floor slabs to receive applied floor finish. I
• 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CS 2000 Spray Applied System, by Creteseal (800 - 278 - 4273). 1
2. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty for the floor covering system
covering labor and materials necessary to repair, or replace if repairs cannot be
made, the floor finish covering failure due to substrate originated moisture and /or
moisture -born contaminates.
B. Curing Compound:.Sodium Silicate, for exposed concrete floor slabs where vapor emission
and control system is not used. 1
1. Eucosil; Euclid Chemical.
2. Day -Chem Sil -Cure (J -13); Dayton Superior Corporation. •
3. Sonosil; Sonneborn - Chemrex.
C. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout:
1. Standard: ASTM C 1107.
2. Acceptable Compounds:
• - a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout.
c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928.
d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout.
e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. 1
•
D. Bonding Agent:
1. Standards: ASTM C 932, ASTM C 881 and ASTM C 631. 1
•
IRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
I Garden Room Addition . Page 5
September 3, 2008
I 2. Acceptable Agents:
a. Hornweld by A. C. Hom.
b. Weld -crete by Larsen.
I c.
d. Thorobond by Thoro System Products.
Sonocrete or Sonobond by Sonneborn.
E. Patching Compound:
. 1. Acceptable Compounds: Epolith Patcher or Sonopatch by Sonneborn.
F. Concrete curing membrane:
I
1. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Orange Label Sisalkraft
by Fortifiber Corp.
I 2. • Reinforced Laminated Paper for Nontraffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Sisalkraft SK -10 by
Fortifiber Corp.
G. Curing Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene
I sheet, or synthetic fiber mat complying with M -171, such as the following:
1. Synthetic Fiber Mat for Traffic Areas: Transguard, by Armorlon, a Division of Reef
Industries, Inc.
•
1 H. Fibrous Reinforcing: .
1. • Multifilament synthetic nylon fiber manufactured as a secondary reinforcing material
I 2. for concrete.
Manufacturer: Nycon, Inc.; Nycon Synthetic Fiber.
I. Aggregate Base Under Building Slabs -On- Grade: As specified in Section 31 2000.
I J. Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 2616. .
•
1 K. Self- Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal 'strip, sodium
bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.
1. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.
I 2. Conseal CS -231; Concrete Sealants Inc.
3. Hydrotite; Greenstreak.
4. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection,. Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc.
I 2.5 MIXING .
A. Proportioning: Comply with ACI 211.1
I 1. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Article 3.8:
B. Proportion Adjustments: •
I 1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site conditions, weather,
test results or other circumstances warrant.
1 a. Submit proposed revised concrete mixes to Architect. . .
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
C. Ready Mix Plant Mixing Procedures: Comply with ASTM C 94. •
1. Mix full Toad for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site. 1
2. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding water.
D. Design Mix Requirements:
1
1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
2. Maximum Slump for Footings and Floor Slabs: 4 inches + 1/2 to - 1 inch.
3. Maximum Slump for Walls: 3 inches + 1/2 to - 1 inch.
4. Entrained Air: 5 percent + or - 1 -1/2 percent; use only for exterior exposed concrete,
unless otherwise indicated.
5. Minimum Compressive Strength:
a. Foundations, Slabs -on- grade: fc = 3,000 psi in 28 days.
•
b. Site Concrete and Pads: fc = 3,000 psi in 28 days, air entrained.
6. Probability of Test Falling Below Specified Strength: 1 out of 5. - 1
7. Maximum Pozzolan (Fly Ash) Content: 15 percent of weight of cementitious material.
8. High- Range, Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. Use for interior slabs -
on -grade to achieve specified water /cement ratio.
9. Water /Cement Ratios:
•
•
•
a. 0.42 for interior slabs -on- grade.
b. 0.50 for other concrete.
10. Fibrous Reinforcing: Add fibrous reinforcing to concrete mix at ready- mix plant for
concrete flatwork including slabs -on- grade, elevated slabs, sidewalks, and driveways
at rate of 1 pound of fiber per cubic yard of concrete.
2.6 FABRICATION
•
A. Shop Fabrication of Steel Reinforcing: Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-
1, ACI 301, ACI 315, and ACI 318.
1. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 for bending dimension. '
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Construct formwork so concrete structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch, for concrete surfaces exposed to view., •
2. Class C, 1/2 inch, for other concrete surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise
shown or indicated.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 7 .
September 3, 2008
I F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form - release agent, according to manufacturer's
instructions before placing reinforcement.
G. Leave formwork for structural elements in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design
I compressive strength.
H. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work and apply new form- release agent.
I 1. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by
Architect.
•
I. Anchor Bolts:
I
1. Setanchor bolts for structural plates with anchorbolts double nutted to plywood or
steel templates.
I 2. Set anchor bolts for equipment with anchor bolts double nutted to templates furnished
by equipment manufacturer.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE AND VAPOR RETARDER
1 A. Place aggregate base under building slabs -on -grade as specified in Section 31 2000.
1. Grade aggregate base to drain to .top of perimeter foundation wall footings.
I 2. Insert drainage weeps in foundation wall to drain to exterior of building foundations.
B. Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder according to requirements specified in Section
07 2616.
I 3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING STEEL ,
A. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1.
I B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce
or destroy bond with concrete.
I. C. Support reinforcing to prevent displacement with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and,
hangers.
I D. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Stagger reinforcing bar splices 36 inches minimum at alternate bars.
I F. Install welded wire fabric in long lengths, lapping edges at least one mesh plus two inches
unless otherwise noted.
G. Lap continuous bars in accordance with ACI 318; Chapter 12, Class B, unless otherwise
1 noted.
H. .Placement tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus.
1 I. Construct hooked reinforcing to comply with ACI 318, Section 7.1 to 7.3.
J. Notify Architect of items interfering such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves, etc., and obtain
written approval on procedure before placement of concrete.
I K. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7, Paragraph
7.7, unless otherwise noted.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
.
I
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 8
I September 3, 2008
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT •
I
A. Comply with ACI 301 and 304; placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned
joints or sections. •
B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and I
tamping.
C. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items and forms.'
1
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated item.
Screed, tamp, and trowel - finish concrete surfaces.
I 3.5 FINISHING
A. Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Public View: .
I
1. Provide- smooth form finish for concrete.
2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 10.2.2.
3. Remove fins and projections. I
4. Patch tie holes and defects.
B. Floated Slab Finish:
1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed, troweled, and broomed 1
• finish..
2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.2. .
3. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened I
. sufficiently to permit float finishing. •
4. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after
first floating.
5. , Level to flatness of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. I.
6. Refloat immediately to a uniform sandy texture.
D. Troweled Slab Finish:
I 1. Provide troweled finish for interior slab surfaces exposed for walking, to receive
resilient or carpet floor covering, or to receive ceramic tile flooring.
2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.3.
3. Provide a floated finish as specified above. I
4. Power trowel slab to smooth surface free of defects except minor trowel marks. .
5. Eliminate trowel marks by hand troweling slab when surface is sufficiently hard.
6.. Perform final hand troweling when trowel rings as trowel is moved over slab surface.
. 7. Trowel to flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet. I.
8. Grind slab surfaces or fill with underlayment to remove defects of sufficient magnitude
to show through intended floor covering. .
E. Broom Slab Finish:
1
1. Provide a broom finish for exterior walks, stair treads, slabs and ramps.
2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.4. • I
3. Provide a floated finish as specified above.
4. Draw a broom or burlap belt across surface to give slab a course transverse scored •
texture.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. I
I
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In- Place Concrete: 03 3000
' Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
I F. Joint Finishing:
1. Tool radius exterior slab, walk, ramp, and curb edges.
2. Cut or form interior floor slab crack control joints.
1 G. Horizontal Surface Finish Tolerances: Finish concrete horizontal 'surfaces as specified in
ACI 301, Articles 11:7, 11.8 and 11.9
' 1. For floors to receive resilient flooring and carpeting, provide concrete smooth, level,
and without more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft. variation from level.
3.6 JOINTS •
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
• B. Construction Joints: Install at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.- Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway- section forms, or bulkhead
- I forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches into
concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
• ' 5. partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Use epoxy- bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. .
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated, or approved. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal
to at least one -fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1 1. Grooved Joints:
a. Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
' edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch.
b. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.
c. - Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints:
t a. Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive
or diamond -rimmed blades.
I • b. Cut 1/8- inch -wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random
contraction cracks.
' D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: After removing formwork, install joint- filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams,
and other locations, as indicated.
1. Terminate full -width joint - filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
' . finished concrete surface where joint sealers, specified in Section 07 9200, Joint
Sealants, are indicated.
2. Install joint - filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length
1 is required, lace or clip 'sections together.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 10 111 . September 3, 2008
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated.
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.7 WATERSTOPS - 1
•
A. Self- Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly
pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed "concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with the following:
1. Cold Weather Protection: ACI 306.1.
2. Hot Weather Protection: ACI 305R.
B. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following
materials
•
1. Water.
•
2. Continuous water -fog spray.
3: Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges withl2 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers
C. .Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not Tess than 7 days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
1
1. Cure concrete surfaces t� receive floor coverings with either a moisture - retaining
cover or specified curing compound. •
D. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according
to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
3.9 INTERIOR FLOOR SLAB TREATMENT .
A. Vapor Emission Control System: Apply to interior concrete floor slabs -on -grade to receive
resilient flooring.
•
1. Apply on freshly placed concrete after final finishing and soft cutting to waterproof,
seal, harden, and cure concrete in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions:
2. Field Quality Control: Warranty requires application to be certified by manufacturer's
technical person on -site observing application of Vapor Emission Control System.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
•
1
A. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until Architect or his representative
has examined compacted soil and aggregate materials within forms.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1.
1
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
I Garden Room Addition Page 11
September 3, 2008
I B. Do not place concrete until Architect or his representative has examined formwork, reinforcing
steel, and condition of vapor retarder.
•
1. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to concrete placement for inspection of reinforcing. ,
1 2. Adjusting Reinforcing: Adjust location of reinforcing as required.
C. Vapor Emission Control System: Manufacturer's technical person for Vapor Emission Control
System to observe application of system on -site and certify application as being in
1 conformance with manufacturer's written instructions and terms of warranty for product.
D. Test Requirements:
I 1. When special Inspection is required by Building Code, Owner will employ an
Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate concrete delivered to and placed at site.
I a. Notify Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to delivery and
placement of concrete.
2. Test composite samples according to ASTM C 172.
I 3. Slump Test: Test at point of placement complying with ASTM C 143.
•
a. Concrete for Floor Slabs: Perform one slump test for each truck Toad of
ready mixed concrete.
' • b. Other Concrete: Perform not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency
appears to change.
I 4. Air Content Test: Perform one test for each set of composite sample complying with
ASTM C 231.
5. Compressive Strength Tests: Make one set of 3 specimens for each day of structural
concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete,
I a. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7 days, two
specimens after curing 28 days, unless first specimen tested at 28 days does
not meet specified compressive strength, in which case retain one specimen
I
for testing after 35 days or as directed by Architect.
6. Batch Ticket:
a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to comply with
requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch Ticket Information.
b. Verify water/cement ratio.
•
1 1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio.
2) Reject truck if ratio does not conform.
1 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Surface Repairs for Exposed Concrete:
I 1. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat area to be patched with
Bonding Agent.
2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound.
3. Compact in place and screed as recommended by patching compound manufacturer.
I 4.
5. Finish to match adjoining work.
Strike off excess mortar at surface.
1 ..
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1 .
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 12
1 September.3, 2008
6. If defects in color and texture of surface cannot be repaired, remove and replace
concrete.
1
B. Physical Barrier Protection:
1. Barricade area containing fresh concrete slabs, stairs, ramps and walks for 24 hours
minimum.
2. Cover fresh concrete with plywood where exposed to public, pedestrian, and animal
traffic. -
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
1
•
1
•
1
1
1
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center • Metal Fabrications: 05 5000
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes metal fabrications as follows, but not limited to:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing.
1 B. Products Furnished, but not installed, under this section include the following:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and other items cast into concrete.
1 C. Related Sections: .
1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements
•
2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent testing and inspection procedures.
3. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for steel items embedded in concrete.
4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for metal finishes.
• I 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For grout, paint products, and each manufactured item specified.
I B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, fabrication details, installation, anchorage, and templates
for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. Indicate welds by
American Welding Society symbols.
I C. Welder certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code—Steel.''
"
2. AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum."
B. Welder Qualifications:
I 1. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which project is located, for structural
• welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months.
I. C: Comply with requirements /recommendations of American Institute of Steel Construction
Specifications for design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings and AISC
manual of steel construction.
I 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• A. Special inspection is required by State Building Code for structural welding and drilled epoxy
anchor bolts of this Section; Refer to Section 01 4500.
I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site with markings corresponding to markings shown on approved
I Shop Drawings.
B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
1
Tigard Senior Center Metal Fabrications: 05 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual location of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by 1
field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish 111,
dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate
wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
•
1.7 COORDINATION •
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
• templates, and directions for installing anchorage, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and
anchor bolts, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
1
A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For
metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without pitting, .
seam marks, mill markings, or blemishes.
1
•
• 2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A 36.
B. • Steel Tubing, ASTM A 500, cold- formed; Seamless where exposed.
2.3 • ALUMINUM V '
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 6061 -T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 -T6.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior ' , I
use and zinc - plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5a, at exterior walls
1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. - Select fasteners of type, grade, and class suited for use intended.
•
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts; and,
where indicated, flat washers. '
C. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head, annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts •
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts. Alloy •
• Group 1 (A1).
1
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide zinc - coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is galvanized.
1
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1
1 .
Tigard Senior Center Metal Fabrications: 05 5000
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a Toad equal to six times the load imposed when installed in masonry and four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488.
I 1. Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5a.
2. Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1). Stainless steel complying with
I • ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts.
F. Cast -In -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load
equal to four times the Toad imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488.
I 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27
cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153.
I G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
H. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
I I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
•
•
J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
1 K. Lock Washers: Helical spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
2.5 GROUT
1 A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory packaged, non- staining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C 1107.
1 1. . .
Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following:
a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout.
c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928.
d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout.
e. • Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout.
I 2.6 WELDING
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
I welded.
2.7 PRIMER
1 A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Provide primers specified in Section 09 9000.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc -dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC- Paint -20.
I C. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
I 2.8 FABRICATION
A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of jointed pieces.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Metal Fabrications: 05 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 4 I
September 3, 2008
•
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and easeedges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work. •
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
edges.
E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners"
wherever possible.
1. Use Phillips flat - headed countersink heads for exposed connections, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Located joints where least conspicuous.
3. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact.
4. Form elbows and bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and with
finished-surfaces smooth.
5. Where exposed to weather, fabricate seams and other connections to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
•
6. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
F. • Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide full penetration butt welds.
4. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in
other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
1. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports.
3. Cut; drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1
•
2.9 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from dimensions shown:
•
•
1. Overall length with both ends finished: 1/32 inch.
2. Overall length of member without finished ends:
a. For members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch • '
b. For members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch
B. Twists, bends, and kinks are not allowed.
2.10 FINISHES
A. General: Finish metal fabrications after assembly:
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Fabrications: 05 5000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008 •
' B. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 for steel and
iron products, and ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware. •
C. Shop prime uncoated steel,surfaces, except the following:
' 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete.
2. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded.
3. Stainless steel.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated steel surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors: SSPC -SP -6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interior: SSPC -SP -3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
1 E. Shop Priming: Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of minimum 2.0 mils.
1. Comply with SSPC -PA 1,, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building
Code required tests and inspections.
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control.
' B. Shop - welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to AWS D1.1.
Inspection procedures.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports
indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
' D. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL •
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
' metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces plumb, level, true, and free from rack; and measured from established
fines and levels.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
B. Field weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding of Exposed Connections: Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
• blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
D. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Metal Fabrications: 05 5000
• Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
•
E. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge drilled or punched holes with a buming torch.
F. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction.
1. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,
• through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
2. Provide standard plate washers under bolt heads and nuts. . . I
3. Do not thread bolts at shear plane.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:
•
1. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, -
including manufacturers' instructions and requirements indicated in Shop Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC -PA -1 for touching up shop- painted surfaces.
1. Apply to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. 1
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
•
END OF SECTION
1 •
•
1
•
•
1
•
•
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
•
' A. Section includes proprietary ornamental aluminum railings with glass infill.
B. Related Sections:
•
' 1.
2. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements
Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for concealed supports for railings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS •
•
1 A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine working
stresses of materials based on the following:
' 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate
tensile strength divided by 1.95.
2. Stainless Steel: 60•percent of minimum yield strength.
3. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
4: Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage),
as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12,
"Structural Properties of Glass."
' B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and -under conditions indicated:
' 1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Top Rail of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 Ibf/ ft.
• applied vertically downward.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
' b. Uniform load of 25 Ibf/ sq. ft. applied horizontally.
c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
' metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: For the following: • ,
•
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
1
• LRS Architects, Inc.
Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 2
•
September 3, 2008
B.- Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
•
. 1. For installed railings indicated to comply with design Toads, include structural analysis •
data signed and sealed by the professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements. "
D. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum." 1
1.5 STORAGE
A. Store railings in a dry, well - ventilated, weathertight place.
1.6 • FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field
measurements before fabrication and indicated measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, establish
• dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements.
Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, ,concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS E.
A. Proprietary Ornamental Aluminum Railing System with glass panel infill for exterior
application:
1
1. Sapa, 503 - 972 -1404.
•
a. Modern Series 200, with aluminum flat top rail TR 200.
1
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, marks,
1
rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. -
I Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors:Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise •
indicated.
.1. Provide either formed or cast metal brackets with predrilled holes for exposed bolt
I anchorage, unless concealed anchorage is shown or indicated.
2.3 MATERIALS
I A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated.
1. Extruded Bar and Shapes, Including Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5.
2. • Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063 -T6; Standard
Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063 -T832.
4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061 -T6:
5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, AIIoy 6061 -T6.
6. Castings: ASTM B 26, AIIoy A356 -T6.
I B. Glass and Glazing Materials.
1. - .
.
Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated),
Type 1 (Transparent flat glass), Quality Q3. Provide products that have been tested
I for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact -
strength according to 16 CFR, part 1201 for category II materials.
a. Clear Glass: Class 1 (clear).
I b. - Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less
than 6.0 mm.
c. Provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety
Glazing Certification Council.
1 • 2. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Provide glazing cement,
setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing
manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails.
I 3. Glazing Gaskets for Structural Glazing: Provide glazing gaskets and related
accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill
panels in post - supported railings.
I 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
1 A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for exterior applications. .
1 ,
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
D. Anchoring Cement: Factory packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project - site to create pourable anchoring, I
patching, and grouting compound.
1. - Water Resistant Product: At exterior locations, provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof
coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following: 1
1. Aluminum Components: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners. 1
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and
railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design Toads.
C Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to
other Work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are standard fastening method for
handrail and railing indicated.
1. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6. FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacings, details, finish, and anchorage, but not Tess than that required to
• support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
1
•
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
1
G. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard
system of sleeve and socket fittings.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1.
' Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 H. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings.
1. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush,,smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
I 2. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this
is manufacturer's standard splicing method
I. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending.
1 1. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration. required;
2. Maintain profile of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing
•
• components. .
J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
I K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless
I • otherwise indicated. .
L. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not Tess than 6 inches long with inside
dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater that outside dimensions of post, with steel plate
I forming bottom closure.
2.7 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
I A. Glass Panels: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and
bite on glazing panels.
1. Glass Type: Tempered glass.
I 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
I recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces.
B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A41 (Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
I
PART .3 EXECUTION
•
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine finish wall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify and coordinate
that concealed reinforcements have been installed and clearly marked for Installer.
I 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. .
1
1 •. .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008 1
B. Perform cutting,.drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railings. Set railings in
location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from 1
rack. ,
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and thatare intended for field connection by mechanical or 1
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. _ Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake
of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum alloys that will be contact with I
grout, concrete, wood, or dissimilar materials, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. .
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints. 1
E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. 1
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS .
A. Welded Connections: 1
•
1. Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
2. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether
I
welding is performed in shop or in field.
B. Nonwelded Connections:
1. Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. • 1
2. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
3. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to
match finish of railings. 1
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Anchor posts to concrete substrates by one of the following methods, filling annular space 1
between post and sleeve, or post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions:
1. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. 1
2. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than OD of
post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material before inserting 1
posts.
B. Cover anchorage joint with a flange of same metal as post, attached to post by one of the
following methods:
•
1. Weld to post after placing anchoring material.
2. By set screws.
C. Anchor posts to floor type as required by conditions, bolted to supporting members. 1
1. Use fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. .
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
11 -
1
Tigard Senior Center Ornamental Aluminum Railings: 05 7310
' Garden Room Addition • Page 7
September 3, 2008
Anchor rail ends to wall substrate as required sleeves or flanges connected to rail ends and
anchored to supporting structure.
E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
1 1. Provide bracket with 1 -1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished
wall surface.
2. Locate brackets as indicated, or at spacing required to support structural Toads if not
1 indicated.
•
3.5 GLASS PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Post - Supported Glass Railings: -
1. Install assembly in accordance with Shop Drawings and system manufacturer's
' instructions.
2. Erect posts and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels.
3. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field.
4. Protect edges from damage.
3.6 CLEANING .
• . A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
I abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
B. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and
rinsing with clean water and wiping dry.
•
1 C. Clean and polish glass.
3.7 - PROTECTION
A. • Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer.
1 • 1. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains
of correction work.
' 1. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and
refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
•
' END OF SECTION
•
1 -
•
•
1
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes, but not limited to, the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber and timber.
2. Sheathing.
I 3. Wood blocking and hailers._
4. Nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware required to perform
rough carpentry.
I B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1733: Wood I- Joists.
2. Section 06 2000: Finish Carpentry, for blocking and nailer requirements for exterior
I exposed wood. .
3. Section 06 4000: Architectural Woodwork, for wood blocking support requirements for
wall supported casework.
I • 4. Section 07 1813: Pedestrian Traffic Deck Membrane, for requirements for sheathing,
blocking and nailers.-
5. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flexible membrane flashing installed
at framed openings.
I 6. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes related to wood framing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
1 C. Lumber grading, inspection, and treatment agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference
them, include the following:
I 1. ALSC: American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated. .
2. APA: American Plywood Association.
3. AWPB: The American Wood - Preservers' Association.
4. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority: .
I 5.
6. WCLIB:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for the following:
I 1. Sheathing.
B. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses.
' 1. Indicate species and grade for each use and design values approved by the ALSC •
Board of Review.
C. Wood data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer.
1. Include certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
2. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
D. Research or evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating
compliance with State Building Code for the following:
1. Metal framing anchors.
2. Power- driven fasteners.
3. Power - actuated fasteners.
4. Engineered wood products. •
5. Wood preservative treated wood.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers, trained and experienced in necessary crafts, familiar with specified
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section.
B. Codes and standards:
1. In addition to complying with applicable codes and regulations of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by
• Architect, comply with the following:
a. WWPA Product Use Manual, for selection and use of products.
• b. American Forest & Paper Association, National Design Specifications for
Wood Construction, for conformance with structural lumber and fastenings.
c. United States Product Standards, Standard for Construction and industrial
Plywood, PS1 ANSI A199.1.
d. APA Plywood Design Specification APA Y510.
•
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1
•
A. Comply with State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code, based on IBC, Chapter 23. .
B. Special inspections are required as stated in State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code,
based on IBC Section 106 and Chapter 17. •
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING •
•
A. Protection: •
•
1. Stack lumber flat, shored up off ground surface on blocks or raised platform.
2. Cover wood and protect from weather exposure.
3. Space between each bundle to provide air circulation.
• 4. Examine wood sheathing upon delivery and reject panels that are delivered with
broken corners or edges crushed bytundling straps.
5. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately from other
grades.
6. Do not overload, in place, floor or roof framing with temporarily stored materials.
1.7 COORDINATION 1
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
those trades to interface with work of this Section. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition 3
September 3, 2008
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS
' A. Lumber Standard: Comply with American Softwood Lumber Standard, DOC PS 20.
1. Dressing Requirements: Smooth four sides, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Dimension Lumber Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent at time of dressing.
' B. Wood Structural Panels: Provide APA performance rated panels complying with grade, span
rating, and exposure durability classification indicated, and the following:
' 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. •
2. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
C. Engineered Wood Products:
' 1. Provide engineered wood products that are acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
' 2. Allowable Stress Design: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, which meet or exceed those indicated.
' 2.2 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS
A._ Identify each piece of framing lumber by grade stamp of WCLIB or WWPA.
1 B. Identify each wood sheathing panel as to species, grade, and glue type with APA stamp.
C. Stamp each preservative treated wood piece with AWPB treatment stamp or furnish
certificate of inspection with each shipment.
' 1. For exposed lumber to receive a stained or natural finish; mark end or back.of each
piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Provide lumber and plywood complying with applicable requirements of AWPA, as
follows:
1. Lumber: AWPA C2.
2. Plywood: AWPA C9.
1 B. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.
C. For exposed wood to receive stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not
' require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, contain colorants, or adversely affect
finishes.
D. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for wood, and 15
1 percent for plywood.
E. Treat the following 'wood items:
' 1. Nailers, blocking, curbs, stripping and similar items in associated with roofing,
flashing and waterproofing.
•
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 4 '
September 3, 2008
2 Floor plates, sills, blocking, furring, stripping and similar items in contact with
concrete.
3. Plywood used with pedestrian traffic deck membrane, flashing, and waterproofing.
F. Where possible, precut material before treatment. Apply field treatment, complying with AWPA •
M4 to cut surfaces. '
G. Products: •
•
1. Nisus Corporation: BORA -CARE Wood Preservative.
2. Chemical Specialties, Inc., ACQ Preserve Plus.
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500.
• 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS •
A. Concealed Dimension Lumber: Provide species of grades indicated: •
1. Studs and Plates, Non -Load Bearing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
Stud Grade
•
2. Studs and Plates, Load Bearing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB •
No.2 &BTR
3. Joists and Other Framing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
No. 2
4. Beams, Stringers and Posts: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
No. 1
5. Bucks, Blocking, Bridging, Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
Stripping and Miscellaneous: No. 2
•
6. Sills, Sleepers, Plates, Nailing Pressure Treated •
Blocks and Other Wood in Contact Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
•
. with Concrete: No. 2 •
7. Concealed Boards for Furring. Common No. 3 WWPA
• Standard WCLIB
•
B. Concealed Timber Framing: Provide species of grades indicated:
1. Beams, Stringers and Posts: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB
No. 1
C. Concealed Engineered Wood Lumber:
1. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Structural composite of wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with exterior -type adhesive
complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde, evaluated and
monitored according to ASTM D 5456.
2. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): Structural composite of wood strand elements with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with exterior -type adhesive
complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde, evaluated and
monitored according to ASTM D 5456.
•
LRS Architects, Inc. • •'
•
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
I 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products from the following, or approved:
a. Trus Joist, a Weyerhaeuser business.
1 • D. Exposed Framing Lumber: Provide species and of grades indicated according to the ALSC
National Grading Rule provisions of the inspection agency listed.
1 1. Douglas Fir, Select Structural; WWPA.
E. Structural Use Panels; Comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
I 1. Wall Sheathing: C -D plywood, square edges, Span Rating 32/16, Exterior, Structural
I; 1/2 inch thickness.
2. Plywood Combination .Subfloor - Underlayment: DOS PS 1, C -C Plugged, T & G,
I Exterior, Structural I, Underlayment.
a. Span Rating: Not less than 48 o.c.
• b. • Nominal Thickness: Not-less than 1 -1/8 inch.
I c. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
d. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
2.5 FASTENERS
1 A. General:
- 1. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
I 2. for material and manufacture .
Where in contact with preservative treated wood, provide fasteners as follows:
a. Interior Locations: Hot -dip, zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153.
I b. Exterior Locations and where stainless steel framing anchors are used: Type
304 stainless steel.
B. Roof and Wall Sheathing: Hot-dip zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153 or Type 304
1 stainless.steel.
1. Screws for "Dry-Wall" Type, Non -Load Bearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM
I C. C 1002 for steel framing less than 0.033 inch thick.
Screws for fastening: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by screw
manufacturer for material being fastened, with organic - polymer or other corrosion - protective
I coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. •
•
C. , Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. •
1 D. • Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and
1 where indicated, flat washers.
F. • Power Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272.
I G.' Powder Activated Drive Pins: Hilti or Ramset. .
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without
failure, a Toad equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies
and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488.
1. Interior Locations: Carbon steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, ,
Class Fe /Zn 5. -
2. Exterior Locations: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593.
and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
3. Attachment to Concrete: Kwik -Bolt or sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red Head Wedge
Anchor by Phillips, Trubolt or Dynabolt by Ramset, Parabolt by U.S.M.
2.6 • METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc.
1. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500.
B. Interior Locations; Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653 coating desigriation.
1. Where in contact with preservative treated wood: Provide G185 coating.
C. Exterior Locations; Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Type 316.
1
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Construction Adhesive /Glue: Per Industry Standard APA AFG -01.
1. Adhesive for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM
D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
B. Sill- Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber resilient insulation 1 inch nominal thickness, compressible to
1/32 inch, width to suit width of sill members.
•
1. Damp Locations: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch, width to suit width of sill
members.
C. Water Repellant Preservative: NWWDA tested and accepted formulation containing 3- indo -2-
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active I '
ingredient.
PART 3 • EXECUTION •
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required level and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted.
1. Produce joints that are tight, true, and well nailed.
2. Do not shim framing components. - 1
B. Provide and locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
LRS Architects, Inc. '
•
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 061000
I Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
- I C. Framing Standard: • ,
1. Comply with American Forest & Paper Association's (AF &PA) "Details for
Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. •
I 1. Provide metal post caps and bases at posts and columns.
E. Do not splice structural framing members between supports.
I • F. Provide minimum 2 inch nominal thick blocking and framing as indicated and as required to
support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, trim, toilet accessories, cabinets, toilet
compartments, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical equipment, and the like.
I G. Block edges of discontinuous sheathing, and edges of sheathing where such blocking is
shown in Drawings. Install nominal 2 by 4 nominal size or thicker blocking at unsupported
joints in wall sheathing. .
I H. Provide fire blocking in stud spaces, furred spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
. using fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 inch nominal
thickness and as follows:
I 1. Fire block concealed spaces of walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line
of top story, at not more than 96 inches o.c.
2. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, not more than 96
1 . . inches o.c. .. ,
I. Selection of Lumber Pieces:
I 1. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects do not interfere with placing
bolts or nails for proper connections.
2. Cut out and discard pieces with defects that render a piece unable to serve its
intended function.
3. Lumber may be rejected by Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for
excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper
cutting and fitting.
I 4. Hand select exposed framing members for appearance and function.
J. Provide field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative treated
lumber and plywood.
1 K Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
. complying with the following:
I 1. Oregon Structural Specialty Code, IBC Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule."
2. NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners.
L. Hang mechanical equipment, mechanical and sprinkler piping larger than 2 inch diameter, or
1 other items producing hanger load over 50 lbs. by a system approved by Architect.
1. Provide additional framing for any hanger producing a load over 200 lbs. to transfer
loads to main structural beams or walls.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1 •
•
1
• Tigard Senior Center Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition . Page 8
September 3, 2008
•
M. Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings, and at each
•
floor and ceiling surface. Shim as required for tolerance of finished work.
1. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 by 2 nominal size at 16 inches o.c.
•
N. Temporary Support: Adequately brace structure for wind and earthquake forces until floor,
roof and wall have been secured.
3.2 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION •
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates, except single top plate may be
used for non -load bearing partitions.
1'. Walls: Install 2 by 4 nominal studs at maximum 16 inches on center, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Provide minimum nominal 2 by 6 studs for wall studs over 12 feet of
unsupported length.
2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 8 feet high
using members of 2 inch nominal thickness of same width as wall.
B. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs except that 2 studs may be used for
interior non -load bearing partitions.
C Frame openings with multiple studs and headers of member thickness equal to width of studs. - 1
Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For non -load bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not Tess than
the following for indicated opening width:
a. Openings 4 feet and less: 4 inch nominal depth header.
b. Openings 4 to 6 feet: 6 inch nominal depth header. •
c., Openings 6 to 10 feet: 8 inch nominal depth header.
d. Openings 10 to 12 feet: 10 inch nominal depth header.
2. For load bearing walls, provide double jamb studs for openings 5 feet and Tess in •
width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. "
3.3 CEILING JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joists: Install with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified for floor
joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
3.4 SHEATHING INSTALLATION . 1
.
A. Verify blocking is in place and located properly prior to installation of sheathing.
B. Placement of Wood Sheathing: 1
1. Place wood sheathing panels with face grain perpendicular to supports at roof and
• vertically at walls, continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise
indicated. Stagger end joints 4 feet at adjacent panels.
2. Adjust layout to eliminate sheathing pieces Tess than one foot wide.
3. Center joints over supports. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends using
spacer tool, including at tongue and groove joints.
4. Nail to wood framing.
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
•
1 Tigard Senior Center "Rough Carpentry: 06 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
• ' 5.
6. For subfloor and wall sheathing, back panel edges with minimum 2 by 4 blocking.
Fastening Wood Sheathing for Walls:
a. Use minimum 8d common nail size for nailing wood sheathing.
b. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches o.c. at panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. in
panel field.
c. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements.
1 7. Fastening Wood Subflooring:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
' c. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches o.c. at panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. in
panel field.
d. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements.
1 3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove split and warped framing prior to installation of finish materials.
B. Adjust framing to comply with location and deflection requirements of National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction.
C. Remove and replace sheathing panels with edges split or damaged by fasteners.
END OF SECTION
1 •
•
1
1 •
.1
1
1
1
•
1 .
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1 •
•
Tigard Senior Center I- Joists: 06 1733
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008 •
U PART1 GENERAL .
1.1 . SUMMARY
1 A. Section Includes:
1. Prefabricated wood web I-joists for floor framing.
2. Bridging, bracing and anchorage.
II B. Related Sections: •
1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements
I
2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for floor sheathing, engineered wood products,
and wood bracing - material. _
3. Structural Drawings: Notes
I 1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading and inspection.agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them,
Il . .
- include the following: •
1. APA: American Plywood Association. .
2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
1 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide joist configurations, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and
bracing.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist cambers, and framed
openings, signed and sealed by a professional.engineer licensed in the State where Project is
located.
1. Submit design calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in
I the State where Project is located. •
C. Manufacturer's certification that joists have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's
I design and installation requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
I A. Manufacturer /Fabricator: Company specializing in the manufacture of the products specified
in this Section with minimum three years documented experience; fabricating plant approved
by ICBO certified testing agency.
I B. Design joists and associated components under direct supervision of a professional engineer
experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State where Project is located.
. C. Joist manufacturer to inspect all "I" joists after they have been erected including sheathing,
I bridging, and blocking associated with joists. Manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect
that the inspection was made and that the joists are in acceptable condition and meet with the
manufacturer's design and installation requirements.
I 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code requirements for loads, seismic, and other governing criteria.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center • Wood I- Joists: 06 1733
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under applicable provisions of Section 01 6000,
Rough Carpentry.
B. Protect structural components from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, •
•
braced to resist movement. •
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 1
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated in Drawings and Shop Drawings. •
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
•
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. • Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of the • 1
following, or approved:
•
1. Trus Joist (TJI).
2.2 FABRICATED UNITS
•
•
A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I- shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood -based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to
flanges. Provide units with material requirements complying of and with structural capabilities
established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055:
• 1. Provide I joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde. •
2. Web: Either of the following:
a. Plywood, complying with DOC PS 1, Exterior grade. -
b. Oriented Strand Board complying with DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
3. Provide units complying with APA PRI -400, factory marked with APA trademark
indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and
compliance with APA standard.
•
B. Rim Boards: Performance rated product complying with APA PRR -401.
1. Material: All-veneer panels, composite panels, glulams or structural composite
lumber.
2. Thickness and Grade: As indicated in Structural Drawings.
3. Factory mark with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
4. Provide performance -rated product complying with APA PRR -401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
C. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing as recommended by joist manufacturer, or as
indicated. 1
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Blocking and Bridging: Materials as specified in Section 06 1000, Rough Carpentry.
O.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center Wood I- Joists: 06 1733
• Garden Room Addition Page 3
• September 3, 2008
' 2.4 FABRICATION •
A. Wood Chord and Wood Web Joists: Design and manufactured to standards set forth in
NER -200 Report.
B. Brace members for support during transit.
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of support items.
' 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install engineered wood framing to comply with manufacturer's instructions with all
accessories required for a complete system.
•
• 1. Do not cut chord members of wood I- Joists. -
1 B. Set structural members to required levels and lines, with members plumb.
C. Install blocking at all bearing points, as indicated, and as required to support facing materials,
1 fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure -
plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
' bridging and bracing, and sheathing material has been applied. Design and temporary
bracing and shoring is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
•
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
' 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Joist manufacturer to inspect joists after they have been erected, and sheathing, bridging,
blocking, and the like are in place.
B. Joist manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect certifying that the inspection was made
' and that joists are in acceptable condition and meet the manufacturer's design and installation
requirements.
END OF SECTION •
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
I Tigard Senior Center Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL -
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes:
1. Exterior standing and running trim. ,
I B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for exposed framing, and furring, blocking, and
other carpentry work not exposed to view.
I 2. Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork, interior woodwork not specified in this
Section.
3. Section 07 4646: Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding, for siding to receive wood trim and
wood battens specified in this Section.
I
4. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants
5. Section 09 9000: Painting, priming and back priming of finish carpentry.
I 1.2 - SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, process and factory fabricated product.
I 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
2. For water- borne - treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer. Qualifications: Experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in
I material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in- service performance.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I A Delivery and Storage: .
1. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. •
I 2. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels.
3. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
I 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
I recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
1.6 COORDINATION
1 , A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related items
of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior woodwork can be supported and
installed as indicated.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL •
A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards'
Committee Board of Review.
B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of
each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by inspection agency.
C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,
include the following: , I
1. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
2. - WWPA - Western Wood, Products Association.
2.2 • WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood) except that lumber that is not in contact with ground and is continuously protected
from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Pressure - impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Do not use chemical formulations that require incising.
3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent, finish, do not use chemical
formulations that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
4. Kiln -dry material after treatment to levels required for untreated material. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
5. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
6. Application: Exterior trim and other exterior wood carpentry work indicated in
Drawings.
B.. Acceptable Products:
1. Nisus Corporation: BORA -CARE Wood Preservative.
2. Chemical Specialties, Inc.: ACQ Preserve Plus.
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
1
2.3 FABRICATION
•
• A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent.
1
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
.1
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
•
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
U A. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber complying with the following requirements including
those of the grading agency listed with species:
I 1. Species: Western red cedar.
a. WCLIB: Cedar Industrial Clears; Grade B and Better. •
1 b. WWPA: Grade B.
2. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued -up lumber or solid lumber stock.
•
I B. Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except members with ends expo in finished work.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS .
•
I A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of the following materials, in sufficient
length to penetrate minimum of 1 -1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended
I by manufacturer. -
1. Stainless steel. .
2. Hot -dip galvanized steel. .
3. Aluminum.
I . Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
. anchorage. .
I 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors.
' C. Flashing: Comply with requirements of Section 07 6000 for flashing materials installed in
finish carpentry. .
D. Sealant: Comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 for materials required for sealing
exterior woodwork.
2.6 FINISHES
1 A. General: Paint as specified in Section 09 9000, Painting, for exterior wood.
• I • B. Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of
exterior finish carpentry. Apply two coats to end -grain surfaces.
1. Apply sealer or primer in shop or in the field. .
I
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry.
I 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
I .
1
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 4 • •
September 3, 2008
3.2 , PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in
1
installation areas.
B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Section 09 9000, Painting:
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
•
A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, 1
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangement
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where required for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and I
running trim. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate
exposed surfaces of finish carpentry components.
5. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces
of finish carpentry components.
C. Preservative Treated Wood: Were cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes
according to AWPA M4.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to • 1
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use
fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Finish: Finish according to specified requirements.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available.
.1. . Do not use pieces Tess than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Scarf running
joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
2. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight - fitting joints with full - surface
contact throughout length of joint.
3. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. •
4. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required.
B. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Finish, Carpentry: 06 2000
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
. September 3, 2008
I 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. 'Adjust joinery for uniform
I appearance.
B. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. -
' 3.6 PROTECTION ' •
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage
1
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
I • END OF SECTION
1 •
1
1
1 . .
1 •
1 •
•
i •
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
I . .
1
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
1 Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes the following for interior architectural woodwork:
•
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Plastic laminate clad cabinets. .
I 3. Plastic laminate countertops.
4. Shop finishing of woodwork.
I B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
I
•
2. Section 06 2000: Finish Carpentry, for exterior woodwork exposed to view not
specified in this Section.
3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants
I 4. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors.
5. Section 09 9000: Painting, for wood finishes.
6. Division 22: Plumbing, for plumbing work incorporated in casework.
I 7. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for HVAC work incorporated in
casework.
8. _ Division 26: Electrical, for electrical work incorporated in casework.
I 1.2 DEFINITIONS
•
A. Architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork .
1 • installation. .
B. Cabinet Surfacing:
1. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including
visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. Bottom of wall cabinets are
defined as "exposed."
I 2. Semi - exposed Surfaces: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including
interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers,
web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly
against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets
I and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified including cabinet hardware and
accessories, and installation instructions.
1 B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show location of each item with dimensioned plans and elevations, indicating
I materials, component profiles, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods,
accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes.
2 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and electrical work
incorporated in woodwork.
1
• LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
4. Show direction grain of wood faced items for transparent finish.
C. Samples:
•
1. Lumber to receive Transparent Finish: Two 5 by 24 inch long for each species and
cut, finished on one side and 1 edge.
2. Plastic Laminate Clad Panel Products: Two 8 by 10 inch size samples for each color,
texture and pattern of plastic laminate and melamine material specified.
3. Submit one sample of each hardware item in specified finish.
a. Approved samples may be used in the final installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI) "Architectural .
Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: • 1
•
•
1. Firm experienced in producing casework for projects of similar size, quality and
complexity.
2. Engage a firm qualified to assume single- source responsibility for fabricating,
finishing, and installing Work of this Section in accordance with the referenced
• standard.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING '
A. Protect units from moisture damage, and damage by project construction operations.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Maintain temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F in areas where architectural woodwork is
installed.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by field 1
measurements before being enclosed and indicated measurements in Shop Drawings.
B. Field verify measurements of other construction that woodwork is intended to fit to prior to
fabrication of woodwork. Where measurements cannot be made prior to Shop Drawings,
provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established woodwork dimensions shown in Shop Drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A • Coordinate work of this Section with plumbing and electrical rough -in, and other finish work.
LRS Architects, Inc. • '
•
•
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 3
•
September 3, 2008
' B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, furring, blocking, reinforcements, and other related
units of work specified in other Sections for supporting and installing architectural woodwork
items.
•
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
I A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for
each type of woodwork and grade specified.
•
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
' A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; average moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or
Hemlock species.
1 B. Hardwood Lumber: AHA A135.4.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 or Grade M -2 Exterior Glue, 45 pcf dens ity, of grade
1 to suit application; sanded faces;
•
•
1. Roseburg Forest Products: Roseburg SkyBlend.
1 D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1; core materials Douglas Fir or Hemlock species.
E. Hardboard: AHA A135.4 Class 1 Tempered; smooth two sides, 1/4 inch thick unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Masonite Corporation, or approved.
'
•
F. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade MD made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
1. Medite II; SierraPine Ltd., Medite Div.
2. Weyerhaeuser; Premier Plus.
2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATES
A. Plastic Laminate (PLAM): High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with NEMA
LD3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard;
manufacturer, color, pattern, and surface texture as scheduled.
B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2, with
•
surface of thermally fused, melamine- impregnated decorative paper complying with . .
LMA SAT -1, color as selected:
•
1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG -1 on components
with exposed or semiexposed edges.
' 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
•
a. RMP; Roseburg Melamine Products.
b. KorTron; Willamette Industries.
1 C. Backing Sheet: NEMA LD•3, Grade BKL, undecorated plastic laminate.
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Aliphatic resin, Resorcinol, or approved.
E. Joint Sealant for Plastic Laminate: Clean translucent mildew- resistant silicone by Dow,
1
General Electric, or approved.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1
•
A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Select type, size and finish to suit application.
1
C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.5 HARDWARE '
A. Drawer Slides: Load capacity of drawers (loaded with paper) is defined as drawer depth by
height by width (in inches) by 0.017 lbs. cu /in. plus 30 pounds.
1
1. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 7432, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load
capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide or less.
B. Cabinet Shelf Supports, Adjustable: Knape & Vogt No. 346 for drilled holes; Nickel - plated
finish.
C. Wall Shelf Supports, Adjustable: Knape & Vogt Heavy duty No. 87 standards with No. 187 I
brackets; Anochrome finish.
D. Cabinet Hinges:
• 1. Concealed Hinge (European Type): Self closing, minimum 165 degree opening,
nickel- plated. Provide minimum 3 hinges for doors over 48 inches high.
a. Grass America, Inc.: No. 3903. 1
b. Blum: Clip Modul 170 Series.
c. Hafele: Duomatic 165.
E. Cabinet Catches: Heavy -duty magnetic catch, Epco 1000LS, or approved.
1. Standard Cabinet Doors: Provide one per door.
2. Closet Doors: Provide two per leaf.
F. Drawer and Door Locks: 5 -pin tumbler; dead bolt with metal strike:
1. Doors: National N8123 -26D.
2. Drawers: National N8149 -26D, or Corbin No. CB738.
G. Drawer and Door Pulls: Doug Mockett, Arc Pull DP54D. . 1
H. Silencers: Clear oft vinyl round bumpers, 2 per door.
I. ' Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln -dried to less
1
than 15 percent moisture content.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 B. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage.
I 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
I 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
•
A. Interior Woodwork Grade:. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom Grade woodwork '
I complying with requirements of referenced AWI Quality Standard.
B. • AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated.
I C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application in shop to
greatest extent possible before delivery to Project site.
1. Dissemble only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1
D. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
I E. Shop cut and locate openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, • plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items, using templates or roughing -in diagrams.
I 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a water- resisting coating.
2.8 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 300 for Standing and Running
Trim.
. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: As indicated in Finish Legend in Drawings.
I C. Groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for
members ws enk PLASTIC LAMINATE ith expo CLAD ed nds CABINETS in fi ished wor .
I 2.9 _
A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 400 Architectural Cabinets.
1 B. Laminate Clad Panels:
1. Core Material: Particleboard.
1 2. Overall Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High - pressure decorative laminate (HPDL)
I complying with the following:
1.. Horizontal Surfaces other than Countertops: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness.
I 3. Edges: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness.
• D. . Laminates for Semi- exposed Surfaces: Thermoset Decorative Overlay.
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc. •
I
I . .
1
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
Garden Room Addition . Page 6
September 3, 2008
E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High - pressure
decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
Subject P q .P P
indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings.
G. Apply plastic laminate cladding in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured
sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline. •
H. Provide dust panels of 1/4 inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.10 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 400 Architectural Cabinets.
B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL), complying with the following:
1. HPDL Grade: HGS, General purpose type, 1.2 mm nominal thickness.
a. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP, 1.0 mm nominal thickness. 1
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ,
products indicated for each designation in the Finish in the Drawings.
3. Apply. plastic laminate cladding in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. -
4. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on
center.
•
5. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
6. Edges: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
• 7. Core Material: Particleboard. 1
a. For countertops with sinks and lavatories, use Grade M -2- Exterior Glue
• particleboard or medium - density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
8. Overall Thickness of Countertop Panel: Not Tess than 3/4 inch.
9. , Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of
countertop substrate.
2.11 SHOP FINISHING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements for AWI Section 1500 Factory Finishing. 1
B. General: Refer to Section 09 9000, Painting, for finishing opaque finished architectural
woodwork.
1. To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork in the fabrication shop.
2. Touch up, clean, and polish after installation at Project site.
C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling 1
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing •
woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1.
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
I Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
I D. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and end -grain surfaces.
1. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate clad woodwork do not require backpriming
1 when surfaced with plastic laminate, or thermoset decorative panels.
E. Opaque Finish: Specified in Section 09 9000, Painting. .
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
I A. Condition architectural woodwork to prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
I 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Comply with.AW1 Section 1700 for the same grade specified for type of
architectural woodwork involved, and as specified in this Section.
I B. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, and straight.
I . 1. Shim as required with concealed shims.
2. Install level and plumb to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
. I finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates as required
for proper support and attachment.
E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and fill flush with adjacent surfaces
matching final finish.
1 F. Standing and Running Trim:
1 Install with minimum of joints possible.
I 2.
3. Do not use pieces Tess than 36 inches long, except where necessary.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
4. Wood Base: Fill gaps between top of base and.wall with plastic wood filler, sand
smooth, and finish same as wood base.
1 G. Cabinets:
1. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units, and
I countertops. .
2. . Carefully scribe cabinets abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32
inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. .
I 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than
16 inches on center.
4. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using steel angles.
LRS Architects, Inc.
I . .
•
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000
Garden Room Addition Page . 8
September 3, 2008 .
H. Plastic Laminate Countertop:
1. Anchorage: Secure countertops to grounds, furring and solid blocking with
countersunk fasteners and blind nailing as required.
a. Mechanically fasten back'splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16
. inches on center.
2. Seal space between backsplash and wall with sealant.
•
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings. • '
•
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
C. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
•
D. • Clean cabinets on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces.
E. Touch up shop applied finishes and repair and restore damaged or soiled areas to eliminate
functional and visual defects.
•
1. Where it is not possible to repair defects, replace woodwork.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection and maintain conditions to ensure that casework is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
•
•
. 1
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
1
•
•
1
•
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Traffic Deck Membrane: 07 1814
Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 1
•
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes fully adhered sheet membrane surfacing for pedestrian traffic on wood
decks.
B. Related Sections: '
I 1. Section 06 1000:. Rough Carpentry, for preparation of plywood substrate.
I 1.2 SUBMITTALS . ' .
A. Product Data, including characteristics, limitations; Identify dissolving solvents, and potential
destructive compounds.
I B. Shop Drawings: Installation and seaming plan, showing joints, termination details, and
interface with adjacent materials. .
U - C. Samples: Two samples 8 by 8 inches in size illustrating color and surface texture.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental conditions required to
install product and potential incompatibilities with adjacent materials.
I E. Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and cleaning.
1. List common causes of damage to the membrane and instructions for temporary
1 patching until permanent patching can be accomplished. .
. F. Applicator Qualifications: Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications including
evidence that applicator is licensed or approved by the manufacturer and listing five
I successfully'completed projects similar in scope and complexity to work of this Section with
current phone numbers of Architect and Owner contacts for verification.
1. Submit documentation of designated project foreman's training certification by
1 manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
. A. Applicator Qualifications: Company with experienced workers trained and currently certified by
membrane manufacturer and familiar with requirements and methods for proper performance
of Work of this Section.
I . 1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site
at all times during installation and who shall have certification of training by
manufacturer.
1 B. Pre - installation Meeting: In accordance with requirements of Section 01 3100. •
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING -
1 A. Deliver products to job site in the manufacturer's original containers, and maintain with labels
- intact and legible. , ' .
B. • Store in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
•
1 -
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1 '
•
.1
Tigard Senior Center Pedestrian Traffic Deck Membrane: 07 1814
Garden Room Addition Page 2 I
September 3, 2008 •
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with local regulations regulating use of adhesive products containing VOCs. I
B. Provide product that complies with ADA recommended static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for
level nonslip surfaces.
I
•
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install materials when temperatures are below 40 degrees F.
I
B. Restrict traffic from area where materials are being installed.
C. Complete installation of system without exposing the building interior, its contents or
I
employees, to inclement weather.
1.7 WARRANTY
I
A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years from date of Substantial Completion, .
covering defects in material.
1. Include coverage for delamination of system from substrate, and degradation of
I
waterproofing ability.
B. Provide installer's standard warranty for 2 years from date of Substantial Completion, covering
defects in workmanship. I
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. IB Roof Systems, Deckshield (800- 426 - 1626). - I
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. I
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Pedestrian Traffic Membrane: Mildew resistant flexible composite PVC sheet membrane
I designed to be water resistant, slip resistant, and fully adhered to substrate.
1. Membrane Thickness: Nominal 60 mils.
2. Width: 68 inches. •
I
3. Length: 90 feet.
4. Seaming Method: Hot air welding.
5. Color: Gray. - .
B. Accessories: 1
1. Adhesive:.Manufacturer's standard water based for wood, solvent based for concrete.
2. Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard metal termination bar with manufacturer's I
standard white finish.
3. Sealant: Manufacturer's recommended product.
. . 1
• LRS Architects, Inc. I
•
1 .
, 1 Tigard Senior Center Pedestrian Traffic Deck Membrane: 07 1814
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify -that surface condition of substrate is ready to receive sheet membrane.
1. Verify that all screws and nailheads are flush with or countersunk in plywood
substrate.
B. Verify that surface is free of ice and snow, dry, clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves,
projections, and properly sloped to drains or deck edges.
1 C. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1 A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive sheet membrane in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
. I B Fill joints, knot holes, voids and low areas with filler and sand smooth.
3.3 INSTALLATION
' A. Apply system materials' in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including joint
treatment, termination and flashing.
B. Apply sealant to junction of horizontal and intersecting surfaces to achieve watertight seal, at
1 around penetrations, drains, and edges.
C. Turn membrane minimum 3 inches up adjacent vertical walls, posts, and over deck perimeter.
D. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate; adhere membrane with minimum 1 -1/2 inch edge laps.
E. Hot air weld seams.
F. Mechanically fasten perimeter edges and at penetrations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
1 A. Clean soiled areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
• B. Protect surfaces from construction traffic and other deterioration until substantial completion.
' END OF SECTION
1 •
•
•
1
1
• LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
Tigard Senior Center Thermal Insulation: 07 2100
' Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes the following:
1. Blanket insulation.
' 2. Vapor retarders.
•
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for exterior wall framing to receive blanket
insulation.
2. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for acoustical sealant used in gypsum
board assemblies.
I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide with materials of this Section a continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at building
' enclosure elements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS •
•
A. Product Data: For each type of building insulation and vapor retarder specified.
•
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE •
•
I A. Engage a company•using workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and
familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this
section.
' B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined per test method indicated below:
1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire - Resistive Ratings: ASTM E 119:
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
•
' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources.
• • B. Store inside and in a dry location.
. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during •
1 installation.
D. Do not expose plastic insulation to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as
1 rapidly as possible.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Thermal Insulation: 07 2100
Garden Room.Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
•
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers
specified in Part 2 articles 1
B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. .
2.2 BLANKET INSULATION MATERIALS
1
A. Faced Blanket Insulation:
1. Manufacturers:
1
a. Design Standard: Johns Manville Kraft-Faced Formaldehyde -free Thermal
Insulation."
•
b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with formaldehyde -
free requirement or certification of compliance with GREENGUARD Emission
Standards-for insulation products:
•
1) CertainTeed Corporation.
•
2) Owens Corning.
2. ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C.
3. Type: Glass- fiber.
•
4. Vapor Retarder: Kraft, with 1.0 maximum permeability.
5. Provide min. 1 inch, wide flange along edges for attachment to framing
6. Thickness:
1
•
• a. Roof: As required to insulation -only R -Value of 25.
b. Wall: As required to achieve insulation -only R -Value of 19.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder facings.
B. Fasteners and Adhesives: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. .
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements of Sections in which
substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1
3.2 PREPARATION
•
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in Work of
this Section.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center Thermal Insulation: 07 2100
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL • .
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
•
I B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at
any time to ice, rain, and snow. .
I C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelope entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
I D. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
•
1 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
•
A. Apply in units to substrates by method indicated, or if no specific method is indicated,
I bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent
placement and support of units.
B. Install vapor retarding faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of assembly.
1 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
2. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane to form a
1 continuous barrier.
C. Install mineral -fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members as follows:
I 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that completely fill cavities formed by framing . • members.
2. Place insulation cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
I
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
4. Place insulation between pipes in wall and exterior side of assembly. Leave no gaps
or voids. 1
I 5. Maintain 3 inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
6. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
7. For wood framed construction, install insulation blankets according to ASTM C 1320
I and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapled flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material
1 is installed over it.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
I A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor
transmission.
1. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system.
I
2. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.
•
•
•
.1 •
.
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1 .
• 1
Tigard Senior Center Thermal Insulation: 07 2100
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
B. Wood Framing: Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing. Fasten vapor retarders to
framing at top, end and bottom edges; at perimeter wall openings; and at lap joints. - 1
. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor retarder taper or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage, both from weather exposure or
• construction operations.
B. Repair damaged insulation and vapor retarders.
•
• END OF SECTION
•
•
1
• 1
1
•
•
•
1
•
1
•
•
. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Weather Barriers: 07 2500
' Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3,.2008
I PART 1 • GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY •
•
A. Section includes weather - resistive barriers for wall application.
B. Related Sections:
1
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for wall sheathing to receive weather- resistive
barrier and protection during construction.
2. Section 07 4646: Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding, for finish materials installed over
'
3. weather- resistive barrier.
Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flexible flashing installed at wall
• openings coordinated with installation of weather - resistive barrier.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1 .
A. Product Data for each type product specified.
' B. Research or evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating
compliance with State Building Code for weather - resistive barriers.
1.3 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
I A. Convene a pre - installation conference in coordination with pre - installation conference for
placement of concrete floor slabs two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section.
' B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work for placement of •
air barriers.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING PAPER
A. Building Paper: Water- vapor - permeable, kraft building paper, except that water resistance
shall not be less than 1 hour and water -vapor transmission shall not be less than 75 g /sq. m x
24 h, meeting requirements of IBC Section 1404.2 as an alternate weather- resistive barrier.
1 1. Product: Fortifiber Building System Group "Super Jumbo Tex 60 Minute."
2.2 FASTENERS
1 • A. Type as recommended in writing by weather resistant barrier manufacturer.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
•
A. Verify substrate materials are sound, dry, and clean.
' B. Coordinate installation of weather - resistive barrier with flexible membrane flashing specified in
Se ction 07 6000 installed at wall openings and penetrations.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
Tigard Senior Center Weather Barriers: 07 2500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather - resistant sheathing paper. I
B. Building Paper:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. • •
2. Run horizontally, shingle fashion.
3. Lap 4 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically.
4. Fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
5 Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
6. Extend into jambs and sills of openings and seal corners with tape.
7. Coordinate installation of building paper with flexible membrane flashing installed at
wall openings. •
END OF SECTION
1
•
1.
•
1
•
1
•
1
1
•
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
•
1
' Tigard Senior Center Below -Grade Vapor Retarders: 07 2616
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
•
' PART1 GENERAL
•
1.1 SUMMARY.
' A. Section includes sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion under concrete floor slabs -on
grade.
•
B. - Related Sections:
1 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for concrete placed over vapor retarder.
2. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for underslab aggregate base substrate for vapor
•
' retarder.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data for each type product specified.
1.3 • PRE- INSTALLATION CONFERENCE •
• I A. Convene a pre - installation conference in coordination with pre - installation conference for
placement of concrete floor slabs within two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section.
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work for placement of
' concrete and concrete slab steel reinforcement,on vapor retarder.
•
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Vapor Retarder: Meet minimum requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class B, 10 mil thickness.
1 1. ASTM E 1745, Class B Requirements:
a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.3 perms.
•
' b. Maximum Tensile Strength: 30.0 Ibf /in.
c. Puncture Resistance: 1700 grams.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Floor Seal Technology, Inc.: TruBarrier.
b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group: Moistop Ultra 6 Underslab Vapor
'
c. Retarder.
W. R. Grace & Co.: Florprufe 120.
d. W. R. Meadows: Vapor -Mat 10 mil or 15 mil.
e. • Raven Industries, Inc.: Dura-Skrim D16WB. •
f. Reef Industries, Inc.: Griffolyn Type -85 Vapor Retarder.
g. Stego Industries, LLC: Stego Wrap 10 mil or 15 mil Vapor Barrier.
B. Vapor Retarder Tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive, by
1 manufacturer of vapor retarder, 4 inches width.
•
•
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Below -Grade Vapor Retarders: 07 2616
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
• PART 3 EXECUTION •
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION I
A. Verify substrate materials are dry and clean. Remove loose or foreign matter that might
impair adhesion. 1
B. Coordinate with work of other sections for location and treatment of penetrations through
vapor retarder, and placement of concrete and concrete reinforcement over vapor retarder.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder according to requirements and recommendations of
ASTM E 1643 without grandular fill; and manufacturers written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with recommended pressure sensitive tape. •
2. Turn vapor retarder up over end of concrete slab -on -grade and seal to foundation
wall. Leave end of vapor retarder exposed above top of slab.
3. . Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from vapor retarder, and tape according to
manufacturer's instructions. • -
4. Protect vapor retarder from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities.
5. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged
areas 6 inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape.
B. Note: Vapor retarder may be identified as "vapor barrier" in drawings.
•
. END OF SECTION
•
•
1
1
1
•
•
•
1
1
1
LRS.Architects, Inc. •
•
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646
' Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes the following fiber- cement products:
1. Panel siding. •
' 2. Soffit board.
B. Related Sections: •
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for building framing and sheathing.
2. ' Section 06 2000: Exterior Finish Carpentry, for wood trim.
3. Section 07 2500: Weather Barriers
4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
' 5.
6. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants
Section 09 9000: Painting, for field-applied finish.
1.2 SUBMITTALS •
• A. Product Data, for each type of product specified, including manufacturers specifications and
recommended details and methods for installation.
' B. Samples: 12 inches by width of unit, or 12 by 12 inch for panel products, of each type and
texture specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
•
A. Store products stacked on edge, or laid flat on a smooth, level surface.
' B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage.
• 1. If products become wet, allow to dry thoroughly before installing.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if
' existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to
manufacturer" written instructions. •
• 1.6 COORDINATION
1 A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 WARRANTY
1 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard'30 year, transferable, warranty.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
1•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008 ' •
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. James Hardie Building Products.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500.
1
2.2 FIBER - CEMENT SIDING
A. Fiber - Cement Siding: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, non - asbestos fiber- cement flat sheets.
1
•
B. Panel Siding:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: "WeatherBoards" Vertical Siding complying with the 1
following:
a. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
b. Weight: 2.6 Ibs /sq. ft. •
c. Size: 4 by 8, 9 or 10 feet, as required to reduce horizontal joints to a
minimum.
d. Texture: "Cedar. Panel," no grooves.
1
2. James Hardie Building Products: "Hardipanel" Vertical Siding complying with the
following:
a. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
b. Weight: 2.3 lbs/sq. ft.
.c. Size: 4 by 8, 9 or 10 feet, as required to reduce horizontal joints to a
minimum. I
d. Texture: "Cedarmill."
C. Soffit Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: "WeatherBoard" horizontal soffit board complying with the
following:
a. Type: Nonvented. • •
b. Thickness: 5/16 inch. •
c. Weight: 2.5 Ibs /sq. ft. .
d. Style and Size: Cedar Texture, 12 inches by 12 feet.
d. Style and Size: Cedar Texture, 16 inches by 12 feet.
d. Style and Size: Cedar Texture, 24 inches by 12 feet.
d. Style and Size: Select Cedar, 12 inches by 12 feet.
d. Style and Size: Select Cedar, 16 inches by 12 feet.
d. Style and Size: Select Cedar, 24 inches by 12 feet.
2. James Hardie Building Products: "Hardisoffit" horizontal soffit board complying with
' the following:
a. Type: Nonvented.
b. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
c. Weight: 1.9 Ibs /sq. ft.
d. Size: 12 inches by 12 feet.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center . Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3; 2008 .
I d.
d. Size: 16 inches by 12 feet. .
Size: 24 inches by 8 feet.
e. Texture: "Select Cedermill."
I D. Exterior Trim:
• 1. Species: Specified in Section 06 2000.
I 2. ' Size: As indicated in Drawings.
E. Wood Battens:
I 1. Species: Specified in Section 06 2000 for exterior trim.
2. Size: As indicated in Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
1 • A. Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 07 6000 at window and door heads •
and where indicated.
I 1. Finish: Same color as siding. .
D. Weather. Barrier: Specified in Section 07 2500.
1 C. Joint Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200. .
D. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended and approved by siding
I . manufacturer for 90 MPH wind speed, exposure category B, as described in Tables 2 and 3 in
National Evaluation Service Report No. NER -405, and as follows:
1. Use only hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel nails. Use only stainless steel
fasteners where exposed to weather.
2. Do not use electro - galvanized nails.
2.4 FACTORY PRIME FINISH
I A. Factory seal and prime, front and back.of each unit, with manufacturer's acrylic factory sealing
and priming system, compatible with finish paint specified in Section 09 9000.
I 1. James Hardie Building Products: "PrimePlus."
2. CertainTeed Corporation: "Fibertect."
B. For fiber- cement products not available factory primed, front and back,•field prime as
1 • - specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting."
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive siding are straight, plumb, true, solid, rigid, dry, and otherwise
properly prepared.
I B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work.
I C. Verify weather barrier has been installed over entire substrate to receive siding as specified in
Section 07 2500, and is without damage.
1.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646
Garden Room Addition Page 4 t
September 3, 2008
D. Repair damaged weather barrier and other unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of siding
work..
I
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions over weather barrier I
on wall sheathing.
B. . Fasten to solid backing in accordance with National Evaluation Service Report No. NER -405
for specified wind resistance.
I
C. • Install straight, plumb, level, parallel, true, and secure as appropriate.
D. Fit neatly at joints against trim. 1
E. Accurately scribe to adjacent surface irregularities.
F. Fit accurately and neatly around any projections through siding. • •
G. Install fiber- cement products so that they are not in ground contact or subjected to standing
water.
•
H. Panel Siding:
1. Install blocking behind all joints where joints do not occur at stud framing.
I
2. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from panel edges, and no closer than 2
inches from panel corners.
3. Space fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for stud spacing and 90 MPH
wind speed; 6 inches at edges and 12 inches in field for studs at 16 inches OC.
I
4. Space panels with a 1/8 inch maximum gap, horizontally and vertically.
5. Drive fasteners perpendicular to siding and framing. .
6. Cover joints with lumber batten. •
7. Install metal "Z" flashing at horizontal butt joints. I
8. Install to maximum variation in alignment of 1/8 inch in 10 linear feet.
I. Exterior Trim: I
1. Install as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind speed.
J. Battens:
•
1. Install over vertical panel joints and at intermediate locations between panel joints as I
indicated in Drawings.
2. Install in 2 piece vertical assemblies at outside corners, - '
3. Install vertical battens full height without horizontal joints.
- 4. Install over horizontal panel joints in continuous band to interrupt vertical battens .
above and below horizontal batten, as indicated in Drawings.
3.3 FINISH
1
A. For fiber- cement products that have not been factory primed, field prime front and back of .
each unit as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." • I
B. Field finish as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting."
1
LRS Architects, Inc. '
1
Tigard Senior Center Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
' 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace
with new materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in
a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
•
•
1
1
•
1
•
•
t
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1 .
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
II Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes flashing and sheet metal and trim including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Roof drainage systems.
2. Exposed trim.
I
•
3. Copings.
4. Metal flashing.
•
5. Flexible membrane flashing. .
I . B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 4646: Mineral -Fiber Cement Siding, for flashing associated with siding
work.
I 2. Section 07 1814: Pedestrian Traffic Deck membrane, for flashing associated with
deck membrane.
3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for sealants.
I 4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field painting. •
•
•
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I A. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind bads, structural movement, thermally
induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener
disengagement.
I B. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do no allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
•
1 . A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal and trim, including plans and elevations. Include
I the following: .
1. Material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
I
•
2.
3. Details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring, including fasteners, clips,
cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
1 C. Samples: For each type of prefinished item with specified or selected color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Fabrication Standard: Comply with applicable recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1 A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and
adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
.1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1. .
• •
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Field Measurements: Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication.
I
1.6 WARRANTY
• A. Warrant Work of this Section to be watertight for 2 years following date of Substantial
Completion. -
1. Warranty to cover repair of water Teaks and resulting damage to building construction
as may occur under normal usage within warranty period.
2. Include in warranty replacement of damaged materials that cannot be adequately
repaired, as determined by the Architect.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Sheet steel metallic coated by the hot -dip process
and prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
1. Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation,
structural quality.
-2. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40, structural quality
3. Exposed Finish: Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat thermocured system composed of inhibitive
primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
choices for color and gloss.
b. Resin Manufacturers:
•
1) Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000).
2) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500).
B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D (dull, cold rolled)
finish.
1
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming
and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished with high - performance
fluoropolymer coating; not Tess than 0.0359 inch uncoated thickness, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized paper, minimum 5 lb./sq. ft.
B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
C. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6 mil thick black polyethylene film.
• 2.3 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE FLASHING ,
A. Flexible Membrane Flashing: Composite, self- adhesive, flashing product consisting of a
pliable, rubberized asphalt compound, bonded to a high - density, cross - laminated polyethylene
film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I B. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following
products:
1. Bakor; a Division of The Henry Company: 40 mil Blueskin SA; self- adhered, self- .
' sealing, SBS rubberized asphalt sheet.
2. Fortifiber Building Products Systems: FortiFlash Waterproof Flashing, 40 mil.
3. W.R. Grace: Vycor V40 Weather Barrier Strips; self- adhered, self - sealing rubberized
. asphalt sheet.
1 C. Preformed Corner Flashing:
1. .. VaproSheild: VaproFlashing factory formed corners. •
I 2. Fortifiber: Moistop Corner Shield, formed from polyolefin membrane.
D. Primer: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. •
1 E. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements, of Section 01 2500.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
I A. General: Provide materials and type of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation. .
1 B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self- tapping screws, self - locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners of non - corrosive metal designed to withstand design loads.
I 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or •
factory applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
1 • C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
• stainless -steel sheet manufacturer.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release -paper backing, permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, and nonstaining.
.E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM 920, elastomeric silicone type specified in Section 07 9200 by
1 Dow Corning, GE, or approved.
F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, cold - applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 mil dry
I film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
G. Reglets: Type and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet
I and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing.indicated.
1. Material: Stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation, or approved.
I H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
•
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1
j, .
•
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
1 September 3, 2008
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of
I
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to•design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown and as required to fit substrates and result in waterproof and 1
weather- resistant performance when installed. .
1. Fabricate in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, I
but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
•
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work in longest lengths practicable, without excessive oil•canning,
buckling, and tool marks, and true to line and levels indicated.
1
• 1. Hem exposed edges, folded back minimum 1/2 inch.
. 2. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip. • I
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams from one of the following types. For non - aluminum
• materials, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
1. Standing Seams: 3/4 inch, double lock. I
2. Lap Seams: 3 inch finish width. .
3. Solder -Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with solder.
4. S -Lock Seams: Form 1 -1/4 inch wide 'S' shaped seam on one edge of flashing sheet
I
for concealed fastening.
5. Cover Plate Seams: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Architect for •
application.
E. Expansion Provisions: Form, fabricate and install sheet metal to provide for expansion and 1
contraction in the finished Work.
1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches '
• of corner or intersection. .
2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be •
sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not Tess than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within I
joints.
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric 111 sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
•
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.
1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. '
H. Fabricate cleats and other attachment devices from same material and thickness as sheet .
metal component being anchored. .'
2.6 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated
I
thickness (24 gage). .
B. Downspouts: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage).
C. Copings: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0299 inch uncoated thickness (22 gage). 1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
' Garden Room Addition 5
September 3, 2008
D. Base Flashing: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage).
E. Counterflashing: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage).
1 F. Drip Edges: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage).
2.7 • FINISH
1 A. Provide prepainted, metallic coated steel sheet where indicated.
B. Field apply paint finish as specified in Section 09 9000 for items not prepainted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
•
3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, securely anchored,
and are ready.to receive Work of this Section.
1 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
' A. " General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
t 1. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim
system.
2. Install Work in according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated.
1 B. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool -
marks.
' 1.
2. Conceal fasteners where possible.
Install with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim true to lines and levels indicated. Provide neat
1 seams with minimum exposure.of solder, welds, and sealant.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to result in watertight performance.
1 E. Expansion Provisions:
1. Space movement joints at maximum 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of
corner or intersection.
2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be
sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not Tess than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within
joints.
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface
would show in finished Work.
•
1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic- coated steel sheet.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1
` 1
Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
I September 3, 2008
2. Pretinning is not required for lead or lead- coated copper. .
3. Stainless Steel Soldering: Pretin edges using solder recommended for stainless steel
I
and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after
•
soldering.
4. Do not use open -flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow
solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from
exposed surfaces. I
G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
1. Fill joint with sealant, minimum 1/4 inch diameter bead, and form metal to completely
conceal sealant.
2. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
I
•
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with specified seams. Tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder. I
I. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, and
protect against galvanic action painting contact surfaces with bituminous mastic coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of dissimilar metals.
I 1. Coat uncoated aluminum, stainless steel, and lead flashing and trim in contact with
wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Install course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet where
I
metal flashing is installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates.
J. Install reglets to receive counterflashing where shown or indicated.
K. Counterflashings: Coordinate with installation of base flashing. • 1
1: Lap -seam vertical joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.
2. Miter, lap -seam, and close corner joints with solder. I
3. Overlap base flashing 4 inches minimum.
4. Install bottom edge spring -tight against base flashing.
5. Provide where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and where indicated:
L. Cleats: I
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart.
2. Anchor cleats with 2 fasteners to prevent cleat rotation.
I
3. Bend tabs over fastener head.
M. Copings:
1. Fabricate with standing seams spaced approximately 10 feet apart. I
2. Miter corners.
3. Interlock exterior edge with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16 inch
I
centers.
4. Anchor interior edge with screw fasteners and washers at 24 inch centers. .
5. Slope top �f coping toward roof.
N. Flexible Membrane Flashing: '
1. Install flexible membrane flashing at window and door openings and where shown or
indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I
2. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
t 3. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
4. Lap flashing over weather resistive building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
5. Lap weather resistive building paper over flexible flashing at heads of openings.
' 6. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. -
7. Install Preformed Corner Flashing at lower corners of window opening. •
1 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. 'Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
' weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
1. Neutralize flux as work progresses with 5 percent to 10 percent washing soda
solution, and thoroughly rinse.
•
• C. . Clean finished surfaces of completed installation. Maintain in a clean condition during
' construction.
•
D. Replace'sheet metal flashing and trim damaged or that has deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
' END OF SECTION
1
1
•
1
1 •
1
1
.1
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 • .
1 .
I Tigard Senior Center Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page .1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes elastomeric joint sealants for building applications shown or indicated, and
as required to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without
staining or deteriorating joint substrates. •
B. Related Sections: .
1. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glazing. sealant. •
2. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board, for installation of acoustical sealant used in sound
control gypsum board partitions..
3. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant, for acoustical sealants.
4. Section 32 1373: Concrete Paving Joint Sealants, for sealing joints in pavements,
I walkways, and curbing, not related to buildings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
•
I A. Product Data for each joint sealant product indicated, including manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures.
B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full •
I range of colors•available for each product exposed to view.
1. Upon request of Architect, submit physical samples of each sealant, backing material,
primer, and bond breaker proposed for use.
I C. Warranties: Copies of special installers and manufacturers warranties. •
D. SWRI Validation: Evidence that each exterior elastomeric sealant has been validated by the
1 Sealant Weatherproofing Restoration Institute's (SWRI) Sealant Validation Program.
• E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
I 1. Joint substrates and sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and
adhesion with joint materials.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
I preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Field Test Report Log: For each exterior elastomeric sealant application.
I QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Use workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and
familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this
Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single .
manufacturer.
-, C. Quality Standard: Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for
materials and installation.
1
•
. ,
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1 .
Tigard Senior Center Joint Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers,
for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
4. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and •
compatibility with, joint substrates.
E. Provide products that have been tested according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for
compliance with requirements specified within a 36 month period preceding commencement
of the Work.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Section 01 3100.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING •
• A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original containers, with labels intact and
legible, and maintain intact until time of use.
1
B. Do not retain material that has exceeded shelf life recommended by manufacturer.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . I
A. Do not install sealant when joint substrates are wet, or ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits recommended by manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this •
Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or
cohesion, or failure to cure.
1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: 5 years.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranties in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements
specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss
of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure.
1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion:
a. 20 years for exterior use Silicones.
b. 20 year non -stain warranty for exterior sealants.
c. 5 years for Polyurethane sealants. •
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Joint Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' PART2 PRODUCTS
•
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
' A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
' B. Stain Characteristics: Provide elastomeric joint sealant products that are nonstaining to
porous substrates and have undergone testing according to ASTM C and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
1. In exposed installation, use color of approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless
' otherwise approved.
2. In concealed installation use standard gray or black sealant.
2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS
1 A. Silicone — Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus):
1. Single- Component, nonsag, neutral curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT,
Class 100/50 (Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in
compression).
2. Products: One of the following, or approved.
' a.
b. Dow Corning DC 790.
GE SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Pecora 890.
• d. Tremco Spectrem 1.
B. Silicone - Class 50 (Low Modulus):
' 1. Single- Component, nonsag, neutral curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT,
Class 50 (Joint movement range 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in
compression).
2. Products: One of the following, or approved.
' a. Dow Corning DC 791.
b. GE SilPruf SCS2000.
c. Pecora 864.
' d. Tremco Spectrem 3.
C. Polyurethane - Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus):
•
1. Single- Component, nonsag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 100/50
(Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression).
2. Products: One of the following, or approved.
' a.
b. Tremco Vulkem 921.
Tremco Dymonic FC. •
' D. Polyurethane Sealant - Class 25 (Medium Modulus):
1. Single- Component, non -sag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25,
(Joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression). •
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center • Joint Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 4
I
September 3, 2008 -
2. Products: One of the following, or approved.
a. BASF Sonneborn Sonolastic NP1. 1
b. BASF Sonnebom Sonolastic TX1.
c. Pecora Dynatrol I -XL.
d. Tremco Dymonic. _ I
e. Tremco Vulkem 116.
E. Latex Sealant:
I 1. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
2. Products: One of the following, or approved.
a. BASF Sonneborn Sonolac.. • I
b. Pecora AC -20 +.
c. Tremflex 834.
• F. Foam Air - Infiltration Sealant: •
•
1. Product: Kwik Foam by DAP, or approved. -
_
G. Preformed Foam Sealant: i
1. Preformed, precompressed, open -cell foam sealant of high-density urethane foam,
permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, with pressure 1
sensitive adhesive backing, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint
sealant; joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in
compression.
2. Products: One of the following, or approved. t
a. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Emseal 25V.
b. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc., Polyseal. I
H. Acoustic Sealant: As Specified in Section 09 8110, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant.
2.2 BACKUP MATERIALS
I A. Use only those backup materials that are non - absorbent, non - staining, and specifically •
recommended by manufacturer for installation with type of sealant used.
B. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide one of the following Type B backing rods (bicellular material with
I
a surface skin) unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer:
1. Nomaco Inc.: "Sof Rod."
I
2. BASF Sonneborn: "Soft Backer Rod."
C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable.
1
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS •
A. Primer: Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on surfaces to be
I
sealed, and are specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer for adhesion of joint
sealant substrates, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests and field
tests.
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008 •
•
I B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant and backing
material manufacturer, formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealant with joint •
substrates.
I C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealant and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
•
A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint •
. configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface clean joints immediately before installing sealant complying with- manufacturer's
I _ instructions, and the following:
• . 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
sealant, including dust, oil, grease, rust, lacquer, laitance, loose mortar, ice and frost.
B. Concrete: .
1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, or
I mechanical abrading; remove loose particles from cleaning operations by vacuuming
or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
2. Where surfaces have been treated, remove surface treatment by_sandblasting or wire .
brushing.
I 3. Remove laitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities
4. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete.
C. Metal surfaces:
I 1. Scrape steel surfaces with metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
2. - Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaner which leaves no residue to remove
1 oil and grease, and protective coatings, wiping surfaces with clean rags.
D . Prime joints substrates where recommended by sealant manufacturer, based on
preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience.
I 1. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond.
•
I E. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears.
I 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install joint sealers in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 1193, and
manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as applicable to materials, applications,
I . and conditions indicated.
•
1. Do not paint silicone sealants. .
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
•
•
•
•
1
•Tigard Senior Center Joint Sealants: 07 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
2. Where painting of sealants is a concern, obtain approval of Architect prior to
application where use of polyurethane sealants is allowed.
B. Sealant Backings:
1. Install material to uniform depth below sealant.
2. Using tool, smoothly and uniformly place backup material to depth of approximately
1/2 joint width (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch), compressing backup material 25 percent to 50
percent and securing a positive fit. I
3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
4. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealant where sealant backing is not used between sealant
and back of joints.
•
D. Install sealant by proven techniques at the same time backings are installed.
1. Thoroughly fill joints to recommended depth with sealant in direct contact with joint
substrates.
• 2. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
•
3. Prevent three -sided adhesion of sealant to substrates.
•
E. Tool joints to profile shown in Drawings, or as indicated below if such profiles . are not shown in
Drawings. 1
1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface, flush at edges with .
adjacent surface, according to ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically recommended in writing by sealant
manufacturer.
3. Leave sealant surface neat and smooth.
F. Install preformed foam sealant according to manufacturer's instructions, taking care not to pull
or stretch material.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Adhesion Testing: Test completed joint - sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Test joint sealant after sealant has cured (usually within 7 to 21 days).
2. - Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of sealant and joint
substrate, and 1 test each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter.
3. Test Method: Test according to Method A, Field - Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab
in ASTM C 1193, Appendix X1.
4. Record results in a field- adhesion test log. Include the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to
joint substrates or tore cohesively. •
•
1) Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and
joint substrate.
•
2) Compare results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
•
manufacturer's field adhesion hand -pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
I Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Joint Sealants: 07 9200
Page 7
September 3, 2008
5. Include in test log, dates when sealants were installed, names of installers, test dates,
test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations,
sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
I 6. Repair sealants pulled from test areas by applying new sealants following same
procedures used to originally seal joints.
a. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts
I
original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Reports: -
I 1. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other
indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
2. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with .
I : other requirements.
3. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
1 3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent exposed surfaces free from sealant as installation progresses, using cleaning
agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant used.
1 1. Repair damaged surfaces.
3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE .
A. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces:
I 1.: Includes joints in concrete, metals, at perimeter of building exterior door and window
frames, and at other openings and joints in exterior walls:
a. Silicone - Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus), unless otherwise recommended
I by sealant manufacturer for specific application and approved by Architect.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
2. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces in Wood and where painting of sealant is allowed
I by approval of Architect:
a. Polyurethane Sealant - Class 25 (Medium Modulus).
I B. Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. At building interiors except at perimeter of steel and aluminum storefront, door, and
window- frames in exterior walls: ,
' a. One of the Following Types:
1) Latex.
1 2) Polyurethane Sealant - Class 25 (Medium Modulus).
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Joint Sealants: 0 9200
Garden Room Addition Page 8
September 3, 2008
2. At building interiors at perimeter of steel and aluminum, door, and window frames in
exterior walls:
1
a. Polyurethane Sealant — Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus).
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
C. At Exterior Pavement Joints not Related to Buildings: Traffic -Grade Sealant specified in
Section 32 1373.
D. Around electrical boxes, between framing and openings at other locations where insulation in
exterior walls is interrupted: Foam Air - infiltration Sealant.'
•
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
•
•
1
•
1
•
.1
• 1
•
• 1
•
•
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
•
' • Tigard Senior Center Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL .
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes the following fabricated according to ANSI /SDI A250.8:
• 1. Standard hollow metal welded steel frames.
I B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, for doors in hollow metal frames.
2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware
1
3. Section 09 9000: Painting, for painting of hollow metal frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS .
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, label compliance and
finishes for each type of hollow metal frame specified.
• B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of hollow metal frame, details
I - of openings, dimensions, and anchorage.
C. Frame Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract •
I Drawings.
D. Certification: Submit certification that work of this Section complies with ANSI /SDI A250.8, or
equivalent standards of HMMA 861 (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association).
I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper installation of work of this Section.
• " B. Provide welded frames from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise specifically approved by
I Architect.
C. Minimum Quality Standards: Comply with latest edition of following standards of ANSI and the •
Steel Door Institute (SDI):
I 1. ANSI /SDI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
2. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
I 3. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
4. SDI 112, Zinc - Coated Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
I 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project site storage. Do not use•nonvented plastic. ,
1 B. Store in protected dry area, in a vertical position with heads up, on minimum 4 inch high wood
blocking, spaced to permit air circulation.
C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
111,
•
1
. Tigard Senior Center Hollow Metal Frames: 0 1213
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I
September 3, 2008 '
1.5 COORDINATION .
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames, and as required with other I
trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work •
• of. this Section.
PART2 PRODUCTS I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS •
I A. Hollow Metal Doors and Welded Frames:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide '
products by any manufacturer that can provide and certify to fabrication of products •
I
that meet or exceed requirements of ANSI, SDI (Steel Door Institute), or HMMA
(Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association), and requirements of these specifications.
2.2 MATERIALS • 1
A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
I
B. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum
• G60 zinc (galvanized) or A60 zinc - iron -alloy (galvannealed) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill 1
phosphatized.
1. Anchors Built Into Exterior Walls: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM I
A 1011, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanize according to ASTM A 153. I
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL WELDED FRAMES
A. Provide hollow metal welded steel frames for doors, borrowed lights, and other openings
I according to ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, full profile welded.
1. Fabricate frames installed in drywall partitions with backbend return (double
I
backbend).
C. Interior Frames: Minimum 0.053 inch (16 gage) uncoated thickness cold - rolled steel sheet.
I
1. Fabricate frames for interior openings 48 inches and wider from minimum 0.067 inch
(14 gage) uncoated thickness cold - rolled steel sheet.
D. Exterior Frames: Minimum 0.067 inch (14 gage) uncoated thickness metallic coated cold- 1
rolled steel sheet.
E . Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI /SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates
I
from same material as frames.
F. Provide frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as
a brace during shipping and handling.
I
•
LRS Architects, Inc. '
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213
' Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate hollow metal frame units to be rigid, free of defects, warp, or buckle.
•
9 P
B. Welded Frames:
1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and
invisible.
' 2. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and
bolts.
3. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames
installed in concrete or masonry.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
' frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.
a. Stud -Wall Type:
•
' 1)
2) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and
' mounted in metal -stud partitions
b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from
. , top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c
' 7. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive weatherstripping or gasketing, drill stops
to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings, and 2 silencers on
heads of double leaf door openings. .
•
' C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117..
•
D. Fabricate galvanized steel frames according to SDI 112.
' E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare door frames to receive hardware according to final
door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. .
1. Comply with requirements of ANSI /SDI A250.6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
2. Provide space, cutouts, reinforcing for concealed overhead door closers and
'
3.. provisions for fastening in head of frames.
Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings, or, if not indicated, according to
ANSI /SDI A250.8.
' 2.5 FINISHES
A. Preparation: Clean surfaces and apply pretreatment of conversion coating of type suited to
organic finish coating.
B. Hollow Metal Welded Steel Frames: Factory Prime for Field- Painted Finish:
1. Apply manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive shop primer complying with ANSI /SDI
' A250.10 immediately after surface and pretreatment that is compatible with finish
paint systems specified in Section 09 9000 and suited to substrate.
•
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213
Garden Room Addition Page 4 I
•
September 3, 2008
C. Factory Primed Hollow Metal Frames: Field apply finish coats of paint as specified in Section
09 9000. - 1
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION I
A. Examine areas and. conditions under which work•of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all exterior door wall openings as
specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6000.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned,-and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures.
B. Placing Frames: Comply ANSI /SDI 250.11, and the following: 1
1. Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls.
2. Set frames accurately into position, aligned and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set.
•
• a. Frames in final position to be plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum from squared
and plumbed alignment.
1
3. After frames have been installed and wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
4. At in -place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine •
screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z" fillers at each screw location.
5. • Provide sealant between frame and adjacent wall material.
6. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
7. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames.
3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work
• in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including
steel frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. •
1. During warranty period, check and adjust operating finish hardware items for smooth
and quiet operation.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply 111 touch up of compatible, air -drying primer.
•
C. Clean exposed surfaces of Work of this Section and repair as required.
END OF SECTION •
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1..
Tigard Senior Center Wood Doors: 08 1400
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY • ,
1 A. Section Includes:
1. Interior solid core flush wood swing doors. .
1 B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1213: Hollow Metal Frames, for door frames.
2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware.
3. Section 09 9000: Painting, for finishes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS .
I A. . Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for
openings, fire- resistance and temperature -rise ratings, and factory finishing specifications.
I B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations of each kind of door, location and extent of hardware
blocking, and details of door construction not included in Product Data. -
C. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract
I Drawings.
1. Indicate doors to be factory finished and other finish requirements.
2. Indicate locations and dimensions of cutouts.
I , D. Samples: Approximately 8 by 8 inches in size, of each door face material with each type of
'specified finish. .
I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . '
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following:
I 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
Illustrated." .
I B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
I A. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage; soiling, and
I. deterioration. •
1. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions.
I 2. Deliver doors individually packaged in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
3. Deliver doors clearly marked with manufacturer's name, size, and thickness.
4. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used in Shop Drawings.
5. Immediately open, but don't remove, wrap at Project site to ventilate. .
B. Handling: Do not drag across one another; lift doors and carry them into position.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Wood,Doors: 08 1400
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I
September 3, 2008
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC 1
system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F and relative
humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of construction period.
1:7 COORDINATION I
A. Coordinate with or trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
1 those trades for interface with work of this Section.
1. Coordinate fabrication of doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100
1.8 WARRANTY 1
A. Special Warranty: Signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials and workmanship, and do not
I
meet specified fabrication tolerances.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
repair or replacement of defective doors. I
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion. •
a. Interior Solid Core Doors: Life of installation.
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS • I
A. Flush Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one' of the ,
following: I
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
2. Ampco .
3. BJ Doors. I
4. Cenco.
5. Eggers Industries.
6. Graham. -
7. Lynden Door, Inc. I
8. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
9. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. •
10. VT Industries.
11. Western Oregon Door.
I
2.2 FLUSH DOORS .
A. Interior Solid Core Doors: • I
1. Types: Flush face.
2. Construction: PC -5 or PC -7.
3. Sizes and Relites: -See Door Schedule. I
4. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches.
5. Core: Particleboard; ANSI A208 -1 Grade 1, LD -2.
• 6. Side Stiles: 1 -3/8 inch minimum width. . . 1
•
7. Finish: Transparent, as scheduled.
•
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1 •
I Tigard. Senior Center Wood Doors: 08 1400
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I B. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Face Veneer Species: Birch (natural) rotary cut.
• 2. AWI Grade: Custom, with AWI Veneer Grade A face sheets.
I 3.
4. Veneer Thickness: Minimum 1 /50th inch at 12 percent moisture content.
Veneers: Face: Book match.
5. Assembly: Running match.
6. Edge Bands:
I a. Side Stiles: 1 -3/8 inch minimum width hardwood stiles, matching face veneer
color for doors with transparent finish.
I C. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000. -
•
1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements
I of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category II materials.
2.3 of
.' A. Comply with the following AWI Quality Standards:
. 1. AWI Section 1300 for Architectural Flush Doors.
I B. Bond door faces to cores, stiles and rails with adhesive. Bond edge banding to core.
C. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard core doors as indicated to eliminate through -
bolting hardware for hardware items listed below. Provide composite blocking with improved
I screw - holding capability approved for fire -rated doors. .
1. Closers: 5 inch top rail blocking.
. 2. Kick, Mop, or Armor Plates: 5 inch bottom rail blocking. •
I 3. Exit Devices: 5 inch midrail blocking.
D. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces.
I E. Light Openings:
1. Provide wood frames for Tight openings same species as door faces with recessed
I tapered beads.
F. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated with uniform clearances and bevels per
requirements of referenced quality standard.
I 1. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and UL 1784 for fire -rated and smoke control
doors.
I G.. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES .
•
1 A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between 2 diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight edge
to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist.
I C. Maximum stile, rail and core telegraphing show- through at door face: 0.01 inch in any 3 inch
. span.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
. 1
Tigard Senior Center Wood Doors: 08 1400
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING 1
A. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
1. Comply with AWI Quality Standards of Section 1500 for finishing.
1
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Post - Catalyzed Lacquer.
3. Staining: None required.
a. Open Finish for Open -Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open- grained
woods.
4. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION •
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with specified requirements for type, size, location, and •
swing, and have been installed plumb and level.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.' •
3.2 INSTALLATION
1
A. Hardware: Installed under provisions of Section 08 7100.
B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality
standard.
C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frame for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Fitting and machining:
1. Tolerances:
a. Bottom: 1/4 inch clearance maximum.
b. Top: 1/8 inch clearance maximum. -
c. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches maximum.
2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of hardware
Manufacturers.
3.3 COMPLIANCE 1
A. Owner may employ a representative of reference organization to inspect and determine that
Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with specified standards.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center • Wood Doors: 08 1400
' Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts to operate smoothly and
quietly.
' 1. Adjust as necessary weatherstripping, gaskets, and door bottoms for correct
clearance.
2. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
' B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if
work complies with requirements and show no evidence of repair or refinishing.
I END OF SECTION
1 •
1
1
1
1
1
1 •
1 ..
1
1 •
•
•
1
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefront: 08 4113
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes aluminum entrances and storefronts.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants.
2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware.
3. Section 08 8000:,Glazing.
I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide entrance and storefront system capable of withstanding Toads and thermal and
structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's
I standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. - Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 not to exceed 0.06 CFM at a static air pressure differential of
6.24 PSF.
I C. Water Infiltration: ASTM E 331, no water penetration at test pressure of 8 PSF.
D. Maximum Deflection: ASTM E 330, no deflection in excess of 1/175 of span.
E. Allowable Stress Factor of Safety: 1.65.
• 1.3 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Product Data: For each product specified; include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
I B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show dimensions, fabrication, installation, anchorage,
and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.
1 C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.. -
D. Samples: For each exposed member illustrating finish, color, . texture and sheen.
.1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Use skilled Workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements
I and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section.
B. Installer to be approved by manufacturer.
I C. Product Options: Sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements indicated are based on
specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to requirements of Section 01 2500 for
substitutions. .
1 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Design entrance and storefront system to withstand wind loads and seismic Toads according
U to provisions of Chapter 16 of State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on
International Budding Code.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
1
Tigard Senior Center Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefront: 08 4113
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Doors to comply with accessibility guidelines of The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and •
accessibility requirements of State Building Code.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract Documents,
obtain architect's approval before proceeding.
•
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section that fails due to defective materials
or installation to be weathertight within 2 years after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Failure due to defective materials or Workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited
to:
•
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
3. _ Deterioration of metal, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
6. Failure of operating components to function property.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for glazed aluminum storefront system is based on the
• following: 1
1. Kawneer.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers with comparable
products are the following:
•
1. Arcadia.
• 2. EFCO Corporation.
3. United States Aluminum.
4. Traco. •
5. Vistawall Architectural Products. •
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Storefront Framing Components:
1. Center and offset as detailed.
2. Framing System: Kawneer Trifab VG, 451T.
3. Nominal Size: 2 inches by 4 -1/2 inches. I
4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063T5 aluminum alloy.
• 5 Fasteners: ASTM B 633, Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc plated steel.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center • Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefront: 08 4113
I Garden Room Addition Page 3 •
September 3, 2008 •
I B. Doors:
1. Door System: Kawneer Medium Style 350.
•
2. Nominal Stile Size: 1 -3/4 by 3 -1/2 inches.
I 3.
4. Door Height: See Door Schedule.
Minimum Bottom Rail Height: 10 inches.
5. Swing: Single acting.
U C. Closures, Trim and Filler Panels'.
1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper as recommended by aluminum
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. •
I 2.
3. Thickness: 0 063 inch.,
Finish: Match storefront and window system finish.
•
Brackets and Reinforcements:
I D.
. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible •
with adjacent materials. .
2. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
I . Fasteners and Accessories: •
I 1. Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and
accessories compatible with adjacent materials. •
F. Sealant:
I 1. Glazing Sealant: Manufacturer's standard:
2. Framing Sealant: Silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, or otherwise
. recommended by sealant and entrance and storefront system manufacturer to suit
1 conditions.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.
G. Flashing:
1. Material: 0.050 inch thick minimum prefinished aluminum, with smooth texture.
2. Finish: To match storefront.
I 2.3 HARDWARE •
•
A. Provide heavy duty hardware units required and recommended by manufacturer for entrances
1 indicated. .
1. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.
I B. Provide complete hardware items required for entrance doors not otherwise specified in
Section 08 7100, including the following:
I 1. Offset Pivots: ANSI /BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1.
. a. For doors with heights up to 87 inches, provide 3 hinges per leaf.
1
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefront: 08 4113
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2. Closers: Manufacturer's recommended "size depending of door size, exposure to
weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
a. Comply with requirements for ADA and local code requirements for disabled
accessibility.
b. Standard: BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1. •
•
3. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 7100.
4. Panic Exit Devices: As specified in Section 08 7100.
5. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard aluminum threshold with cutouts coordinated for
operating hardware, not more than 1/2 inch high, with beveled edges providing a floor
level change with a slope of not more than 1:2.
6. Weather Stripping Manufacturer's standard replaceable components; compression
type made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
7. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard for application to exterior door bottoms
with concealed fasteners on mounting strips.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
1
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required fora complete and proper
installation.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to profiles indicated.
B. Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or required for a complete system.
C. Provide hairline fit at joints, securely fastened, with smooth continuity of line and accurate
relation of planes and angles.
D. Perform fitting of finish hardware to doors and frames at factory, but do not drill or tap for
surface mounted items until time of installation at site.
1. Use concealed fasteners to maximum extent practicable.
E. Closures, Trim and Filler Panels: Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to
minimize joints.
1. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.
2. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on
the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support
with concealed stiffeners
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
1
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces.
B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44 (Architectural Class I, integrally colored
coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
•
1. Color: Dark bronze.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
' Tigard Senior Center Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefront: 08 4113
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
' 3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
1 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing
1 entrance and storefront systems.
1. Do not install damaged components.
2. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
• 3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
4. Seal joints watertight.
•
B. Provide protection against electrolysis occurring between different adjacent metals as
' required.
C. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant.
1 D. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as progress of work
shall permit with safety.
' E. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08 8000.
1. When glazing is performed under this Section, provide types of glass required and
glazein accordance with storefront/doors /windows manufacturer's standards.
1 F. Install sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
1 A. During warranty period, adjust and service moving parts of doors to operate smoothly and
quietly.
B. Clean exposed surfaces, including surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair as
required.
•
1 END OF SECTION •
•
1
•
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Composite Windows and Doors: 08 5410
• Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
•
•
. 1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. . Section includes fiberglass windows and doors with wood veneer interior cladding.
B. Related Sections:
1 1. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flexible membrane flashing at window
openings.
2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for perimeter sealant at windows.
' • 3. Section 09 9000: Painting
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. The following W
are based on AAMA/NWWDA for defining Performance Class:
• 1. AW: Architectural. - •
2. HC: Heavy Commercial.
I 3. C: Commercial. .
4.. LC: Light Commercial. •
. 5. R: Residential.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide windows and doors of the performance
class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
I 1. Windows: .
a. Performance Class: C. .
I b. Performance Grade: 40.
• 2. Doors:
I a. Performance Class: C.
b. Performance Grade: 30.
I 3. Exception to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: In addition to requirements for performance
class and performance grade, design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections
. of glass edges to Tess than 1/175 of glass -edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less,
at design pressure based on the following:
1 a. Testing performed according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load
Deflection Test or structural computations.
1 B. Provide window and door assemblies with overall U -value of 0.38 or Tess.
C. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture
occurring within system,•to exterior.
I 1.4 . SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified in this Section.
I B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show elevations, dimensions, installation clearances,
anchorage and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
.1
Tigard Senior Center Composite Windows and Doors: 08 5410
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I
September 3, 2008 .
C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1
•
D. Manufacturer's operating /maintenance instructions.
E. Manufacturer's certification that windows and doors provided are in compliance with
I
performance standards specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section.
1.6 CERTIFICATION I
A. , Provide certificates listing AAMA tests affirming that windows and doors meet, and comply,
with performance standards specified. • • I
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Design windows and doors to withstand wind loads according to provisions of State Building '
Code. •
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
• A. Deliver with each unit bearing NFRC and AAMA labels certifying compliance. 1
B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. I
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
•
A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. _ I
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard commercial 10 year warranty for fiberglass windows and I
doors.
1. Replace, rehang and refinish without additional cost to Owner failures due which
include, but not limited to, the following:
I
•
a. Failures in operation of .operating component or components.
b. Water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard.
c. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to unaided eye. I
d. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or
potential untimely failure of Work of this Section or Work as a whole.
•
• B. Warrant insulating gla for 10 years against le at seals. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS •
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following:
1. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc.: Milgard WoodClad.
I
2. Marvin Windows and Doors: Integrity
LRS Architects, Inc. ' I
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Composite Windows and Doors: 08 5410
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements or Section 01 2500.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
1 A. Fiberglass Window Types:
1. Fixed.
I A. Fiberglass Door Types:
I 1. 3- panel, in- swing.
2.3 MATERIALS
I A. . Frame:
1. Materials:
I • a. Exterior: Fiberglass; AAMA 305 glass fiber reinforced thermoset profile.
b. Interior: Wood Veneer; Clear vertical grain Douglas Fir, 0.20 inches thick with
fleece backing.
I 2.
3. Profile: Manufacturer's standard, with nailing flanges.
Shape and size: As shown.
4. Color:
I a.
b. Exterior: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Interior: Wood veneer.
1) Field finish with transparent finish specified in Section 09 9000,
1
"Painting ".
B. Glass:
1. Glass Type GL -1: 7/8 -inch thick insulating, clear float, complying with ASTM E 774,
and provisions specified in Section 08 8000.
a. Low 'E'.
I 2. Glass Type GL -1T: Same as Type GL -1, except Kind FT (fully tempered).
I a. Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16
CFR, Part 1201, for•Category I I . materials.
C. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard.
I D. Glazing stops: Matching screw - applied or snap -on.
E. Door Hardware:
I 1. Hinges: 2 -way adjustable; finish to match lock.
2. Lock: Inside and outside lever operated latch and two point locking rod to head and
I sill with interior thumb turn deadbolt.
a. Lever Finish: Satin chrome.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Composite Windows and Doors: 08 5410
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
•
•
3. Sill sweep: Manufacturer's standard. •
4. Threshold Ramp: Where height of threshold exceeds State Building Code
accessibility requirements for the disabled, provide access ramp at threshold to
comply with Code.
a. Rubber ramp with mitered returns; Pemko SBR1 FMR.
F. Screen Door: Manufacturer's standard for specified unit. I
1. Color: Match door.
2. Screen Mesh: Charcoal color fiberglass mesh.
G. Flashing at Wall Openings: Flexible membrane flashing specified and installed under
provisions of Section 07 6000.
2.4 •FABRICATION
1
A. Mitered and mechanically joined corners; trim and finish corners to match adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide replaceable weatherstripping. 1
C. Drainage: Exterior weep holes.
D. Reglazing: Permitted without disassembly of sash frame.
2.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
•
A. Dimensions 6 ft. or less: 1/16 inch +.
•
B. Dimensions over 6 ft.: 1/8 inch +.
2.6 FINISHING
•
A. Field finish wood veneer indicated to receive transparent finish.
1. Comply with AWI Quality Standards of Section 1500 for finishing. •
•
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Post - Catalyzed Lacquer.
3. Staining: None required.
a. Open Finish for Open -Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open - grained
woods.
•
4. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
•
1 -
•
I Tigard Senior Center Composite Windows and Doors: 08 5410
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
I B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all window and door wall openings as
•
specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6000.
I 3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
I those trades with work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
I A. Install work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's and referenced standard's
recommended installation procedures.
1. Where required by State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled,
provide threshold ramp.
I B. Coordinate placement of windows and doors in wall openings with installation of rubberized
membrane flashing installed in wall openings prior to placement of windows and doors.
1 1. Install windows and doors with a continuous bead of sealant between back of frame
• flange and flexible membrane flashing, except at sill flange.
I C. Make provision for expansion and contraction and for deflection of existing adjoining building
components.
Install insect screens on operable sash.
I D.
E. Upon completion of installation, put each operating component through at least 10 complete
operating cycles, adjusting as needed to secure optimum operating level.
I 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION .
A. Labels: Leave required AAMA and NFRC labels in place, intact and legible, until reviewed and
I approved by Architect and building inspector.
B. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts for smooth and quiet
operation.
1 C. Prior to completion of work thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of windows, doors and
screens.
I 1. Use only cleaning materials and techniques recommended by manufacturer of
material .being cleaned.
. . 2. Do not scratch or otherwise damage glass, screen, or PVC finish.
1
•
D. Clean exposed surfaces and repair imperfections in finish.
E. Do not store materials close enough to glass to create a heat trap and cause breakage.
1 END OF SECTION
1 •
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
•
I Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Door Hardware: 08 7100
Page 1
September 3, 2008 .
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes finish hardware for doors.
B. Related Sections: '
I 1. Section 06 4000: Architectural Woodwork, for custom cabinet hardware.
2. Section 08 1213: Hollow Metal Frames, to be provided templates for hardware.
3. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, to be provided templates for hardware.
4. Section 08 4113: Aluminum - Framed Entrances and Storefronts, for hardware
I provided with aluminum entrances.
1.2 SUBMITTALS • ' -
' A. Product data including manufacturer's technical data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information
necessary to show compliance with requirements.
I B. Finish Hardware Schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper
size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
• I C. Keying Schedule: Indicate clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been
fulfilled.
D. Templates: For doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
I installation of door hardware.
• 1. Verify with shop drawings and other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. •
I
E. Samples: Of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final
I hardware schedule.
1. . .
Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged may after final check of operation may be incorporated in the work, within
I limitations of keying coordination requirements.
QUALITY Y ASSURANCE
I A. Provide services of an AHC or DAHC member of Door Hardware Institute to:
1. Be available for consultation with Architect/Owner at no additional cost to Owner
during progress of construction.
I 2. Be available to meet with. Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final • instructions in writing.
B. Hardware consultant may be an employee of supplier.
I .
• C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer.
•
D. Hardware supplier shall have and maintain a factory direct status with all manufacturers
specified or approved during the course of the project to insure quality product knowledge and
• quick lead tie response. •
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Door Hardware: 08 7100
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
•
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide door hardware for fire rated openings complying with NFPA Standard No. 80 and 1
current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide only hardware that is listed and identical to products tested by U.L. or other
testing and inspection agencies acceptable to governing authorities.
B. Provide hardware tested according to NFPA 252 and UL 1784 for fire door assemblies
.labeled for fire resistance and smoke control ( "S" label).
C. Provide electric equipment with U.L. approved listing for complete assembly.
D. Comply with requirements of ANSI A117.1.,The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and
State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper fastenings and
appurtenances, clearly marked on outside to indicate contents and specific locations in Work.
B. Provide an experienced employee designated to receive, take charge of, and distribute 1
hardware at building site.
C. Provide locked secure area for storage of hardware on site.
1
•
D. Protect from damage. Store above ground and under cover. -
1.6 KEYING INFORMATION
1
A. If required provide keying and bitting information to Owner at no cost.
1.7 WARRANTY 1
A. Warrant operation of closers for 10 years.
B. Warrant operation of exit devices for 3 years.
1
1.8 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to Substantial Completion Date, provide written certificate that hardware is complete and
1
conforms to Specifications and approved submittals.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL •
A. Fasteners: 1
1. Furnish necessary flat head screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and
type to anchor hardware in position for long life under hard use.
2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, sex bolts, and other
anchors as required. Provide material to which hardware is to be applied, and
recommended by hardware manufacturer.
a. Provide Glass Bead Kit if necessary for proper installation of exit devices.
b. Toggle bolts are not permitted.
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
1
' Tigard Senior Center Door Hardware: 08 7100
Garden Room Addition • Page 3 •
• September 3, 2008
1 3. Provide fasteners that harmonize with hardware as to finish and material.
4. Conceal if possible when door is in closed position; exposed fasteners to have Phillips
I head.
•
a. Through - Bolting Not permitted.
I B. Locks and Latches: Verify:
1. Operation
2. Hand of doors
P3. Function for each opening.
C. . Closers: Verify for each door: •
I 1. Hand of door
2. Degree of opening
3. Frequency of use
4. Head condition.
I
a. • -
Provide closers that do not limit door swing.
b. . Furnish drop plates for narrow top rails.
c. Furnish manufacturer's standard one -piece cast arm at parallel arm location.
I d. Furnish closers at fire- resistant rated doors, exterior doors and elsewhere as
shown.
D. Hinges:
I 1. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear trim where hinges are required to swing 180
degrees.
2. Furnish minimum 1 -1/2 pair of hinges per leaf, unless specifically scheduled
I
otherwise.
E. Furnish silencers for door frames at rate of three for each single door and two for each door
I or pair of doors, except gasketed doors and doors with Tight seals or sound seals.
F. Furnish smoke gaskets for fire - resistive rated doors in corridors or other exitways.
P G. Furnish door stops in number and type to protect finishes wherever doors or hardware
thereon could strike adjacent surfaces.
2.2 KEYING
I A. Factory or locally key the following:
1. Master or Grandmaster key per Owner's direction.
1 • B. Fumish nickel silver keys for each lock as follows: .
. 1. 6 masterkeys for each set
.' 2. 3 grand - masterkeys. ,
3. 2 Change keys per Iockset.
I C. Construction keying:
1. Furnish a construction key system with 10 keys for locks and cylinders: 7 for
Contractor and 3 for Owner.
LRS Architects, Inc. .
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Door Hardware: 08 7100
Garden Room Addition Page 4
I
September 3, 2008
2. Use only construction keys during construction.
3. Upon Substantial Completion of Work, void construction key system and, in presence I
of Architect and Owner, demonstrate specified keying system is operating properly.
D. Identification and delivery:
1. Stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE. •
2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to Owner by registered mail or
receipted personal delivery. I
E. Key storage cabinet
• 1. Manufacturer MMF, Telkee, Yale, or approved. I
2. Type: Surface mounted for wall, with key control tags.
3. Capacity: For required permanent keys plus 25 percent. •
4. Location: As selected by Architect.
2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS -'
A. Deliver to Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals
and installation instructions for locksets, closers, and panic devices.
I
• 2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
•
A. Single Source: Except as specifically otherwise approved in advance by Architect, furnish for
I
each items (such as "Door Hinge Type 1 ") product of a single manufacturer
B. Locks and Latches:
1. Latchbolt: Anti - friction type with curved strike lip. I
a. Provide extended lip where necessary to protect door frame trim from
damage.
I
b. Match hardware finish.
2. Fabricate with 3 -3/4 inches backset from door edge where surface applied gasketing
I
at door frame stops and 2 -3/4 inches elsewhere.
. 3. Provide lever handle, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hinges: Mortise type, with non - removable pins at out - swinging doors with locks.
D. Exit Devices:
1. Furnish with provisions for concealed mounting. Through -bolts are not acceptable
I
unless required by fire codes or fire tests.
2. Exit device to include impact resistant, flush mounted end cap. End caps shall be of
• heavy -duty alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment for flush alignment
with device cover plate. No raised edges shall protrude from end cap. I 3. Exit devices must be furnished with hydraulic touchpad dampener for quiet operation
of device.
4. Fumish all exit devices with deadlocking Iatchbolts and roller strikes.
5. • Furnish required filler plates and shim kits for flush mounting of exit devices on all I
doors.
6. Supply plastic installation template to increase accuracy and decrease installation
time.
i
LRS Architects, Inc. I
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Door Hardware: 08 7100 •
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008 '
1 E. Door Closers: .
1. .. Mount on room side, and not corridor or lobby side of doors bordering circulation
system unless otherwise shown.
I 2.
3. Fasteners to be concealed. • .
Closer shall have heavy duty arms, adjustable spring power with indicator dial, stick-
on templates, and self reaming /tapping screws. .
4. Pressure relief valves are not permitted. -
II F. Stops:
1. Provide wall stops; do not install floor stops unless specifically approved by Architect.
I 2. If wall stops cannot be installed, provide concealed overhead holder.
G. Flush Bolts: Provide dust -proof strikes for floor locations. •
1 H. Kickplates:
1. Provide metal kickplates specified -in Door Hardware Groups.
I 2. Anchor kickplates with oval -head full- thread screws, spaced uniformly at a maximum
of 5 inches on center at kickplate perimeter.
I. Provide hardware in finishes indicated in Door Hardware Groups.
1 J. Manufacturer and Acceptable Substitutes:
•
' Acceptable
Item: Manufacturer: . Substitute:
I 1. Hinges: Stanley (S) Hager, Lawrence, McKinney
2. Locks /Latches: Best (B) None
3. Cylinders: Best (B) None
'• 4. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VD) - Adam -Rite
• I 5. Flush Bolts Glynn Johnson (GJ) Ives
6. Surface Closers: LCN (L) None
7. Stops /Catches: Glynn Johnson (GJ) H.B. Ives, Trimco, BBW .
8. Kickplates Tice (T) Trimco, BBW •
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION .
1 A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
e' 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work of this Section in accordance with:
I 1. Hardware groups specified.
2. _ . Approved Schedule.
3. Applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. •
I 4. Templates.
5. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures.
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 .
1
Tigard Senior Center Door Hardware: 08 7100
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
•
B. Hardware Locations: Mount hardware at locations recommended by manufacturer,
requirements of ANSI A117.1, ADA, and State Building Code, as applicable.
1
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location.
•
1. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and
operation.
D Cut and fit threshold or floor plates to door frame.profile with mitered corner joints; weld multiple
pieces together. Set in full bead of sealant. •
1. At carpet, install closer floor plates flush with structural substrate under carpet.
2.- Secure to substrate with positive anchoring devices.
E. After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store hardware in original
package in a secure place, and permanently reinstall after painting has been completed.
1. Properly wrap installed hardware subjected to hand usage during construction for
protection; Replace hardware units at no expense to Owner where finish has been
damaged by construction activities.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
1
A. Upon completion of Work, and as a condition of acceptance, provide inspection, and adjustment
of operating hardware, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 1
1.. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for
the application made.
2. Clean operating units as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and .
doors.
B. After ventilation system has been balanced, manufacturer's representative to adjust closers as
necessary to meet ADA and State Building Code requirements for time required for closing
operation and opening force.
C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation and repair damaged surfaces.
D. Six Month and One Year Adjustment: Approximately six months, and prior to one year, after date
of Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of
Iatchsets and locksets and door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall
return to the Project to perform the following work:
1. Examine and adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore proper
operation and function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials,
or installation of hardware units.
3. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the •
performance of the hardware.
1
•
• 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center • Door Hardware: 08 7100
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
1 3.4 DOOR HARDWARE ,GROUPS
•
MFG QUANTITY ITEM PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FINISH
I HW1 '
VD lea. Exit Device 3347ATL x less pull x RHR leaf 613
B lea: Cylinder 1E72 613
I VD lea. Exit Device,
3347A-E0 626
Remaining hardware by door manufacturer.
1 HW2 - •
B lea. Classroom Lockset 7KC 626
I GJ lea. ' Floor Stop FB13 626
S
3ea. Hinges
CB1900 4.5 x NRP 626
TR lea. Kickplate KO 050 10" x 34" • 626
1 HW3 , •
I B lea. - Entry Lockset 7KC 7A6 626 •
GJ • lea. Floor Stop FB13 626
Remaining hardware by'door manufacturer.
HW4 •
I B lea. Storeroom Lockset 7KC 7D5 626
S 3ea. Hinges C61900 4.5 x 4.5 NRP . 626
IV lea. Wall Stop WS407 CCV 626
•
TR lea. Kickplate KO 050 10" x 34" 626
HW5
I S 6ea. • Hinges CB1900 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
IV lea. Wall Stop WS407 CCV 626
B 1ea. Storeroom Lockset 7KC 7D5 626
GJ lea. Flushbolts • FB6W , 626
I TR tea. Kickplate KO 050 10'` x 28 ". 626
I END OF SECTION
. , •
1 . -
1
LRS Architects, Inc. -
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
•
1
•
A. Section includes glazing for the following applications:
•
1. Windows
' 2. Doors
B. Related Sections:
•
1. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors
2. Section 08 4113: Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts •
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and
wind and impact Toads (where applicable) without failure, including Toss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
' sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or
other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimum and are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses indicated in Glass Product Schedule by analyzing Project Toads and in-
service conditions. Provide glass in lites in the thickness designations indicated for various
size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)
' required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300 according to design
wind loads applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures."
' a. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lite per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm, except
' where window system is shop glazed and tested by manufacturer of window
to perform as specified.
• 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
•
B. Samples: With each product data submitted, other than monolithic clear float glass, include:
1 1. Glass: 12 by 12 inch samples of each type.
2. Sealants and Gaskets: 12 inches long of each type installed between samples of
material to be glazed, fully cured.
•
t C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated in Drawings, listing glass types and
thicknesses for each size opening and location.
1 D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
LRS Architects, Inc .
1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
• September 3, 2008
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts, 1
familiar with specified requirements and methods of installation for proper performance of
Work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Provide glass materials from one primary glass manufacturer for each
type of glass specified.
1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same source as used
in other applications for same components.
2. Provide glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation
method indicated.
C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the following publications, unless more
stringent requirements are indicated:
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual ".
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000. "Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulated Glass Units."
•
D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201.
E. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with appropriate certification
label of Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with safety glazing requirements of State Building Code, Section 2406.
B. Comply with wind loading requirements of State Building Code.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions, and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
•
A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside 1
limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are
wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.8 WARRANTY 1
A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products due to
defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of •
specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranties: Provide the following on manufacturer's standard form,
1 made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer:
1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against failure of
hermetic seal.
2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including
peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
I Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I PART2 PRODUCTS
•
2.1 GLASS MATERIALS .
' A. Products: Provide products that comply with requirements indicated in the Glass Product
Schedule at end of Part 3.
I B. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3 (glazing
select), of class indicated in the Glass Product Schedule.
C. Heat- Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, (transparent flat glass) Quality Q3 (glazing
I select), class, kind, and condition indicated in the Glass Product Schedule.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion
I 2. parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where
• needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of individual lites
and to comply with glass design requirements.
U 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS float
glass where safety . glass is indicated or required by State Building Code.
a. Safety Glass: Where fully tempered glass is used as safety glass, provide
I products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR,
Part 1201, for Category I or II materials as applicable.
D. Sputter Coated (Low E) Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic oxide or metallic
' nitride deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any).
E. Insulating Glass: ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units, complying with requirements in Glass
Product Schedule, and following:
1. Sealing System: Dual Seal. •
2. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where
I needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites and to
comply with glass design requirements.
3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed of Kind HS glass
where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code.
I 2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
I materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and
• glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by •
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1
i
•
1
1 ' .
LRS Architects, Inc. • •
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Class
100/50, Grade NS (non -sag); Use NT (nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing
substrates, O.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types, or approved as recommended by window
assembly manufacturer:
a. Dow Coming; 790.
b. General Electric; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Pecor; 864.
•
d. Sonnebom Div of ChemRex, Inc; Omniseal.
e. Tremco: Spectrem 3.
2.3 GLAZING TAPE '
A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed cell, PVC foam tape, factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces, complying with AAMA 800, for applications where tape acts as a primary
seal or is used in combination with a full bead of sealant.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material and type recommended by
window assembly manufacturer for application, of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide other materials complying with referenced glazing standard and
requirements of glass manufacturers as required for applications indicated.
B. . Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85 plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of Shore, Type A
durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place and to
limit glass lateral movement.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required t� glaze openings as indicated for 1
Project.
1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying
with referenced standards and requirements of product manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
I Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
2. Presence and functioning of weep system for exterior glazing.
I • 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members.
1 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION •
I A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before .
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
•
I 3.3 COORDINATION •
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
1 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL ,
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
I gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation.
I 2. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing.
B. Install setting blocks sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
1 otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer.
•
1. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
liter.
1 C. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches, and as
follows:
•
I 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
2. Install correct size and spacing of spacers to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
I 3. required face clearances.
Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
1 C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items that are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched,
I 2. abraded, or damaged in any other manner.
Set glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction.
3. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in
appearance
I D. Glaze steelwork with closed cell tape bedding and silicone sealant.
•
E. Do not use 2 different glazing materials in same joint system.
1
1-
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Glazing: 08 8000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
•
F. Miter -cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where
joints are required.
G. Compress glazing tape or gaskets at least 25 percent of material thickness, with minimum
finished thickness of 3/32 inch.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect glass from damage after installation by attaching crossed streamers or ribbons to
framing held free from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
B. Remove excessive glazing compound from glazing and adjacent surfaces without damaging
glass or adjacent surfaces.
C. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged glass.
D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 1
• operations, including weld splatter.
1. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces
from build up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
E. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean glass surfaces on both sides no more than four days
before date of Substantial Completion. 1
3.6 GLASS PRODUCT SCHEDULE •
A. Glass Type GL -1 and GL -1T: Specified in Section 08 5410, "Composite Windows and Doors ". 1
B. Glass Type GL -2T: Tempered, insulating glass units complying with following requirements:
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch).
2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch).
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Coated Clear Indoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition C (other coated glass), 1
Class 1 (clear) float glass.
5. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Class
1 (clear) float glass. •
6. Low - Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on third surface. 1
C. Glass type GL -3T: Tempered, uncoated, single pane glass units complying with following
requirements:
1. Thickness of Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 1
2. Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass.
•
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1 •
I Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Louvers and Vents: 08 9000
Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1:1 SUMMARY
1 • A. Section includes louvers and vents.
B. Related Sections:
•
I 1. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal
2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants . •
3.. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for louvers that are a part of
I HVAC equipment, and HVAC ducts connected to louvers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I A. Provide louvers that meet or withstand the following minimum performance ratings or
requirements:
1: Structural Performance: Gravity and wind loads based on minimum uniform pressure
of 25 Ibf /sq. ft. .
2. Seismic Performance: ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Load of Buildings and Other
Structures. •
3. Thermal Movements: Temperature change of 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees
I 4. -F, material surfaces.
Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Wind Driven Rain Ratings: As
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500 -L.
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, for each type of product specified. Include printed catalog pages showing
AMCA Certified Ratings Seals, or evidence that product has been tested according to AMCA
500 -L.
B. Shop Drawings, to show plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and
I interface with adjacent construction.
•
1. Verify louver and vent openings by field dimensions prior to fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
1 for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
I 1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum.
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel.
C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision of work of
I those trades for interfacing with work of this Section.
1. Coordinate location, size, and other necessary requirements for proper connection of
I mechanical ductwork to louvers and vents.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
Tigard Senior Center Louvers and Vents: 08 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS •
• A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. . Fixed Louvers and Wall Vents: -
a. The Airolite Company.
b. Cesco Products.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc. •
• d.. Greenheck - -
e. Nystrom Building Products.
f. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500.
2.2 MATERIALS 1
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 -T5, T -52 or T-6.
•
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. 1
C. Fasteners: 300 stainless steel or same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal.
D. Bituminous Paint: ASTM D 1187, cold - applied asphalt emulsion.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frame to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 1
C. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners,
or both, as standard with manufacturer, concealed from view.
2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Type: Drainable head and blade louvers. •
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Greenheck ESJ -202.
C. Components:
1. Frame: 0.063 inch wall thickness.
•
2. Blades: 0.063 inch thickness.
3. Frame Depth: 2 inches.
4. Size: As shown.
5. Bird Screen: 1/2 inch square mesh with 0.063 inch wire, or 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick
flattened, expanded aluminum.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. -
1
•
1 .
I Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Louvers and Vents: 08 9000
Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 6. Louver Factory Finish: Kynar 500.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
• 3.1 EXAMINATION
I A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance.
I B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
1 where required to protect metal surfaces and to make weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,as
. indicated.
• II 1. Set flanges and fleshings in sealant specified in Section 07 9200.
I D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion
or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in
contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. • .
I E. Where HVAC duct meets inside face of louver, provide sheet metal closure between
perimeter of louver and perimeter of duct; paint exterior face of closure panel flat black.
_ 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT
1 A. Clean exposed surfaces with water. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners.
B. Repair damaged finishes so that no evidence remains of corrective work.
' 1. . Replace items that cannot be refinished in the field, or return to factory for refinishing
of entire unit.
END OF SECTION
1 .
I
LRS Architects, Inc. .
1 . .
Tigard Senior Center Gyps um Board: 09 2900
I • Garden Room Addition, Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes gypsum board and accessories including the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1 B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for wood framing that supports gypsum board.
2. Section 07 2100: Thermal Insulation.
I 3. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. .
4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for gypsum board paint finish. •
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refe to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of
terms for gypsum board assemblies. .
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, for each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
I requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section.
•
1. Installer: Company with not less than 3 years experience installing gypsum board
systems in project of similar size, quality and complexity under present name.
I B. Comply with the following standards:
1. ASTM C 840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
I 2. Gypsum Association Document GA -216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
3. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau recommendations for gypsum wallboard finishes.
I C. Mockup: .
1. At an area on site approved by Architect, provide a mockup gypsum wallboard panel.
I a. Provide one mock -up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used in work.
b. . Minimum panel width 8 feet wide by full height of partition.
c. Obtain Architect's approval prior to starting work.
d. Approved,mockups may be incorporated into finished Work:
1 • 2. Maintain mockup panels during construction in a undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging completed work.
• 3. Demolish rejected mockup panels and remove from job site. ,
I 1.5 • DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover, dry and protected against damage from weather,
1 condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes.
1. Store gypsum panels flat in a manner to prevent sagging.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
• 1
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I
September 3, 2008
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A. . Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. I
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1
1. Indications that panels are wet.or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
I
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
•
D. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying. I
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS •
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: - I
• 1. Gypsum Products:
1
a. BPB America, Inc.
b. . G -P Gypsum.'
c. National Gypsum Company. • I
d. USG Corporation. •
•
2. Metal and Plastic trim: •
•
a. AMICO. I
b. Beadex. •
c. Plastic Components; Inc. - 1
d. Vinyl Corp.
3. Special Moldings and Reveals:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
I
b. Gordon, Inc.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. • '
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board
I
indicated and whichever is more stringent.
• B. Gypsum Board: 5/8 inches thick with long edges tapered; Fire retardant Type X.
1. Gypsum board complying with ASTM C 442 may be used for gypsum backing board 1
for multilayer applications, 5/8 inches thick, Type X.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. I
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008 •
I 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
• A. Interior Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet or plastic.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
I b.
c. Bullnose bead.
LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
I e. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
I B. Special Moldings and Reveals:
1. Extruded 6063 T5 aluminum alloy in clear anodized finish.
2. Type: As shown on Drawings.
I 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM . 0 1002 and GA -216:
' B. Acoustic Insulation (Sound Attenuation Blankets) and Acoustical Sealant: Specified in Section
09 8110.
I C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot - grouting hollow
metal door frames. '
2.5 • JOINTING SYSTEM
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. •
•
I B. Joint Tape: ,
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
I C. Joint Compound:
1. Interior Wallboard: .
I a. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping
compound.
b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound.
. 1) . Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim
accessories.
I c. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type,
topping compound.
• d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type,
topping compound.
e. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping
or drying -type, topping compound.
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
f. Optional Latex Surfacing: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high -build
interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be
•
used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish; one of the following:
1) National Gypsum Company: "ProForm" Brand Surfacer /Primer.
2) Sherwin Williams: "PrepRite" High Build Interior Latex Primer /Sealer.
3) USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand "Tuff -Hide" Primer - Surfacer.
2) USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand Primer - Surfacer.
2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES
1
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following, or approved, for water -
based, job - mixed, drying -type texture finish for spray application:
1. Product: SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture, ready- mixed, by USG
Corporation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates and verify conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. 1
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
•
3.2 PREPARATION 1
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
3.3 SOUND CONTROL PARTITIONS
A. Install acoustic batt insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions designated for sound
control.
B. Install acoustic insulation specified in Section 09 8110.
C. Acoustical Sealant:
1. Install acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 8110.
2. Seal construction at perimeters and at openings and penetration with a continuous
bead of acoustical sealant.
a. Comply with ASTM C 919 for application of acoustical sealant.
b. Where partitions meet ceilings and floors, Apply a continuous bead of sealant
between a maximum gap of 1/2 inch between floor and bottom edge of
gypsum board, or between ceiling and top edge of gypsum board.
1) Provide sealant full depth of gypsum board facings; do not skim coat 1
over sealant.
c. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations,_ such as electrical boxes, pipes,
•
and other items penetrating partitions.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
I Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 3.4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. • General: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216.
I 1. Butt panel together for a Tight contact at edges and ends, with not more than 1/16 inch
of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
2. Locate edge and end joints over supports.
3. At internal and external corners, conceal cut edges of boards by overlapping covered '
I
edges of abutting boards.
4. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
5. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board edge.
I a. Drive specified screws with clutch - controlled power screwdrivers.
b. Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture face paper.
I 6. Screw Fastener Schedule:
a. Panel Perimeter Spacing: 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted.
b. Panel Intermediate Support Spacing: .
I 1) Walls: 12 inches o.c., typical.
2) Walls with Panels as Tile Substrate: 8 inches o.c.
3) Ceilings: 8 inches o.c.
' . 7. Isolate perimeter of non -load bearing partitions at structural abutments, except at
floors.
I a.
b. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joints at these locations.
Trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum board are •
. exposed.
c. Seal joints with acoustical sealant, comply with ASTM C 919.
111 B. Walls:
' 1. Install gypsum board with tapered edges vertical, and to within 1/4 inch of floor,
unless horizontal application is required by GA or UL listing for wall types.
2. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition.
3. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations. Temporarily brace or fasten panels until adhesive has set.
' C. Ceilings:
I 1. Install gypsum board to ceilings with long dimension of board at right angles to
supporting members.
2. Board may be installed with long dimension parallel to supporting members that are
spaced 16 inches o.c. when attachment members are provided at end joints.
I 3.5 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES '
A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: Provide framing and thickness of gypsum board, fastened as
1 required, to achieve maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. .
B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 foot, and 1/16 inch 'in any running foot.
1 1. Check trim for conformance to tolerances.
•
•
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
I
1
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 6 •
September 3, 2008
3.6 CONTROL JOINTS 1
A. Provide control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
1. Locate control joints at 30 feet maximum in ceilings, and 50 feet maximum in walls. 1
3.7 CORNER TREATMENT
A. Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, but fold reinforcing tape lengthwise through
middle and fit neatly into corner.
B. External Corners and Exposed Edges:
1. Install specified corner bead, fitting neatly over comer and securing with same type
fasteners used for installing wallboard.
2. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. and drive through wallboard into framing
I
or furring member.
•
3.8 OTHER TRIM
A. Drawings do not show locations and requirements for all trim. 1
1. Carefully study Drawings and installation, and provide trim normally recommended by
manufacturer of gypsum board. 1
B. Install 3/4 inch wide rolled formed profiles at exterior soffits.
3.9 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING 1
A: General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board
surfaces for decoration. Promptly removed residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. •
•
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevel edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories not requiring
tape.
D. Levels of Finish: Comply with GA -214, and recommendations of Northwest Wall and Ceiling
Bureau for gypsum board finishes, as follows: .
- 1. Level 1, One Coat Application: Above ceiling and concealed areas, unless a higher
level of finish is required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated
assemblies:
2. Level 2, One Coat Application: Where panels form substrate for tile.
3. Level 3, Two Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces to receive heavy grade,
backed wall covering, or where acoustical panels are mounted on walls.
4. Level 4, Three Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces with textured paint finish,
flat paint finish, unbacked wall covering.
5. Level 5, Three Coat Application with a Skim Coat or Latex Surfacer: Gypsum board
surfaces with smooth texture paint finish, or paint finish with higher level of gloss than
flat.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc. •
•
1
•
1 •
•
' • Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Gypsum Board: 09 2900
Page 7
September 3, 2008
E. Application of Levels of Finish:
1. Level 1 Finish: One coat application. •
' a.
b. Embed tape in joint compound with surfaces free of excess joint compound.
Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. _
c. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound in fire resistive
' assemblies.
2. Level 2 Finish: One coat application. •
a. Embed tape in joint compound, wipe off excess and leave a thin coat of joint
' compound over tape.
b. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
c. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound.
1 3. Level 3 Finish: Two coat application.
a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound
over tape.
b. • Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the dry first coat,.leaving a
smooth surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves.
c. • Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate
'
d. second as described above for taped joints.
When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth
surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard.
e. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth.
' 4.. Level 4 Finish: Three coat application.
a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound
I over tape.
• b. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the first coat, leaving a smooth
surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves.
t c. Apply a final coat of joint compound feathered out over the second coat,
leaving a smooth surface flush with gypsum board and free of all marks.
Feather finishing compound to not less than 12 inches wide.
d. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate
'
e. second and final coats as described above for taped joints.
When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth
surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard.
f. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth.
' 5. Level 5 Finish: Three Coat Application for Level 4 Finish with a Skim Coat or Latex
Surfacer.
•
' a. Skim Coat: A thin coat of joint compound over entire finished gypsum board
surface. Wipe down immediately, leaving a tight smooth film of joint
compound.
1 3.10 GYPSUM BOARD SURFACE TEXTURE
A. Spray -apply texture compound to produce a fine -spray texture finish in accordance with
. approved mock -up.
B. Apply texture compound only after gypsum board joints are taped and dry, and after painter-
applied surface primer specified in Section 09 9000, Painting, is applied and dry.
1 -
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Gypsum Board: 09 2900
Garden Room Addition Page 8 I
September 3, 2008
C. Gypsum Board Surface Texture Schedule: - 1
1. Walls: Smooth.
2. Ceilings: Smooth.
3.11 REPAIRS
A. Repair screw pops by installing new screw approximately 1 -1/2 inches away from projecting
screw and reset projecting screw if face paper is fractured, remove projecting screw, fill
damaged surface and finish flush and smooth.
B. Fill cracks; finish flush and smooth.
3.12 CLEANING UP
A. Clean exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair imperfections in finish.
B. In addition to other requirements for cleaning; use necessary care to prevent scattering
gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound
onto floor surfaces. 1
C. Remove•scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section at completion of each segment of
installation and dispose of in legal manner.
1
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
1
1
1
•
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513
•
U Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL .
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section Includes: Resilient wall base. • .
B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board, for wall substrate
• 1.2 SUBMITTALS •
1 A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
•
B. Samples: 12 inch length for each type, color, and pattern specified.
I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by manufacturer and has successfully completed
1 5 projects of similar size, quality and complexity.
B. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with work of this Section.
I 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of
products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). •
I B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the following tests:
1. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W /sq. cm. or greater.
I 2. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450 or Tess.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING •
1 A. Deliver in unopened packages with manufacturer's original, legible labels intact.
B. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, and
I manufacturer's run number for matching floor coverings.
C. Store off ground, in dry spaces protected from weather and damage.
I 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not start installation of resilient base and accessories until permanent HVAC system is in
complete operation.
1 ` 1. Maintain temperatures within range - recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F for 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and 48 hours after installation.
I B. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other Sections that require resilient floor accessories.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
I . A. Furnish extra stock of not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof,
of each type, co lor, and pattern of resilient product installed.
1 .
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
Tigard Senior Center Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513 •
Garden Room Addition Page 2 - I
September 3, 2008
B. Deliver to on -site location designated by Owner.
PART 2 • PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL. BASE
1
A. Provide products complying with ASTM 1861, Type TP, (Rubber, Themoplastic) and with
requirements specified in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. •
B. Style:
1. Style B, Cove, topset with toe..
C. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch.
•
D. Length: Continuous.
2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Provide products with requirements specified in the Resilient
Floor Accessories Schedule at the end of PART 3.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Water - resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and '
substrate conditions indicated.
B. Rubber Edge Strips:
1
1. Size: One inch wide, beveled, matching flooring thickness.
2. Color: As selected from standard range.
C. Sealant:
1. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, General Electric, or approved.
2. Type: ASTM C -920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; Clear, translucent silicone with
mildew inhibitor.
D. Cleaners: Neutral type provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerance, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 inch from top of floor.
3.2 . PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with resilient wall base and accessories manufacturer's installation 1
instructions for preparing substrates to receive resilient floor products.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I Tigard Senior Center Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION - ,
A. Install resilient products according to manufacturer's installation instructions. •
I B. Apply wall base to walls, columns, wall projections, casework and cabinet toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures, in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
I adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Where applied on irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with .
I manufacturer's adhesive filler material.
D. Tightly adhere wall base to substr throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
1 E. Job - Formed Corners: • -
1. Outside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without
I whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove
strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit
without removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an
I inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed.
Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3. Set toe of base in continuous bead of sealant. Remove excess sealant from exposed •
surfaces.
I 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION •
A. Resilient Molding Accessories:
I 1. Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each •
piece.
I 2. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
I A. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces.
3.6 RESILIENT FLOOR ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
I A. Rubber Accessory Moldings:
1. Product Description: Reducer strip for resilient flooring.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
I
END OF SECTION
1 .
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
.1 .
I Tigard Senior Center Linoleum Flooring: 09 6517
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
•
•
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section Includes: Linoleum tile flooring.
•
B. Related Sections:
•
1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for moisture vapor emission testing for concrete
slabs -on- grade.
2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for substrate affecting work of this Section.
• I 3. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring, for resilient accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways,
built -in cabinets, and cutouts. .
1 ' , C. Samples: 12 by 12 inches for each type, color,,and pattern specified.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
I requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
•
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute: "Standard
I Specifications and Recommended Work Procedures of Resilient Floor Coverings."
•
B. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by manufacturer, in writing, is competent in
technique required for heat - welded seams, and has successfully completed five projects of
I similar size, quality and complexity.
C. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with work of this Section.
I D. Mockups: Before installing linoleum floor coverings, construct mockups for each type of
linoleum floor covering and installation method required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
. qualities of materials and execution. Comply with the following requirements, using materials
specified for completed work:
I 1. Locate mockups where directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of date and time mockups will be constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the work.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from project site.
I b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed work.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
I A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of
• products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs).
1.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
Tigard Senior Center Linoleum Flooring: 09 6517
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the following tests: 1
1. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W /sq. cm. or greater.
2. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450 or Tess. I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened packages with labels intact and legible.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from weather with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 degrees F.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. • 1
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not start installation of linoleum floor coverings until permanent HVAC system is in •
complete operation.
B. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at
least 72 hours in advance of installation.
C. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are the same temperature as the space where
• they are to be installed.
D. Install linoleum floor coverings after other finishing operations have been completed.
E. Do not install linoleum floor coverings over concrete slabs until concrete has cured and is
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with
ASTM F 1869, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific
products: I
2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with
potable water and pHydrion paper is applied.
3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under
provisions of Section 01 4500.
•
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; if differing substantially from Drawings, or
approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding..
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS . •
A. Furnish extra stock of each type, color, and pattern of floor covering installed as follows:
1. Fumish one box minimum for each type of linoleum tile installed. 1
B. Package each type of material separately, identified, and protected against deterioration.
C. Deliver to on -site location designated by Owner.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Linoleum Flooring: 09 6517
I Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of manufacturers indicated for
each designation in the Finish Legend in Drawings.
2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
1 A. Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying oil and rosin, mixed with ground cork
.or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and keyed to a burlap (jute) or
I other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in mixture. Patterns and
colors extend through entire floor covering thickness.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
1 A. Leveling and Patching Compounds:
1. Ardex SD -P Instant Patch or Ardex SD -F Feather Finish, as applicable,
1 2. Armstrong Latex Underlayment S -183 or S -184 as applicable.
B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and
substrate conditions indicated.
11 C. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Specified in Section 09 6513.
Cleaners: Neutral type provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.
I D.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
II A. Examine substrates and surface conditions where installation of linoleum floor coverings will
occur.
I 1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and meet
requirements specified.
I a. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
b. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds,
sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive
bond. Perform moisture and pH tests.
I c. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with requirements specified in
Section 03 3000 for slabs receiving resilient floor coverings.
d. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, and foreign
deposits.
I e. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, and without more than 1/8 inch 10 ft.
variation from level or slopes.
f. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 inch from top
of floor.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
• 1 A. General: Comply with resilient floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions for
preparing substrates to receive linoleum floor coverings. •
1 -
' LRS Architects, Inc.
• .
•
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Linoleum Flooring: 09 6517
Garden Room Addition Page 4
• September 3, 2008
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in
substrates, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces.
1. Build -up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from.adjacent floor
surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces.
•
C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered.
3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL I
A. Comply with linoleum floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Scribe, cut and fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, and around pipes and
penetrations.
C. Extend flooring into recesses such as door reveals and toe spaces, closets, under saddles
and recesses, and similar openings.
1
•
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish floorings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device. 1
E. Adhere sheet floor covering to floor substrates in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
F. At horizontal unprotected edges, unless otherwise noted, place resilient reducer strips tightly
butted to units and secured with adhesive; where reducer strip occurs at doorway, center strip
under door.
3.4 TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION 111
A. Comply with tile manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that units at opposite edges of room are of equal width.
• 1. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3 inches wide at room 1
perimeters.
2. Lay units square to axes of room or space.
3. At corridors, provide full tile for pattern centered on corridor width.
4. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in same sequence
as manufactured and packaged.
5. Lay tile in a basket weave with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.
6. Lay tile in pattern of colors and sizes indicated in Drawings.
C. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
1
A. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces using neutral cleaner
recommended by manufacturer of resilient materials.
B. Clean floor surfaces as recommended by linoleum floor covering manufacturer.
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
•
1
1 •
' Tigard Senior Center Linoleum Flooring: 09 6517
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
•
' C. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use
protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer.
• 1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, adhesive, and
surface blemishes.-
, a. Seal linoleum with not less than 3 coats of floor polish.
b. Use commercially available product acceptable to floor covering
manufacturer.
c. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. After drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) disappears, cover
linoleum floor coverings with non -dyed untreated building paper until inspection for
'
3. Substantial Completion.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide
or roll objects over panels without moving panels. -
1 D. Clean floor coverings not more than 4 days before scheduled inspection for Substantial
Completion. Clean floor coverings according to floor covering manufacturer's written
instructions.
.1 END OF SECTION
•
1
1
1 •
1
1.
1
•
1 .
1 •
•
1 •
• LRS Architects, Inc.
.1 •
•
1 .
•
Tigard Senior Center Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110
I Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical insulation.
2. Acoustical sealant.
I B. Related Sections: •
1. Section 07 2100: Building Insulation, for thermal insulation.
I 2. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board, for installation of acoustical sealant.
1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
I A. Acoustical blanket insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions is installed under provisions
of Section 09 2900, Gypsum Board.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I
A. Provide with material of this Section a continuous acoustic barrier at interior partitions where
indicated in the Drawings when used in conjunction with materials specified in Section
I 09 2900, Gypsum Board. -
1.4 SUBMITTALS •
t A. Certified test reports showing compliance with required fire performance values.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Use workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this section.
I B. Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1. Flame Spread: No greater than 25.
2. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources.
B. Store inside and in a dry location. - •
I C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
PART2 PRODUCTS
' 2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
A. ASTM C 665, Type I, preformed glass -fiber or mineral wool type, unfaced; minimum 3/4 to
1 1 lb/cu ft. density.
IH
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
Tigard Senior Center Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110
Garden Room Addition Page 2 .1
September 3, 2008 .
B. Acceptable Products:
1. Owens Corning: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. 1
2. Johns Manville: Sound Control Batts.
C. Minimum Thickness:
•
1. Walls: 3 inches.
2.2 SEALANTS
A. Acoustic Sealant: Non - hardening, non - drying, permanently flexible, for use in conjunction with
gypsum board conforming to ASTM D 217.
1. Exposed and Concealed
a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. 1
• b. Pecora; AC -20 Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
c. U.S. Gypsum; "Sheetrock" Acoustical Sealant.
2. Concealed Joints:
a. Miracle; 21
b. Pecora; BA 98 Acoustical Sealant.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION 1
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of
this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION .
A. Acoustical or Sound Partitions:
•
1. At walls with acoustical blanket insulation, comply with ASTM C 919 for application of
acoustical sealant.
B. Apply a continuous bead of. sealant behind board edges and press back of board into sealant. 1
C. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations, such as electrical boxes, pipes, and other items
penetrating partitions. 1
D. Provide sealant full depth of gypsum board facings; skim coat not allowed. '
E. Refer to Section 09 2900 for installation of blanket acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant
in partitions. .
END OF SECTION
. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
I Grden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008 ,
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY .
i A. , Section includes surface preparation and application of paints and coatings.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. Sections where factory preparation, priming, or priming and finishing, of painted or
finished surfaces is specified.
2. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board, for substrate.
I 3. Division 22: Plumbing, for painting of plumbing work.
4. Division 23: Heating Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for painting of HVAC work.
5. Division 26: Electrical, for painting of electrical work.
I 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
. inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and
I duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized or painted aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze, and similar finished materials shall not require painting under this Section, unless
I otherwise noted.
C. Do not paint moving parts of operating.units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve
operators; linkages sensing devices; and motor shafts.
1 D. Do not paint required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
I E. Do not paint gypsum board walls above suspended ceilings. •
1.3 REFERENCES ,
1 A. The Master Painters Institute (MPI):Approved Product List, Latest Edition.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
I • A. "Paint ", as included herein, means coating, systems materials including primers, emulsions,
epoxy, stained enamels, sealers, fillers and other applied materials whether used as primer,
intermediate, or finish coats. •
I B. Gloss /Sheen Parameter (Reflectance based off 60 degree angle reading) based on MPI
(Master Painters Institute):
I 1. Gloss Level 1: Maximum 5 units. Flat matte finish
2. Gloss Level 2: Maximum 10 units Flat, high side sheen; velvet -like finish
3. Gloss Level 3: 10 -25 units Eggshell -like finish
. 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 -35 units Satin -like finish
I 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 -70 units Semi -gloss
6. Gloss Level 6: 70 -85 units Gloss
7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units High gloss
1
LRS Architects, Inc. '
1 • '
1
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000 .
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 1
1. Materials list of required coating materials. Identify each material by manufacturer's
catalog number, general classification, and cross - reference with finish system and
application.
2. Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples:
1. Stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, of each color and material to be
applied.
a. Provide three Samples of each drawdown, approximately 8 x 10 inches in
size, each marked with specified color designation.
b. If requested by Architect, submit samples during construction representative
samples of the actual substrate.
2. Revise and resubmit Samples as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is
achieved. Approved Samples become standards of color and finish for accepting or
rejecting Work of this Section.
3. - Do not commence painting until approved Samples are on file at job site.
C. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements
and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section.
B. ProvideWork in conformance with recommendations in the "Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" by The Master Painters Institute (MPI).
C. Mock -up: Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate
• required on the Project, where directed by Architect, and where permanent lighting has been
activated.
1. Walls and Ceilings: Provide samples on a minimum of 100 sq. ft.
2. Doors and Frames: One door and frame at exterior steel and interior locations.
3. Approved mock -ups will be used as standard for Work of this Section.
4. Approved mock -ups may be used as part of the finished Work.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic .'
compounds (VOCs).
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
•
A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels intact. 1
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum
temperature of 45 degrees F.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition . Page 3
September 3, 2008
•
I 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F.
I B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only w hen the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F.
I C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications
when air temperatures are.below 50 degrees F. .
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Applications may continue during inclement weather if surfaces, and areas to be
I painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the paint
manufacturer as being suitable during application and drying periods.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
t A. . - .
Furnish and deliver to the Owner extra paint materials from the same production run as the
. materials applied equaling 5 percent, but not less than one gallon or more than 5 gallons, of
each material, color, and gloss applied.
I 1. Package paint materials in unopened, factory- sealed containers for storage, clearly
labeled describing contents and location where used: '
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
•
2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in the Finish Legend in
Drawings.
B. Other products listed in the MPI (Master Painters Institute) Approved Product List, latest
U . edition, are acceptable, subject to compliance with requirements and approval. Submit
according to requirements of Section 01 2500; include paint manufacturers statement that
proposed substitution is equal or superior to product listed.
I 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials that are
I compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Undercoats and Thinners:
' 1. ' Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat.
2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only to
recommended limits.
I 3., Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a
.unified system of paint finish, except where material is factory primed.
• 4. Where accent colors are scheduled or indicated, provide appropriate and sufficient
I undercoats accordingly.
C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. •
• LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT •
A. For application of paint materials, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of particular paint by manufacturer of that paint, and as approved by Architect.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify proposed equipment is compatible with material
to be applied, and integrity of finish will not be jeopardized by use of proposed equipment.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting
will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
B: Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates.
1. Provide barrier coats over non - compatible primers, or remove primer and reprime as ' •
required to achieve compatibility with finish coatings.
2. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
. A. General:
1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to painted. If removal is
impractical or impossible, provide surface - applied protection prior to surface
preparation and painting.
2. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, reinstall removed items
by using workers who are skilled in trades involved..
B. Cleaning and Preparation:
•
1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with paint
manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate condition, and as specified.
2. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and flash
point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall onto wet painted surfaces.
C. Preparation of Wood Surfaces:
1. Clean surfaces until free from' dirt, oil, and other foreign substances.
2. Smooth finished surfaces exposed to view with sandpaper.
3. Do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood 1
is 12 percent or less as measured by a moisture meter.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I • Tigard. Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
•
t D. Preparation of Metal Surfaces:
•
' 1. Ungalvanized, Uncoated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease,
I and loose mill scale.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer
and according to requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
I SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming. •
•
I 2. Ungalvanized, Coated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease,
and touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Touch up with the same "primer as the shop coat.
3. Galvanized surfaces: Remove - oil and surface contaminants with nonpetroleum -based •
I solvents. Use mechanical methods to remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet
metal fabricated from coil stock.
E. Materials Preparation: , •
1 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers.
3. - Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean
I condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
4. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density.
a. Do not stir surface film into material; remove surface film and, if necessary,
I . strain material before using.
3.3 APPLICATION
I A. General:
1. Apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturers and referenced standard's
I recommended installation procedures.
2. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide a lighter shade in
each undercoat to distinguish each separate coat.
3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to unaided eye from a
I • distance of five feet.
4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint backsides to match exposed faces.
5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted.
I 7. Apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the
final coat of paint, until paint finish is uniform in color, appearance, and opacity.
B. Drying: •
1 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying period as recommended by
material manufacturer to suit weather conditions.
2. Consider oil -base and oleo- resinous solvent -type paint as dry for recoating when paint
I feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of thumb, and
when application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of
undercoat.
I C. Brush Applications:
1. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in an even film.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. ,
1
Tigard Senior Center ' Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, and other surface
imperfections to be repaired.
D. Spray Application:
1. _ Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide hiding equivalent of
brush coats.
2. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in
one pass.
E. For completed Work, match approved Samples as to texture, color, sheen.
1.. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system
•
specified, but in no case Tess than recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures:
1
1. • Exposed Mechanical Items:
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, plug mold, pipes, ducts; grilles, 1
registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and
ceiling surfaces in finished spaces.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black.
c. Wash galvanized metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of specified
enamel.
2. Hardware:
1
a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces.
b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match
color of door frame, unless otherwise directed by Architect.
3. Wet Areas (Toilet Rooms, Showers, Kitchens, Janitors, and the Like):
• a. Add an approved fungicide to paint.
b. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phenylmercuric or 4 percent
• tetrachlorophenol. •
c. For water emulsion and glue size -sized surfaces, use 4 percent sodium
tetrachloropenate.
4. Exposed Vents: Apply two coats of heat - resistant paint.
5. Plywood at Walls for Mounting Electric, Telephone and Data Equipment: Paint gray or
blue as directed by Owner.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
•
A. The Owner reserves the right to engage an independent testing agency to sample the paint 1
material being applied, and test for minimum coating thickness.
B. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in
the presence of the Contractor.
LRS Architects, Inc. _
•
1
1 •
•
•
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
' C. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used
does not comply with specification requirements.
1. The Contractor shall pay for testing, and repaint surfaces found to be coated with
I noncomplying paints. If the noncomplying paints are incompatible with specified
paints, the Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from painted
surfaces.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove from the site each day, empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded refuse
created by Work of this Section, and dispose of in a legal manner.
1. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, on site.
2. Do not use sanitary or storm drains.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work of other trades against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,
'
•
repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs at newly painted finishes.
1 C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by other trades.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
I A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint
manufacturer, or as otherwise noted.
B. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise indicated in Color Schedule.
C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications
when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F.
•
D. Paint products followed with an * are acceptable products not MPI listed.
E. Primer: Wood - Opaque Finish:
• 1. First Coat: Exterior Latex Wood Primer MPI #6
Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All-Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer 023 -00.
ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Primer 2000 -1200.
Kelly- Moore: Stain Lock 11 Stain Resistant Acrylic Primer 255 -100.
Miller Paint Co: Acri -Lite Primer 7052.
PPG: Seal Grip.Interior /Exterior Latex Stain Blocking Primer 17-921.
' Rodda Paint Co: First Coat Exterior Interior Latex Primer 50 1601 1.
Sherwin Williams: A -100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41.
•
•
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page. 8
September 3, 2008
F. Primer: Fiber - Cement Siding and Soffits; Delete if siding is preprimed:
1. First Coat: 100 percent Acrylic Primer: 1
Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All- Purpose 100% Acrylic Prime 023.
ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Primer 2000 -1200.
Kelly- Moore: Chem -Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer 247.*
Miller Paint Co: Kril Primer Sealer 6040.*
Rodda Paint Co: First Coat Exterior interior Latex Primer 50 1601 1.
Sherwin Williams: Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer A24W300.* 1
G. Primer: Ferrous Metal:
1. First Coat: Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water Based) MPI #107. 1
Benjamin Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04.
ICI Dulux: Devflex DTM Flat Interior /Exterior W.B. Primer 4020.
Kelly- Moore: DTM Acrylic Metal Primer 5725.
Miller Paint Co: Acrimetal Primer - Finish White 5000.
PPG: Pitt -Tech Interior /Exterior Primer /Finish DTM Ind. Enamel 90 -712.
Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Metal Master Primer 508901x.
Sherwin Williams: Industrial & Marine DTM Acrylic Primer /Finish B66W1.
H. Primer and Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal:
1. Pretreatment (Metal Conditioner): Clean and acid etch. 1
Keeler and Long 6235.
Oakite 33.
Porter 571. •
ZRC Metal Conditioner.
2. First Coat: Galvanized Primer (Water Based) MPI #134.
Benjamin Moore: Alkyd Metal Primer M04.*
ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex WB DTM Primer Finish 4020. •
Kelly- Moore: Kel Guard Galvanized Iron Primer 1725.
Miller Paint Co: Acrimetal Primer - Finish White 5000.
PPG: Interior /Exterior WB Industrial Primer 90 -712 EP200608.
Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Metal Master Primer 508901x.* 1
Sherwin Williams: Industrial & Marine DTM Acrylic Primer /Finish B66W1.
Primer: Aluminum - Mill Finish:
1. First Coat: Vinyl Wash Primer MPI #80. 1
Miller Paint Co: Vinyl Wash Coat Primer 9172.
PPG: Polyclutch Vinyl Wash Primer 97 -687.
Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Vinyl Wash Coat 709700X.
Sherwin Williams: Industrial & Marine Wash Primer P60G2/R7J44.
•
• .1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
J. Finish Coats: Wood with Opaque Finish and Fiber - Cement Siding and Soffits:
1. Second and Third Coats: Exterior Latex Flat MPI #10.
' Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec 100% Acrylic Exterior flat 183 -01.
ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish 2200 -0100.
Kelly- Moore: Acry- Shield Exterior Flat Acrylic Finish 1240.
Miller Paint Co: Kril Coat 5900.
PPG: Sun -Proof Exterior Rat Latex 72 -110.
Rodda Paint Co: Velvet Flat Exterior Latex House Paint 511101X.
Sherwin Williams: A -100 Exterior Latex Flat A6W16.
1 2. MPI Gloss Level 1: Flat; maximum gloss of 5 units at 60 degrees. •
K. Finish Coats: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals:
1 1. Second and Third Coats: Exterior Latex Semi -Gloss MPI #11
Benjamin Moore: MoorGlo Acrylic Latex House & Trim Paint 096.*
ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss 2406 -0110.
Kelly- Moore: Acry- Lustre Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish 1250 -121.
• Miller Paint Co: Acri -Lite Semi -Gloss 7500.* •
PPG: S/G Latex House Paint 78-45.
' Rodda Paint Co: Unique II Semi -Gloss Exterior Latex Enamel 54 1.
Sherwin Williams: A -100 Exterior Gloss Latex A8W16.
•
2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi - Gloss; gloss of 35 -70 units at 60 degrees.
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
' A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness.of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint
Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted.
B. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in Color Schedule.
1 C. Paint products followed with an * are acceptable products not MPI listed.
D. Primer: Wood - Opaque Finish:
1 1. First coat: Acrylic Primer Sealer MPI #39. •
•
Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior /Exterior Primer 023.
ICI Dulux: Prep -N -Prime 100% Acylic Latex Primer 2000 -1200.
Kelly- Moore: Uni -Prime 295.
Miller Paint Co: PPG Seal -Grip Interior /Exterior Stain Blocking Primer 17 -21.
' - Rodda Paint Co: Unique II 100% Acrylic Enamel Undercoat 502001.
Sherwin Williams: PrepRite ProBlock Interior /Exterior Primer /Sealer B51 W20.
•
•
•
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
Garden Room Addition Page 10
September 3, 2008
E. Primer: Gypsum Board:
1. First coat: Interior Latex Primer Sealer MPI #50.
Benjamin Moore: Regal First Coat Latex Primer /Undercoater & Primer Sealer 216.
ICI Dulux: Prep -N -Prime PVA Interior Wall Primer Sealer 1030 -1200.
Kelly- Moore: Enviro -Cote Interior Latex Primer 1505.
Miller Paint Co: MPI #50 Primer Low Sheen.
PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6 -2.
Rodda Paint Co: Roseal Interior Latex Wallboard Sealer 507701.
Sherwin Williams: Quali -Kote Interior Latex Primer B28WB1;B28WQ8001.
F. Primer: Ferrous Metal: Same as specified for exterior applications.
G. Primer and Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal: Same as specified for exterior applications.
H. Primer: Aluminum - Mill Finish: Same as specified for exterior applications. 1
Finish Coats: Gypsum Board - Dry Areas: (Acrylic)
1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Eggshell MPI #52
Benjamin Moore: Regal Aquavelvet Interior Latex Eggshell 319 -01.
ICI Dulux: Ralph Lauren Interior Satin Exceptional Quality Acrylic Latex RL3291.
Kelly- Moore: Envior -Cote) Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel 1510 -121.
Miller Paint Co: MPI #52 'Eggshell -Like' MPI #52.
PPG: Speedhide Interior Satin Acrylic Latex 6 -3511.
Rodda Paint Co: Interior Eggshell Finish 333644.*
Sherwin Williams: MPI 52 Gloss level 3 Interior Latex Eg -Shei B20W8521.
•
2. MPI Gloss Level 3: 'Eggshell -like' finish; gloss of 10 -25 units at 60 degrees.
J. Finish Coats: Wood with Opaque Finish: (Acrylic)
1
1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Satin MPI #43
Benjamin Moore: Regal Interior 100% Acrylic Pearl Finish W310 -01.
ICI Dulux: Dulux Interior Low Lustre Latex 1433 -0100.
Kelly- Moore: Acry-Plex Acrylic Satin Enamel A1640 -121.
Miller Paint Co: Acrinamel Satin 7100.
PPG: Pure Performance Interior Semi -gloss Latex 9 -500.*
Rodda Paint: Master Painter Satin -White 33579. •
Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss B31 W2251.
. 2. MPI Gloss Level 4: 'Satin -like' finish; gloss of 20 -35 units at 60 degrees.
K. Finish Coats: Gypsum Board - Wet Areas, Ferrous and Galvanized Metals: (Acrylic)
1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Semi -Gloss MPI #54
Benjamin Moore: Regal Premium 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish W333 -01.
ICI Dulux: Ralph Lauren Interior S.G. Exceptional Quality Acrylic Latex RL3391.
Kelly- Moore: Enviro -Cote Interior Latex Semi- Gloss.1520.
Miller Paint Co: MPI #54 Semi -Gloss MPI #54.
Rodda Paint Co: Master Painter Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 54 3101 1. •
Sherwin Williams: Quali -Kote Interior Semi -Gloss Latex A26WQ815,A26WB0151.
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
Tigard Senior Center Painting: 09 9000
' Garden Room Addition Page 11
September 3, 2008
• 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi - Gloss; gloss of 35 -70 units at 60 degrees.
L. System for Wood - Lacquer Finish (Clear):
1 1. First Coat: Lacquer Sanding Sealer MPI #84.
Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Sanding Sealer C267.*
' Dunn - Edwards: Contractor's Edge Water White Clear Lacquer Sanding Sealer 550
CE- 550WWSS.*
KeIIy- Moore: Kel -Lac Sanding Sealer
Miller Paint Co: Millerseal Sanding Sealer Satin 1206*
•
•
Rodda Paint Co: Cat -A =Lac Sanding Sealer 706400x.
2. Second, Third and Fourth Coats: Lacquer, Clear, Satin MPI #85.
Dunn - Edwards: Contractor's Edge Water White Clear Lacquer 550 20 Sheen CE-
t • 550WW20*
KeIIy- Moore: Kel -Lac Lacquer 2184.
Miller Paint Co: Valspar Valtec /NUF3002 Pre - Catalyzed Lacquer Satin.*
t Rodda Paint Co: Cat -A -Lac Precatalyzed - Semi -Gloss 746400X.
Sherwin Williams: Sher =Wood Moisture Resistant Lacquer T70F22.
3.9 . PAINT AND COLOR SCHEDULE
1 A. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in the Finish Legend in Drawings meeting parameters of
gloss /sheen indicated in Paragraph 1.4B, of products, or equivalent products, specified in
' Paint Schedules above.
END OF SECTION
1
1
•
1. •
1
1 •
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results For Fire Suppression : 21 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 0050 (15050) - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. Section 21 1300 (13925) - Fire - Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing
' Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 1998 (R2006).
I C. ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of • Mechanical Engineers; 2003.
D. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2006a.
E. ASTM A 135/A 135M - Standard Specification for Electric- Resistance Welded Steel Pipe;
2006.
' F. ASTM A 795/A 795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2004.
G. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems; American
' Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5).
H. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2007.
1 I. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2007.
' J.
K. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire- Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire - Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
L. UL 1091 - Butterfly Valves for Fire - Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc; 2004.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
' B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and
' piping connections. Refer to Drawings for additional requirements.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results For Fire Suppression : 21 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Revise the existing system to coordinate with the additional and revised building layout.
B. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.
2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10, ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, or ASTM A 135
Schedule 10, galvanized.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME 816.9, wrought steel, buttwelded, galvanized for exposed
piping locations.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4,
threaded fittings, galvanized for exposed piping locations.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings, galvanized for exposed piping
locations.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
"C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and 0-ring,
uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe;
galvanized.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Over 2 inches:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre - grooved for mounting tamper switch,
handwheel, OS &Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged ends.
2. UL and FM listed.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 -1/2 inches: 1
1. Bronze body.
2. Brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball.
3. Teflon seats and stuffing box ring.
4. Handwheel operation and integral indicating device.
5. Grooved or threaded end connections.
6. Built -in tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
7. UL and FM listed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results For Fire Suppression : 21 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' B. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
' D. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
1 F. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1 -1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
' 4. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
' G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain
top of pipe level.
H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
I. Provide sleeves when penetrating walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire
resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
' J. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining
fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
' K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior
to installation.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Fire - Suppression Sprinkler Systems : 21 1300
Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 1
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
I
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system.
B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system.
I C. System design, installation, and certification.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 21 0500 (13910) - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and
valves.
1.4 REFERENCES
I A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2007.
I B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
I A. See Section 13910 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers
catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough -in details, weights, support
1
requirements, and piping connections.
C. Shop Drawings:
I 1. Submit preliminary layout indicating the routing of sprinkler piping and sprinkler
locations.
2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers,
I 3. components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
Submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction and
Fire Marshal for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect.
4. See Drawings for additional requirements.
I D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping
from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements,
I
record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and
numbers of service depot.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.
B. Conform to FM and UL requirements.
I C. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of
this type of work and licensed in Oregon.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Fire - Suppression Sprinkler Systems : 21 1300
Garden Room Addition Page 2
I September 3, 2008
D. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear FM and UL label or marking.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
1
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING I
A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide
1
temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra sprinklers of type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by I
referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.
III
C. Provide metal storage cabinet adjacent to fire riser.
PART2 PRODUCTS I
2.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Sprinkler System: Provide dry pipe coverage for building areas noted.
B. Sprinkler System: Provide wet pipe coverage for building areas noted. 1
C. Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13.
D. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data; verify hose stream I
allowances with Building Officials and Fire Marshal; provide 10 psig margin between the
available water supply and the sprinkler demand pressures.
2.2 SPRINKLERS
I
A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
1. Finish: Chrome plated.
I
2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type.
1. Finish: Brass. I
2. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
C. Sidewall Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate
I
and guard.
1. Finish: Chrome plated.
I
2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
D. Dry Sprinklers: Exposed pendant type.
I
1. Finish: Chrome plated.
2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. I
1
' Tigard Senior Center Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems : 21 1300
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
' A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and
' sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace
painted sprinklers.
F. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
1 G. Hydrostatically test entire system.
H. Hydrostatic and flow tests shall be witnessed by a representative from the Fire Marshal's
' Office; schedule tests with the City, Fire Department, and Architect.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate required connection points to fire alarm system with Fire Alarm Subcontractor.
1 B. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
C. Coordinate locations of electric alarm with Fire Marshal, Architect, and Fire Alarm
' Subcontractor.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. System Hazard Areas:
1 1. Offices: Light Hazard.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1 •
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods : 22 0050
I
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
I
A. • Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic requirements for all work included in Division 22.
B. Requirements for the following are included:
I
1. Related Work (other Contract Documents and specification sections) which must be
combined with the requirements of this Section.
I 2. Submittals.
3. Regulatory Requirements.
4. Transportation and Handling.
5. Warranty.
I 6.
7. Record Drawings.
Substitution Procedures.
1.3 RELATED WORK
I A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the related Contract Documents in
determining the total requirements for the installation of mechanical equipment and systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
A. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770 - Closeout Procedures, for record document
I procedures.
C. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770 - Closeout Procedures, for operation and
maintenance data requirements.
I D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
1 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
I identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
2. Shop drawings: Prepared specifically for this Project.
3. Samples for verification.
I B. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
1 .
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods : 22 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008 1
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout.
1. Project record documents.
a. Product data.
b. Record Drawings: Within ten days after the date of system acceptance, the
Contractor shall provide Record Drawings of the actual installation.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
B. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
1.7 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS 1
A. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing plumbing and HVAC systems in
commercial buildings with minimum five years of experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conformance with the latest Codes and other regulatory requirements is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, and shall arrange for all inspections
required by codes applicable to this Section. The Contractor shall submit written evidence to
the General Contractor that required permits, inspections and code requirements have been
secured.
1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed 1
for a minimum period of one year from the date of acceptance thereof against defective
materials, design, and workmanship. Acceptance shall be defined as the time when start-up
and field testing show that the equipment operates satisfactorily and complies with all of the
specification requirements.
B. The above requirement does not negate the requirements for extended warranty periods
listed in the technical specification sections.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods : 22 0050
I
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall keep day -to -day record of the installed locations for all equipment and
materials as listed below:
I 1. All underground piping. Maintain dimensional accuracy within plus or minus 2
inches.
I 2. All piping concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12- inches from
where they are shown routed on the contract documents.
3. Identify and dimension locations of all isolation valves.
4. Duct concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12- inches from where
I they are shown routed on the contract documents.
B. Underground utility services, both inside and outside of buildings, shall be dimensioned from
permanent structures or benchmark. Utility services outside of building shall also show depth
I of burial with reference to the finished ground floor elevation.
C. Immediately on commencing work on the project, obtain a set of prints of the contract
drawings pertaining to this branch of work. This set of drawings shall be kept on the project
I site at all times for use in recording "record" conditions.
D. At the completion of the project, Record Drawings shall be certified as to their correctness by
the signature of the Contractor and shall be stamped or otherwise identified as record
I 1.13 drawings.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
I substitution with Contract Documents.
B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
I 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
I C. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for substitution submittal procedure.
I PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be the manufacturer's most recent and proven standard design.
I
Equipment designs which have not been used successfully in a similar applications are not
acceptable.
B. Materials shall be new, and shall comply with the requirements of the specified products.
I 2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide firestop systems at through - penetrations of fire -rated wall, shaft, floor, floor /ceiling,
I and roof /ceiling assemblies in accordance with the code requirements and Section 07 8443 -
Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping.
B. Submit product data and installation instructions for each penetration type in accordance with
I Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures. Coordinate the minimum F and T rating
requirements with the Architect.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods : 22 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. All work shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by licensed installers
skilled in their respective trades.
3.2 PROTECTION
1
A. All stock piled materials and equipment shall be protected from the weather. All stored
materials and equipment shall be carefully inspected prior to installation and replaced with
new if found to be damaged, corroded, etc.
3.3 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide polished chrome - plated cast brass screw flanges where plumbing pipes pass through
walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions in exposed portions of the building.
B. Provide polished chrome - plated cast brass escutcheon plates at plumbing fixture supply wall
and floor penetrations.
3.4 HOISTING, RIGGING, TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide all scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle hoist and rigging necessary for installing all
materials and equipment in their proper places. All temporary work shall be removed from
the premises when its use is no longer required.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and any such cutting
1
shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.
B. All patching or repair of damage to finished work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner, and meet with the approval of the Architect. The Contractor whose operations
require cutting finished work, or causes damage which entails repairs of such work, shall
employ craftsmen of the particular trade whose work must be cut or which is damaged, and
shall pay all costs associated with the patching and repair.
C. All cutting shall be performed with machine saw. Holes for pipes in concrete walls or floors
shall be cut with core drilling equipment.
3.6 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish all tools and equipment necessary for the proper installation, protection and
maintenance of the work.
3.7 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
1
A. Take all necessary precautions required to care for the contraction and expansion of all
piping.
B. All piping shall be properly supported, guided, aligned and anchored for expansion and
contraction.
C. Provide expansion joints as required and /or as shown on the drawings.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean premises of all excess construction material and debris caused by this work, in
accordance with the general conditions.
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
1 Tigard Senior Center Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods : 22 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 B. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in
prime coat finish unless otherwise specified.
C. Clean exterior of piping, ductwork and equipment. Remove rust, plaster and dirt by wire
1 brushing; remove grease, oil and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable
solvents.
D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
1 3.9 PROJECT CLOSE -OUT
A. Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for work acceptance, complete the following and list
known exceptions within the request:
1 1. Obtain final inspections and approvals from all governmental jurisdictions that are
required for the project.
1 2. Submit record drawings, operations and maintenance data, warranties, and similar
record documents.
3. Complete start-up, testing and demonstration of systems to ensure that the entire
installation is complete, properly adjusted and is in proper operating condition.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
1 Tigard Senior Center Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment : 22 0553
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
1 B. Tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. See Section 22 0050 for submittal procedures.
I B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical .
identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
1 DI. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
I
B. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com /aec.
I 2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters.
I 1.
2. Letter Color: White.
Letter Height: 1 inch.
3. Background Color: Black.
I PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1 A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
1 A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive - resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply
with sufficient adhesive to ensure perm 'anent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
1 END OF SECTION
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Insulation : 22 0719
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.
B. Accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
1.4 REFERENCES
111 A. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.
B. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2000.
C. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2006.
1 D. ASTM C 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2003.
E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1
2007.
F. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;
' 2005.
G. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
' H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 22 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Insulation : 22 0719
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread /Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723.
2.2 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:
1
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 1
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;
moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02
perm- inches.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Manufacturers:
1
a. Foster Model 85 -75 Drion Contact Cement.
2. Compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. Manufacturers:
1
a. Pabco Model Pabcate.
2. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 1
2.3 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation; Model Zeston 2000: www.jm.com.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Insulation : 22 0719
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off -white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
I
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 961E 96M.
d. Thickness: 15 mil.
I e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
1 B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
1 C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory- applied or field- applied. Secure with self-
I sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure
with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
I thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory- applied or field -
applied. Secure with self - sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure
sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
I 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
E. Inserts and Shields:
I 1. Application: Piping 1 -1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
I 3.
4. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating
I material suitable for the planned temperature range.
F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish
at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
I
G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Insulation : 22 0719
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
3.3 SCHEDULES 1
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: 1
a. Glass Fiber Insulation.
b. Thickness: See Schedule on Drawings.
2. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation.
b. Thickness: See Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
' A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary waste and vent.
2. Domestic hot and cold water.
3. Storm water.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 0719 (15082) - Plumbing Piping Insulation. •
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
' Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).
B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
' C. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -
DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001.
1 D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2004 (ANSI /ASME B31.9).
•
' E. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.
F. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002.
G. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.
H. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.
ASTM D 2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene-
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004.
' J. ASTM D 2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) and
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001.
K. ASTM D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2005.
L. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary
and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
M. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil
Pipe Institute; 2004.
N. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket - Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996.
1.5 • SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 15050 for submittal procedures. 1
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping, and locations for fittings and
valving. Maintain and furnish Record Drawings in accordance with Section 15050.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon, standards. 1
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon plumbing code.
B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1
B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY VENT PIPING 1
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield
assemblies.
2.2 SANITARY WASTE , BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING 1
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield
assemblies.
2.3 SANITARY WASTE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
1
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
I 1.
2. Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp- and - shield
assemblies.
I 2.4 SANITARY FORCE MAIN PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B).
I 1.
2. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper.
Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder.
I 2.5 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM 8 88, Type K, hard drawn.
I 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE, EXPOSED
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
I 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
I 2.7 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE, CONCEALED
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
I 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and
bronze.
I 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.8 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
I A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp- and - shield assemblies.
I B. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2680 or ASTM D 2751..
I 1.
2. Fittings: ABS.
Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D 2235 cement.
1 ,
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 4
I
September 3, 2008
2.9 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp- and - shield assemblies.
1
2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
II
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
1
B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip -on flanges;
I
preformed neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip -on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets. I
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1
A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to ASME 831.9. 1
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1 -1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
I 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2lnches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
I
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1 -1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3. Hangers for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable,
I
clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and
hanger rods.
I
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6. Floor Support for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, Iocknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
I
2.12 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1
1. Conbraco Industries, Apollo 77 Series: www.conbraco.com.
2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
I 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
I B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -110, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body,
chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow -out proof stem,
lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.
I PART 3 EXECUTION
3:1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over - excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
1 A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
1 C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
I 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I B. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
1 D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
I
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
1 G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719.
I H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of
access doors with the Architect.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover.
I
J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
I K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish
painting. Refer to Section 09 9000.
L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
1 M. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
I N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 6
I September 3, 2008
O. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with the Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code, Section 314.0. I
2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
3. Place hangers within 18 inches of each horizontal elbow.
I
4. Use hangers with 1 -1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
I
multiple or trapeze hangers.
6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
3.4 APPLICATION
I
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install ball valves for shut -off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and
I
slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope, unless otherwise noted.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 1
A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Health Authority requirements.
3.7 SCHEDULES 1
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: I
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1 -1/4 inches:
I
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe size: 1 -1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
1 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
c. Pipe size: 2 -1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
I
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.
d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
I
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. I
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping : 22 1005
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
1 2. Plastic Piping:
a. All Sizes:
1 1) Per manufacturer's written instructions.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Specialties : 22 1006
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleanouts.
B. Wall Hydrants.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
' B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures.
C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment.
' 1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type;
American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI /ASSE 1019).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
' A. See Section 15050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
' C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, water hammer
arrestors.
D. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
1 E. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule and call -outs on Drawings.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Piping Specialties : 22 1006
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION • 1
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with 1
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of
domestic water may occur (e.g., at janitor rooms, irrigation systems, interior and exterior hose
bibbs, etc.). 1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Equipment : 22 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water heaters.
1 B. Pumps.
1. Sump Pumps.
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
I A. See Section 22 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
I 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections
to other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and accessory items.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump
I and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
I C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data,
replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
I name and registered with manufacturer.
1.4 CERTIFICATIONS
1 A. Water Heaters: NSF approved.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
U A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
1 A. See Section 22 0050 for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for domestic water heaters.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Equipment : 22 3000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC TANKLESS WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Thermostatic Temperature Control Type.
B. Performance as scheduled on the drawings.
C. Controls: Microprocessing temperature control capable of maintaining outlet temperature
within 1 degree F of setpoint with fully adjustable temperature range between 100 to 140
degree F.
D. Element: Replaceable catridge insert, iron free, nickel chrome material. 1
E. Fittings: 1/2" compression fittings or 3/8" sleeves to eliminate need for soldering.
Replaceable filter on inlet connector.
2.2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS 1
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com.
2. Goulds Pumps: www.goulds.com.
3. Zoeller Pump Company: www.zoeller.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 (01600) - Product Requirements.
B. Type: Completely submersible, vertical, centrifugal.
C. Casing: Cast iron pump body and oil filled motor chamber. 1
D. Impeller: Cast iron; open non -clog, stainless steel shaft.
E. Bearings: Ball bearings.
F. Sump: Fiberglass basin with steel cover plate; 30 inches diameter, 60 inches deep. '
G. Accessories: Oil resistant 6 foot cord and plug with three -prong connector for connection to
electric wiring system including grounding connector.
H. Controls: Motor control panel containing magnetic starters with overload protection, circuit 1
breaker, control transformer, electro mechanical alternator, hand - off - automatic selector
swithes, pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, silence switch and alarm horn. Provide
mechanically activated variable level float switches for pump on, pump off, and alarm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by
code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. 1
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Plumbing Equipment : 22 3000
Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 C. Pumps:
1. Coordinate installation of pump with electrical trades.
2. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding
and cavitation, are non - overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate
within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Fixtures : 22 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
' A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sinks.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
B. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2005.
B. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2000 (R2004).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 22 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility
sizes, trim, and finishes.
1 C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
1 name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
' B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
' 1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 22 0050 for additional warranty requirements.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Plumbing Fixtures : 22 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES '
A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
1
C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough -in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. 11
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
1
B. Do not permit use of fixtures.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods : 23 0050
Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 1
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
I A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
I
A. Basic requirements for all work included in Division 23.
I B. Requirements for the following are included:
1. Related Work (other Contract Documents and specification sections) which must be
combined with the requirements of this Section.
I 2.
3. Submittals.
Regulatory Requirements.
4. Transportation and Handling.
I 5. Warranty.
6. Record Drawings.
7. Substitution Procedures.
I 1.3 RELATED WORK
A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the related Contract Documents in
determining the total requirements for the installation of mechanical equipment and systems.
I 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
I B. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770 - Closeout Procedures, for record document
procedures.
I C. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770 - Closeout Procedures, for operation and
maintenance data requirements.
I D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
I
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
I 1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
2. Shop drawings: Prepared specifically for this Project.
1 3. Samples for verification.
B. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods : 23 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1. Project record documents.
a. Product data.
b.. Record Drawings: Within ten days after the date of system acceptance, the
Contractor shall provide Record Drawings of the actual installation.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
B. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
1.7 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3100 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing plumbing and HVAC systems in
commercial buildings with minimum five years of experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conformance with the latest Codes and other regulatory requirements is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, and shall arrange for all inspections
required by codes applicable to this Section. The Contractor shall submit written evidence to
the General Contractor that required permits, inspections and code requirements have been
1 secured.
1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged. 1
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed
for a minimum period of one year from the date of acceptance thereof against defective
materials, design, and workmanship. Acceptance shall be defined as the time when start -up
and field testing show that the equipment operates satisfactorily and complies with all of the
specification requirements. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
1 Tigard Senior Center Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods : 23 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' B. The above requirement does not negate the requirements for extended warranty periods
listed in the technical specification sections.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
1 A. The Contractor shall keep day -to -day record of the installed locations for all equipment and
materials as listed below:
t 1. All underground piping. Maintain dimensional accuracy within plus or minus 2-
inches.
2. All piping concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12- inches from
t
3. where they are shown routed on the contract documents.
Identify and dimension locations of all isolation valves.
4. Duct concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12- inches from where
they are shown routed on the contract documents.
B. Underground utility services, both inside and outside of buildings, shall be dimensioned from
permanent structures or benchmark. Utility services outside of building shall also show depth
of burial with reference to the finished ground floor elevation.
C. Immediately on commencing work on the project, obtain a set of prints of the contract
drawings pertaining to this branch of work. This set of drawings shall be kept on the project
t site at all times for use in recording "record" conditions.
D. At the completion of the project, Record Drawings shall be certified as to their correctness by
the signature of the Contractor and shall be stamped or otherwise identified as record
1 drawings.
1.13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
' A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with Contract Documents.
' B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. •
C. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for substitution submittal procedure.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be the manufacturer's most recent and proven standard design.
' Equipment designs which have not been used successfully in a similar applications are not
acceptable.
B. Materials shall be new, and shall comply with the requirements of the specified products.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods : 23 0050
Garden Room Addition Page 4 1
September 3, 2008
2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide firestop systems at through - penetrations of fire -rated wall, shaft, floor, floor /ceiling, 1
and roof /ceiling assemblies in accordance with the code requirements and Section 07 8443 -
Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping.
B. Submit product data and installation instructions for each penetration type in accordance with
Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures. Coordinate the minimum F and T rating
requirements with the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. All work shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by licensed installers
skilled in their respective trades.
3.2 PROTECTION
1
A. All stock piled materials and equipment shall be protected from the weather. All stored
materials and equipment shall be carefully inspected prior to installation and replaced with
new if found to be damaged, corroded, etc.
3.3 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide polished chrome - plated cast brass screw flanges where plumbing pipes pass through 1
walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions in exposed portions of the building.
B. Provide polished chrome - plated cast brass escutcheon plates at plumbing fixture supply wall
1
and floor penetrations.
3.4 HOISTING, RIGGING, TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide all scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle hoist and rigging necessary for installing all
materials and equipment in their proper places. All temporary work shall be removed from
• the premises when its use is no longer required.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and any such cutting
1
shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.
B. All patching or repair of damage to finished work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner, and meet with the approval of the Architect. The Contractor whose operations
require cutting finished work, or causes damage which entails repairs of such work, shall
employ craftsmen of the particular trade whose work must be cut or which is damaged, and
shall pay all costs associated with the patching and repair.
1
C. All cutting shall be performed with machine saw. Holes for pipes in concrete walls or floors
shall be cut with core drilling equipment.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods : 23 0050
1
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
3.6 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish all tools and equipment necessary for the proper installation, protection and
maintenance of the work.
1 3.7 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
A. Take all necessary precautions required to care for the contraction and expansion of all
piping.
B. All piping shall be properly supported, guided, aligned and anchored for expansion and
' contraction.
C. Provide expansion joints as required and/or as shown on the drawings.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean premises of all excess construction material and debris caused by this work, in
' accordance with the general conditions.
B. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in
prime coat finish unless otherwise specified.
' C. Clean exterior of piping, ductwork and equipment. Remove rust, plaster and dirt by wire
brushing; remove grease, oil and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable
solvents.
1 D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
' 3.9 PROJECT CLOSE -OUT
A. Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for work acceptance, complete the following and list
known exceptions within the request:
' 1. Obtain final inspections and approvals from all governmental jurisdictions that are
required for the project.
2. Submit record drawings, operations and maintenance data, warranties, and similar
'
3. record documents.
Complete start-up, testing and demonstration of systems to ensure that the entire
installation is complete, properly adjusted and is in proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
1
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment : 23 0548
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vibration isolators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and Toad on each.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com.
' B. Mason Industries: www.mason - ind.com.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
1 A. Neoprene Pad Isolators:
1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.
a. Hardness: 30 durometer.
b. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch.
c. Maximum Loading: 50 psi.
I d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.
2. Configuration: Single layer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 SCHEDULE
1 A. Equipment Isolation Schedule.
1. Air Cooled Condensing Units.
a. Isolator Type: Neoprene Pad.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC : 23 0593
Garden Room Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
I A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
I B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
I A. AABC MN -1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council; 2002.
I B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air - Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988 (R 1997).
I C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
I B. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for
approval within 10 days after award of Contract.
C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to
be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Include at least the following in the plan:
I a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,
parameters, formulas to be used.
I b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of
equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be
gathered for each.
c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and
I d. piping drawings during the process.
Final test report forms to be used.
e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and
distribution.
1 D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting,
and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
I 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,
balancing, and equipment data required.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC : 23 0593
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide
final copies for the Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with index
page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of
reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data
sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
•
5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report I format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
7. Units of Measure: Report data in both I -P (inch - pound) and SI (metric) units.
8. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN -1 forms, forms prepared following
ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB forms.
9. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Project Architect.
g. Project Engineer.
h. General Contractor.
Mechanical /HVAC Contractor.
j. Project altitude.
k. Report date.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN -1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB
Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
B. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified
by AABC.
C. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB
Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, or registered Professional Engineer
experienced in performance of this Work and licensed in Oregon.
1
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work
before Substantial Completion of Project.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish AABC National Performance Guaranty for this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I Tigard Senior Center Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC : 23 0593
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air - Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1 B. Maintain at least one copy of•the standard to be used at project site at all times.
C. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete
1
work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
D. TAB Agency Qualifications:
I 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in
this section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
1 3. Certified by one of the following:
a. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
b. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy
I Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.
E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB
I agency.
3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING AGENCIES
1 A. Pacific Coast Air Balancing.
B. Northwest Engineering.
1 C. Neudorfer Engineers.
D. No Substitutions.
I 3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
I following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
• 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
I 3.
4. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
5. Fans are rotating correctly.
I 6. Volume dampers are in place and open.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC : 23 0593
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
7. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
9. Air outlets are installed and connected.
10. Duct system leakage is minimized.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system
balance.
3.4 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to the Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 5 percent or minus 0 percent of design for supply 1
systems and plus 5 percent or minus 0 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 0 percent of design to
space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus 10 percent or minus 0 percent of
design.
3.6 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING 1
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing 1
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or
areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
3.7 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area
of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable 1
drafts and noise.
E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC : 23 0593
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 F. Provide system schematic on full -size drawings or on 11x17 reduced drawings folded and
inserted into the report. Schematic shall show required and actual air quantities recorded at
each outlet or inlet.
' G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
• conditions.
' 1. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Duct Insulation : 23 0713
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 GENERAL
•
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.
' B. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2002.
t C. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material); 2005.
D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1 2007.
E. ASTM E 96 /E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;
' 2005.
F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
' H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 15050 for submittal procedures.
' B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable
workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
' A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Duct Insulation : 23 0713
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
1
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread /Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Manufacturer:
1
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 1
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng /Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
2.3 DUCT LINER
1
A. Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 1
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
B. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid
board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with acrylic
polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.
3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.
4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire - retardant type.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I Tigard Senior Center Duct Insulation : 23 0713
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self- adhesive pad, impact applied, or welded with integral,
or press -on head.
I PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
1 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1 B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
I 1. . Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
9 joints. q
insulation.
1 D. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
I
barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert
I 3. spacers.
Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
4. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow
operation without disturbing wrapping.
1 E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
I
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
I 4. • 5. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase
duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
I 3.3 SCHEDULES
A. See Ductwork Insulation Schedule on Drawings.
I END OF SECTION
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Refrigerant Piping : 23 2300
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
' 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping.
1 B. Refrigerant.
' C. Valves.
D. Strainers.
1 E. Flexible connections.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
B. Section 23 5400 - Furnaces.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ARI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid -Line Dryers; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration
' Institute; 2004.
B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.
' C. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.
t D. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
' E. ASME 816.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
F. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society
' of Mechanical Engineers; 2006.
G. ASME 831.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 2006.
' H. ASME 831.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2004 (ANSI /ASME B31.9).
1 I. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.
J. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Refrigerant Piping : 23 2300
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
K. ASTM B 280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service; 2003.
L. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American
Welding Society; 2004 and errata. 1
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide
necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently
provided. 1
B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated
otherwise.
C. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut -off
valve and expansion valve.
D. Strainers:
1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
E. Replaceable Cartridge Filter- Driers: 1
1. Use vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers.
2. Use filter- driers for each solenoid valve. 1
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue
information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including Toad capacity.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and
isolation for servicing.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping, and locations of equipment and 1
refrigeration accessories. Maintain and provide Record Documents in accordance with
Section 23 0050.
E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts
lists.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with
minimum five years of experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME 831.9 for installation of piping system. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Refrigerant Piping : 23 2300
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
I B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor
regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
I 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and
plugs in place until installation.
1 C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until
connected into system. .
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
1 A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, H58 hard drawn or 060 soft annealed.
.1. Fittings: ASME 816.22 wrought copper.
1 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver /phosphorus /copper alloy.
B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), annealed.
•
I 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.
2. Joints: Flared.
1 C. Pipe Supports and Anchors:
1. Conform to ASME B31.5.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1 -1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.
I 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
6. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
1 threaded.
2.2 REFRIGERANT
1 A. Refrigerant: R -410a.
2.3 VALVES
1 A. Manufacturers:
1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com.
I 2. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.
3. Danfoss Automatic Controls: www.flomatic.com.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1 •
1
Tigard Senior Center Refrigerant Piping : 23 2300
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
B. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze
and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring,
nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum
working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.
C. Service Valves:
1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball
check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi.
2.4 STRAINERS
A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of
stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of
430 psi.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
1
A. Manufacturers:
1. Circuit Hydraulics, Ltd: www.circuit - hydraulics.co.uk.
2. Flexicraft Industries: www.flexicraft.com.
3. Penflex: www.penflex.com.
B. Corrugated bronze hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 1
inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 300 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
1
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 1
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain
1 gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one
percent in direction of oil return.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Refrigerant Piping : 23 2300
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 F. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME 831.5.
' 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
' 4. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
5. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
6. For insulated piping, provide sheet metal sleeve around outside of insulation a
1 minimum of 12 inches long. Support insulated piping with pipe clamp and unistrut.
G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
1 H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.
Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
1 J. Insulate piping; refer to Section 22 0719 (15082).
K. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of
1 refrigerant.
L. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
1 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
' B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum
and 200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.
' 1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4
inch.
2. 1 -1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center HVAC Ducts and Casings : 23 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
' A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.
1 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories.
1 B. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
C. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or
' Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a.
B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1 1.5 SUBMITTALS
' A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record
changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. Maintain and provide
' Record Drawings in accordance with Section 23 0050.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot - dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type
I B, with G90/Z275 coating.
B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non - hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
' 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration
and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure
class of ducts.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero,
'
3. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Non - hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid
used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
•
' C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end,
or continuously threaded.
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center HVAC Ducts and Casings : 23 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing
for operating pressures indicated.
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1 -1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal
with glass fiber insulation (Airsan Accoustiturn or equal).
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream. •
2.3 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 1
Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,reinforcing, and sealing for operating
pressures indicated. -
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
C. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 1
F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 1
G. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame.
3.2 SCHEDULES 1
•
A. Ductwork Material:
1. Low Pressure Supply: Galvanized Steel. 1
2. Return and Relief: Galvanized Steel.
3. Outside Air Intake: Galvanized Steel.
B. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1
1. Low Pressure Supply: 1 inch.
2. Return and Relief: 1 inch.
3. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition HVAC Ducts and Casings : 23 3100
Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 C. Ductwork Seal Class:
' 1. Supply: SMACNA Seal Class C.
2. Return and Relief: SMACNA Seal Class C.
3. General Exhaust: SMACNA Seal Class C.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Air Duct Accessories : 23 3300
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
' A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air turning devices /extractors.
1 B. Duct test holes.
•
C. Flexible duct connections.
1 D. Volume control dampers.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
1
National Fire Protection Association; 2002.
B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
' Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
'
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES /EXTRACTORS
' A. Manufacturers:
1. Krueger: www.krueger- hvac.com.
2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
1 3. Titus: www.titus- hvac.com.
B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually
adjustable blades, mounting straps.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Air Duct Accessories : 23 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
2.2 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps.
2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS 1
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire- retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA
90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 6 inches wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
. A. Manufacturers:
1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
3. Greeneheck.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
C. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearing. On
multiple blade dampers, provide oil- impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
D. Quadrants:
•
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 1
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand -off mounting brackets, bases,
or adapters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100
for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
C. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Air Duct Accessories : 23 3300
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' D. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment; see Section 22 0548.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Air Outlets and Inlets : 23 3700
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1 A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Diffusers.
B. Grilles and Registers.
C. Louvers.
1 1.3 REFERENCES
' A. ADC 1062: GRD - Test Code for Grilles, Registers & Diffusers; Air Diffusion Council; 1984.
B. AMCA 500 -L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
C. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air - Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute; 2001.
' D. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006.
E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
1
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1 A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Contractor and Vendor to review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type
' of mounting prior to submission. Submit product data, and schedule of outlets and inlets
showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
' B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500 -L.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. •
1
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Air Outlets and Inlets : 23 3700
Garden Room Addition Page 2 •
September 3, 2008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1
A. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles:
1. Carnes Company: www.carnes.com. 1
2. Krueger: www.krueger - hvac.com.
3. Price Industries: www.price- hvac.com.
4. Metalaire: www.metalaire.com.
5. Titus: www.titus - hvac.com.
B. Louvers:
1
1. Carnes Company: www.carnes.com
2. Greenheck Inc: www.greenheck.com
3. Ruskin Inc: www.ruskin.com
4. Cesco: www.cescoproducts.com
2.2 GENERAL .'
A. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the diffusers, registers and
grilles. The performance data shall be derived from tests conducted in accordance with
ASHRAE Std 70.
B. See Diffuser, Grille, and Register Schedule on the Drawings.
2.3 LOUVERS
A. See Louver Schedule on the Drawings. Schedule indicates minimum acceptable
performance.
B. Louvers shall be AMCA certified for air performance and water penetration.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets, matte black finish color.
END OF SECTION 1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center HVAC Air Cleaning Devices : 23 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
I A. • Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
I 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Disposable, extended area pleated panel filters.
I 1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE Std 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air Cleaning Devices
Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating,
1 Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1992.
B. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
1 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures.
1 B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter frames, and filter
gages.
I C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation, changing, and periodic
cleaning.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
I A. Provide one spare set of disposable panel filters.
I PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILTER MANUFACTURERS
1 A. American Filtration Inc: www.americanfiltration.com.
B. AAF International /American Air Filter: www.aafintl.com.
1 C. Camfil Farr Company: www.camfilfarr.com.
2.2 DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PLEATED PANEL FILTERS
1 A. Manufacturer: Camfil Farr 30/30 or equal.
B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, pleated, lofted, non - woven, reinforced cotton and synthetic fabric;
I supported and bonded to welded wire grid, with EPA registered and environmentally safe
antimicrobial preservative.
1. Frame: Cardboard.
I 2. Nominal thickness: 2 inches.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center HVAC Air Cleaning Devices : 23 4000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
C. Rating, per ASHRAE Std 52.1:
1. Dust spot efficiency: 25 -30 percent.
2. Weight arrestance: 90 -92 percent.
3. Initial resistance at 250 fpm face velocity: 0.08 inch WG.
2.3 FILTER FRAMES AND HOUSINGS
A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or
extruded aluminum T- section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and
walls. Filter access doors to include hinges, continuous gasketing, and positive locking
devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.
D. Deliver one extra set of air filters to Owner Representative.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Split System Heating and Cooling : 23 5400
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PART1 GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
' A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1; bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
' 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Forced air furnaces.
' B. Refrigerant cooling coils.
C. Air cooled heat pump units.
1 D. Controls.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation.
1 C. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
D. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories.
1 E. Section 23 4000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.
1.4 REFERENCES
1
A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential
Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;
2001.
B. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air - Conditioning and Air - Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air -
Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994.
•
' C. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute; 1995.
' D. ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute; 1997.
' E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2002.
F. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2002.
G. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1994.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Split System Heating and Cooling : 23 5400
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
H. ASHRAE Std 23 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant
Compressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1993.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 23 0050 for submittal procedures. 1
B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and
1 wiring diagrams. Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field
connections.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to
the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1
B. Unit efficiencies shall comply with the State of Oregon Energy Code requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
1
A. See Section 23 0050 for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide three year manufacturers warranty for control board and solid state ignition modules.
1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1
A. Carrier Corporation; Model 58MVP: www.carrier.com.
B. Lennox Industries Inc.: www.lennox.com 1
C. The Trane Company: www.trane.com.
2.2 ELECTRIC FURNACES
A. Units: Self- contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet,
supply fan, heating element, controls, air filter, humidifier, and accessories; wired for single
power connection with control transformer.
1. Air Flow Configuration: Upflow.
2. Heating: Electric.
B. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors, glass
1 fiber insulation and reflective liner.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
I Tigard Senior Center Split System Heating and Cooling : 23 5400
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 C. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive motor.
D. Motor: 1750 rpm single speed.
1 E. DX Coil: Provide DX coil as part of the package. See Schedule on Drawings for capacity.
F. Electric Heater: Helix wound bare nichrome wire heating elements arranged in incremental
I states of 5 kW each, with porcelain insulators.
G. Electric Heater Operating Controls:
I 1. Low voltage adjustable room thermostat energized heater stages in sequence with
pre- determined delay between heating stages. See Thermostat Section below for
more details.
2. High limit temperature control de- energizes heating elements, automatic resets.
I 3. Supply fan starts before electric elements are energized and continues operating
after thermostat is satisfied until bonnet temperature reaches minimum setting.
Include manual switch for continuous fan operation.
4. Outdoor thermostat locks out some heating elements until outdoor temperature
1
drops.
H. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement.
1 I. Performance:
•
1. Refer to Fan Coil Unit Schedule on drawings.
1 J. Operating Controls:
1. Room Thermostat: Cycles outdoor unit to maintain room temperature setting. See
I Section below for details.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS
1 A. Refer to schedule on Drawings for outdoor unit type and capacity.
B. Self- contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, with
1 compressor and condenser.
C. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with
safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner.
I D. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240 with testing in accordance with
ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed.
I E. Compressor: hermetic, resiliently mounted integral with condenser, with positive lubrication,
crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier.
Provide time delay control to prevent short cycling.
1 F. Air Cooled Condenser: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing, with
direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. Seal with holding
I charge of refrigerant. Motors shall be weatherproof, suitable for outdoor use, single phase
permanent split capacitor type, with permanent lubricated ball bearings, and built in thermal
overload protection. Shafts shall be corrosion resistant.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Split System Heating and Cooling : 23 5400
Garden Room Addition Page 4
I September 3, 2008
G. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic
reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1
1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Provide heat pump reversing valves for heat pump units.
H. Operating Controls: I
1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.
I I. See section 23 0548 for additional requirements.
2.4 ROOM THERMOSTAT: 1
A. Room Thermostat: Wall- mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat
with remote sensor to maintain temperature setting; low- voltage; with following features:
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. I
2. For heat pumps, first stage of heating uses the heat pump, second stage of heating
uses the electric resistance heat. .
I
3. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint.
4. Short cycle protection.
5. Programming based on every day of the week.
6. Selection features including degree F or degree C display, 12 or 24 hour clock,
I
keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on -auto.
7. Battery replacement without program loss.
8. Thermostat display:
a. Actual room temperature. I
b. Programmed temperature.
c. System mode indication: heating, cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on,
1 off.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop
drawings. I
B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities I
having jurisdiction.
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 1
C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.
1
END OF SECTION
I
LRS Architects, Inc. I
.1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
1 Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. The intent of Divisions 26 and 27 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings is to provide a
complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown, specified and required by
applicable codes. Include all work specified in Division 16 and shown on the accompanying
Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, etc., in the finished job.
B. The Division 26 and 27 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are complementary and
what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings
1
are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa.
C. Imperative language is frequently used in Division 26 and 27 Specifications. Except as otherwise
' specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor.
D. Provide complete ground systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Include conduit
system, transformer housings, switchboard frame and neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous
1 grounds required. _
E. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the
' function of each item of equipment connected under this work.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not limited to:
1. • Drawings and Specifications.
' 2. Public Ordinances, Permits.
3. Payments and fees required by governing authorities for work included in this Division.
4. Change Orders.
1 B. Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Division.
C. All Sections of Division 26 and 27 Electrical Specifications, are interrelated and shall be considered
1 in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any Section of Division
26 and 27.
D. Where specified materials or methods exceed minimum standards allowed by applicable codes,
1 the more stringent requirement shall apply.
1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The latest adopted revisions of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
' 1. International Building Code (IBC).
2. National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
'
•
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
5. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1.
1 •
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
9. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.).
10. International Fire Code (IFC).
11. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR).
1 12. Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
1.4 SITE VISITATION:
A. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions and
all other factors that may affect the execution of the work. Include all related costs in the initial bid
proposal.
1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK:
A. Conduct work in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of
equipment. Consult the Drawings of all other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts with cabinets,
counters, equipment, structural members, etc. In general, the architectural drawings govern but
conflicts shall be resolved with the Architect prior to rough -in.
B. Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space.
Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space and the access routes through the
construction shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 1
C. Prepare detailed layout drawings for panel layouts in electric rooms or closets, utilizing
dimensioned shop drawing data of equipment to be furnished. Provide additional wiring details at
switchboards, motor control centers, and other areas where work is of sufficient complexity to
warrant additional detailing for coordination. Submit layout drawings for approval prior to
commencing field installation and shall be included with shop drawings.
D. Coordinate rough -in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other divisions of the
work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer. Make installation
and connections in accordance with rough -in and wiring diagrams provided for Contractor's use.
Arrange raceways, wiring, and equipment to permit ready access to switches, motors, and control
• components. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear.
E. Coordinate all aspects of the electrical, telephone, and other utility services with the appropriate
serving utility. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for connection fees or
additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of
policies of the serving utility.
F. Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site. , Particular coordination
shall be performed with contractors installing storm sewer, sanitary sewer, gas, water and irrigation
lines to avoid conflicts. Common trenches may be used with other trades, providing clearances
required by codes and ordinances are maintained.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Provide a written warranty covering the work done under this Division as required by the General 1
Conditions. Incandescent lamps will be excluded from this warranty.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
B. Apparatus:
1. Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the Contract Documents.
' 2. Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.
3. Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
C. Systems: Any system damage caused by failures of any system component shall be included.
1 1.7 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS:
' A. The Drawings that accompany the Division 26, 27 and 28 Specifications are diagrammatic. They
do not show all offsets, fittings, or accessories that may be required to install work in the space
provided and avoid conflicts. Follow the Drawing as closely as is practical and install additional
bends, offsets, fittings, and accessories where required by local conditions from measurements
' taken at the jobsite. The right is reserved to make minor field order changes in outlet location prior
to roughing -in without additional cost to the Owner.
t B. Lower case letters adjacent to devices or luminaires indicate switching arrangement or circuit
grouping. Numbers adjacent to devices indicate circuit connection.
C. The intent of the branch circuiting and switching shown shall not be changed nor homeruns
' combined without the approval of the Architect. Feeder runs are not to be combined or changed.
D. Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 copper branch circuit conductors
' unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear, provide quantity of circuit conductors to
the outlets shown to perform the control or circuiting indicated. Include ground, travelers and
switchlegs as required by the circuiting arrangement.
1.8 SUBMITTALS:
A. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 01.
B. Submit five copies of electrical shop drawings and equipment data in expandable folders equal to
Smead No. 1524E within 45 days from notice to proceed. Each submitted section shall include
data on all equipment requiring submittals for that section. Include in each folder a complete index
' for all Sections and materials requiring submittals.
C. Include manufacturer's detailed specifications and data sheets to fully describe equipment
furnished. Assure that all deviations from the Drawings and Specifications are specifically noted in
' the submittals. Failure to comply will automatically void any implied approval for use of the
equipment on this project.
' D. Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to be construed as change
authorizations. If discrepancies between the materials or equipment submitted and the Contract
Documents are discovered either prior to or after the data is processed, the Contract Documents
will govern.
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
E. Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the
information given in the construction documents. The contractor is solely responsible for, and this
review does not include: confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting
fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other
trades and performing all work in safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections or comments made on
the submittal during review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with the requirements of
the construction documents or with its responsibilities listed herein.
F. The Installation Drawings called for under submittals shall show all outlets, devices, terminal
cabinets, conduits, wiring, and connections required for the complete system described. Prints of
these drawings shall be submitted prior to starting installation. The Contractor submitted drawings
will then form the basis for installation.
G. Record in- progress drawings shall be kept up to date as the work progresses showing all changes,
deviations, addendum items, change orders, corrections, or other variations from the Contract
Drawings. The marked up drawings shall be kept at the jobsite and available for the Architect's
review. At the completion of the work, all deviations from the installation drawings shall be
incorporated on the reproducibles to indicate "as- built" conditions. The drawings shall then be
submitted to the Architect as Record Drawings for the system.
1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 01. '
B. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, prepare detailed operating and maintenance manuals
for equipment and systems installed. Operating and Maintenance Manuals will be used for training
of and use by the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the systems.
1
C. Format of the manuals shall be based on a separate manual or chapter for each class of system as
follows:
1. "Secondary distribution system.
2. Low voltage distribution system.
3. Standby power system.
4. Egress lighting system.
5. Security system.
6. Lighting systems, including lamps.
7. Lighting control system, interior and exterior. •
8. Wiring devices, i.e., GFI receptacles and cable reels.
D. Content of each manual or chapter shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1
1. Description of system.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Page 5
September 3, 2008
1 2. Operating Sequence and Procedures: •
a. Step -by -step procedure for system start-up, including a pre -start checklist. Refer to
' controls and indicators by nomenclature consistent with that used on panels and in
control diagrams.
b. Detailed instruction in proper sequence, for each mode of operation (i.e., day- night,
staging of equipment).
' c. Emergency Operation: If some functions of the equipment can be operated while other
functions are disabled, give instructions for operations under those conditions. Include
here only those alternate methods of operations (from normal) which the operator can
' follow when there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of components or other unusual
condition.
d. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after
operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step -by -step instructions in that
1 order.
3. Preventive Maintenance:
a. Provide a schedule for preventive maintenance. State the recommended frequency of
performance of each preventive maintenance task such as cleaning, inspection, and
scheduled overhauls.
' b. Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning and inspection with
recommended lubricants.
c. Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning, or
' other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria.
d. Provide instructions for lubrication and adjustments required for preventive maintenance
routines. Identify test points and given values for each.
' 4. Manufacturers' Brochures: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering devices and
equipment used in the system, together with illustrations, exploded views, and renewal parts
lists. Manufacturers' standard brochures shall be edited so that the information applying to
' the ACTUAL installed equipment is clearly defined.
E. Submit two draft copies of the complete operating and maintenance manual for review to the
Architect for approval.
F. Submit three copies of the final operating and maintenance manuals bound in 3 -ring binders with
tabs and index at least five days prior to the inspection for Substantial Completion.
1.10 CONTRACT COST DATA:
A. Furnish to the Architect a cost breakdown of the Electrical Work.
' B. The cost breakdown shall include separate amounts for material, labor and mark -up for each CSI
specification section included. Include cost data with the shop drawings submittal.
1.11 CHANGE ORDERS:
A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a complete itemized
' breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, Contractor's
estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect.
Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS: 1
A. Electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by a recognized testing laboratory or
approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and
ordinances.
B. Materials shall be new, of the best quality, and American made. The materials shall be
manufactured in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, U.L. or other applicable standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide a complete properly operating system for each item of equipment called for under this
work. Installations shall be in accord with the equipment manufacturer's instructions, the best
industry practices and the contract documents. Where a conflict in these guides appear, the
Architect shall be requested to provide proper clarification before work is roughed in and the
Architect's decision will be final. Work installed without such clarification shall be removed and
corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Make installation in a neat, finished, and safe manner according to the latest published NECA
Standard of Installation under competent supervision.
C. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where
installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating rated fire barriers. The penetration sealing system
must be capable of passing a 3 -hour test per ASTM E -814 (UL 1479) and must consist of a
material capable of expanding nominally eight times when exposed to temperatures of 250 - 350 °F.
An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk and /or putty form may be used.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work in 1
compliance with Division 31, 32 and 33.
B. For direct burial cable or non - metallic conduit, a minimum 3 -inch cover of sand or clean earth
fill shall be placed all around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay all steel
conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length. Water
shall be removed from trench while electrical conduit is being laid.
C. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8- inches deep and compact to 95% of maximum density
at optimum moisture to preclude settlement.
1. Interior: Bank sand or pea gravel.
2. Exterior: Excavated material with final 8- inches clean soil.
D. Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil. All excess soil shall
be disposed of at the site as directed.
E. Provide 6- inches wide vinyl tape marked "ELECTRICAL" in backfill, 12- inches below finished
grade, above all high voltage cable or conduit runs.
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Page 7
September 3, 2008
' F. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with General
Contractor.
' 3.3 NOISE CONTROL:
A. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back to back nor straight through
boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note to minimize
' transmission of noise between occupied spaces.
B. Conduit shall be routed along corridors or other "noncritical" space to minimize penetrations
' through sound rated walls. All penetrations through sound rated partitions shall be grouted solid
and airtight. Conduit and its associated attachment shall not rigidly connect (i.e., bridge)
independent wall structures. Flexible connections or attachments are required.
t C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on walls
which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such
devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or
isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the
occupied space.
D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably
1 noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced.
' 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections,
including incidental wiring, materials, devices, and labor necessary for a finished working
1 installation.
B. Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of equipment prior to roughing -in.
Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting.
C. Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation. Minimum size flex for mechanical
equipment shall be 1/2 inch except at small control devices where 3/8 -inch flex may be used.
' Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex with 6 inches minimum slack loop. Pump
motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system.
' D. Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems will be furnished and installed under
Division 23, 24 and 35 except for provisions or items specifically noted on the electrical Drawings•
or specified herein.
' 3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT:
A. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, luminaires, panels, outlets, and
cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or
1
objects fastened to or suspended from the building structure.
B. Properly and adequately support luminaires installed under this work from the building structure.
' Supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of luminaires. Flexible connections where
permitted to exposed luminaires shall be neat and straight, without excess slack, attached to the
support device.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 8
September 3, 2008
C. Support all junction boxes, pull boxes, or other conduit terminating housings located above the
suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof, or penthouse floor structure to prevent sagging or
swaying.
D. Conduits:
1. Support suspended conduits 1 inch and larger from the overhead structural system with metal
ring or trapeze hangers and threaded steel rod having a safety factor of 4. Conduits smaller
than 1 inch, installed in ceiling cavities, may be supported on the mechanical system supports
when available space and support capacity has been coordinated.
2. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire.
E. Powder actuated or similar shot -in fastening devices will not be permitted for any electrical work
1
except by special permission from the Architect.
3.6 ALIGNMENT:
A. Install panels, cabinets, and equipment level and plumb, parallel with structural building lines.
Switchgear panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings, or distortion.
Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices.
B. Fit surface panels, devices, and outlets with neat, appropriate trims, plates, or covers without
overhanging edges, protruding corners, or raw edges to leave a finished appearance. 1
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Include cutting, patching and restoration of finishes necessary for this work. Surfaces damaged by
1
this work and spaces around conduits passing through floors and walls shall be neatly patched and
finished to match the adjacent construction including painting or other finishes. Clean up and
remove all dirt and debris. This work shall all be performed to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Where equipment installations or connections require the installation of an access panel, arrange
with General Contractor to provide a properly sized and installed access panel similar to those
used for mechanical equipment access.
3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK:
A. Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other I
trades, weather conditions, or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new
condition will be rejected as defective.
B. Switchgear, transformers, panels, luminaires, and all electrical equipment shall be kept covered or
closed to exclude dust, dirt, and splashes of plaster, cement; or paint and shall be free of all such
contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust,
scratches, and other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect, if
damaged.
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
3.9 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE:
A. Electrical service shall be maintained to all functioning portions of the building throughout
' construction, except as noted below, during all normal working hours of the building occupants.
Outages to occupied areas shall be kept to a minimum and be pre- arranged with the Architect or
Owner's Representative. This Contractor will be liable for any damages resulting from
unscheduled outages or for those not confined to the pre- arranged times.
1 B. Signal and communication systems and equipment shall be kept in operation wherever these serve
occupied or functional portions of the building. Outages of these facilities shall be treated the same
' as electrical power outages.
C. Telephone services where required during the construction work will be maintained by the Owner's
communications personnel. This work shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative and
' Architect in such a manner that service, as required by the building occupants, can be readily
installed and maintained.
D. Include all costs for temporary facilities, overtime labor and necessary provisions to maintain
electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and facilities, if used, shall be
removed and the site left clean before final acceptance.
1 3.10 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE:
A. Remove or relocate all electrical wiring, equipment, luminaires, etc., as may be encountered in
' removed or remodeled areas in the existing construction affected by this work. Disconnect
electrical service to hard wired equipment scheduled for removal under other Divisions of Work.
Wiring which serves usable existing outlets shall be restored and routed clear of the construction or
demolition. Safely cut off and terminate all wiring to be abandoned and remove to leave site clean.
i B. Existing concealed conduits in good condition may be reused for installation of new wiring where
available. Existing undamaged, properly supported surface conduits may be reused where surface
conduits are called for, provided that the installation meets all workmanship requirements of the
' Specifications. Where new wiring is added or existing wiring disturbed in existing branch circuit
raceways, all existing wires shall be replaced with new.
' C. Removed materials not scheduled for reuse shall become the property of the Contractor for
removal from the site, except for those items specifically indicated on the Demolition Drawings for
salvage or reuse. Neatly store salvaged items at one location at the site where directed by the
' Owner's Representative.
D. Salvage properly operating circuit breakers from panels scheduled for removal and use to replace
faulty or inadequate breakers in existing panels scheduled to remain.
3.11 COMPLETION AND TESTING:
A. Upon completion, systems shall be tested to show the equipment installed operates as designed
' and specified, free of faults and unintentional grounds. The system tests shall be set up for as
many at one time as possible to work into construction phasing. Tests shall be done in the
presence of the Architect or his representative, and shall be scheduled 48 hours in advance.
B. A journeyman electrician with required tools shall be available to conduct all tests, with or without
the equipment factory representative present.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Electrical: 26 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 10
September 3, 2008
C. Systems shall include, but not be limited to the following systems:
1. Standby power
2. Fire alarm
3. Lighting control systems
4. Emergency egress lighting
5. Megger testing
6. Ground electrode test
7. GFI receptacles testing
D. A written record of performance tests shall be compiled, dated, witnessed, and submitted along
with operating and maintenance data to the Architect prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Conductors and Connectors: 26 0519
Garden RoomAddition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Conductor sizes shown on Drawings are sized for copper and shall be considered minimum for
ampacities and voltage drop requirements.
1 B. Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except
as noted.
1 C. Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers, or on reels:
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
' A. Product data.
' B. Test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS - 600V:
A. Type:
' 1. Copper: No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise, No. 8' and larger, Class B
concentric or compressed stranded.
1 B. Insulation:
1. Copper: THW, THHN, THWN unless noted or specified otherwise. XLP where required
t for low leakage.
C. Thru wiring in fluorescent luminaires shall be rated for 90 degree C minimum.
D. Manufacturers: Alcan, General, Essex, Rome, Southwire, or equal.
2.2 POWER LIMITED WIRING:
A. Copper, stranded or solid as recommended by the system manufacturer.
B. Insulation shall be appropriate for the system and location used.
2.3 CONNECTORS - 600V AND BELOW:
A. Branch Circuit Conductor Splices: Live spring type, Scotchlok, Ideal Wire Nut, Buchanan B-
1 Cap, or 3M Series 560 self- stripping type.
B. Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Bumdy, or equal with 600V heat
' shrink insulation. For cable splices in sub - terrain /underground vaults or any wet locations shall
be provide with 600V 3M Series DBR -6 or approved.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Conductors and Connectors: 26 0519
Garden RoomAddition Page 2
September 3, 2008
C. Terminator Lugs for Stranded Wire:
1. No. 10 Wire and Smaller: Spade flared, tool applied.
2. No. 8 Wire and Larger: Compression tool applied, Burndy, Anderson, or equal. Set
screw type terminator lugs supplied as an integral part of switches and circuit breakers
1 will be acceptable for terminating only copper conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTORS: 1
A. Pulling compounds may be used for pulling all but low leakage type XLP insulated conductors
on isolated power systems. Clean residue from the conductors and raceway entrances after the
pull is made.
B. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. - Pulling shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions, bending radii of the
cable, and compounds. A dynamometer shall be utilized on all high voltage cable pulls to insure
that the maximum allowed cable tension is not exceeded. The Architect and Engineer shall be
notified prior to all cable pulls. Record the maximum strain of each pull.
C. Conductors entering terminal or junction boxes mounted on hermetically sealed refrigeration
compressor motors shall be copper.
1
D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled in
until all bushings are installed and raceways terminations are completed. Wire shall not be
pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is poured and forms are
stripped.
E. Wire devices external to isolating panels with copper stranded conductors having a cross - linked
polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less.
Minimum insulation wall thickness shall be 1/32" for #10 and #12 AWG and 5/64" for #8 AWG
and larger conductors. Wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate
NFPA Standards.
1
F. Minimum insulation wall thickness shall be 1/32" for #10 and #12 AWG and 5/64" for #8 AWG
and larger conductors. Wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate
NFPA standards.
3.2 CONNECTORS: •
A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied spade flared lug when
terminating at a screw connection.
B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour
1
period.
C. All tool applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations
and physically checked for tightness.
1
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center
•
Garden RoomAddition Conductors and Connectors: 26 0519
Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 3.3 COLOR CODING:
A. Secondary service, feeders, and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded. Phase color
code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A -B -C left-to- right, A -B -C top -to- bottom, or AB-
C front -to -back. Color code shall be as follows:
208Y/120 volt Phase
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Ground*
Grounds for isolated ground receptacles shall be green with yellow tracer.
' B. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 and No. 10 branch circuit conductors
and neutral sizes.
1 C. Phase conductors No. 8 and larger color code using one of the following:
1. Solid color compound or solid color coating.
' 2. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.
3. Colored as specified using 3/4 -inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a
minimum of three inches for terminal points and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs,
manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable
stating size and insulation type.
D. Switchlegs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the phases to which connected or a color
distinctive from that listed.
E. Color coding of the flexible wiring system conductors and connectors shall be the
manufacturer's standard.
F. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the
existing wiring system.
3.4 TESTS:
' A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all phase and neutral conductors of feeders and circuits over
100 ampacity, 480 volt and below, with a 1000 volt megger. The written test report listing the
results of the test to be submitted to Architect. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall
be disconnected prior to the test.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
I Tigard Senior Center Grounding: 26 0526
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
I PART1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
I A. Provide complete ground systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Include conduit
system, transformer housings, switchboard frame and neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous
grounds required.
I B. Continue existing system as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND CONDUCTORS:
1 A. Bare or green insulated copper for interior systems.
B. Bare copper for underground or exterior systems.
2.2 CONNECTORS:
A. Cast, set screw or bolted type.
I B. Form poured, exothermic welds.
I C. Grounding lugs where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Grounding Conductors: Sized in accord with Article 250, Tables 250 -122 and 250 -66 of the
National Electrical Code.
I
B. Grounding Conductor Connectors: Made up tight and located for future servicing and to insure
low impedance.
I C. Ground the electrical system, the cold water service, structural steel, and transformers to the
building ground grid.
1 D. All Plug -in Receptacles: Bonded to the boxes, raceways, and grounding conductor.
E. Provide equipment grounding conductor in all PVC conduit runs.
1 F. Provide ground bonding to above ground portion of metal gas piping per NEC 250- 104(b).
G. All separately derived systems shall be solidly grounded to the nearest water piping.
I
3.2 EQUIPMENT:
I A. Provide separate green insulated equipment ground conductor in all non - metallic and flexible
electrical raceways. Effectively ground all luminaires, panels, controls, motors, disconnect
switches, exterior lighting standards, and noncurrent carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding
I jumpers, grounding bushings, Tugs, buses, etc., for this purpose.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Grounding: 26 0526
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
B. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances to panels and equipment
enclosures and bond bushings to enclosures with minimum No. 10 AWG conductor. Connect
the equipment ground to the building system ground. Use the same size equipment ground
conductors as phase conductors, up through No. 10 AWG.
3.3 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST:
A. Ground electrode resistance test shall be accomplished with a ground resistance direct - reading
single test meter utilizing the Fall -of- Potential method and two reference electrodes. Perform
test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient the concrete - encased ground
electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line spaced fifty (50) feet
apart. Drive the two reference electrodes five (5) feet deep.
B. Test results shall be in writing and shall show temperature, humidity and condition of the soil at
the time of the tests in the case where the ground resistance exceeds 5 ohms. The Engineer
will issue additional instructions.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
.1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 0533
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical systems wiring, except where
clearly shown or specified otherwise. All fittings, boxes, hangers and appurtenances shall be
1 included.
B. Size raceways and conduits as specified. Where no size is indicated, conduit may be the
minimum code permitted size for the quantity of conductors installed, based upon NEC tables
for conductors with type THW/TW insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1 2.1 METALLIC CONDUITS:
' A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Smooth surfaced heavy wall mild steel tube of uniform
thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end and protected inside and out with
galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. GRC shall comply with NEC Article 346.
' B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Smooth surface, intermediate wall mild steel tube of
uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end, and protected inside and out
with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. IMC shall comply with NEC Article 345.
' C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Smooth surface, thin wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness
and temper, galvanized or sherardized on the outside, and enameled on the interior. EMT shall
comply with NEC Article 348.
1 D. Flexible Conduits (Flex):
• • 1. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Interlocking single strip steel construction, galvanized inside
and out after fabrication. Flex shall comply with NEC Article 350.
2. Liquid Tight: Similar to flexible metallic conduit, except encased in a liquid tight
polyvinylchloride or equivalent outer jacket over the flexible steel core, and shall comply
' with NEC Article 351.
2.2 NON - METALLIC CONDUITS:
1 A. Underground Ducts:
1. PVC, Encased Burial: Type EB for concrete encasement, shall meet or exceed the
current requirements of EB -20 /ASTM F512, NEMA TC-6 and U.L. 651. Rate for use with
90 °C wire.
2. PVC, Direct Burial: Type DB suitable for direct burial, shall meet or exceed the current
t requirements of DB -20 /ASTM F512 and NEMA TC-6. Rate for use with 90 °C wire.
B. Rigid Non Metallic Conduit: Type 11 PVC Schedule 40, suitable for use with 90 °C rated wire.
Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 651 and carry appropriate UL listing for above and below
1 ground use.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 0533
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
2.3 WIREWAYS:
A. Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock -outs on standard spacing, 1
screw cover.
B. Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the Drawings.
2.4 FITTINGS:
A. GRC and IMC: 1
1. Threaded Locknuts: Sealing type where used with NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4 and 12 enclosures.
2. Threaded Bushings: 1 1/4 inch and larger, insulated, grounding type as required under
Section 16450.
3. Threaded Couplings: Standard threaded of the same material and as furnished with
conduit supplied. Erickson type couplings may be used where required to complete
conduit runs larger than 1 inch.
B. EMT:
1. Connectors: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type for conduit termination, with
• insulated throat, suitable for conditions used. Use lay -in grounding type bushings where
terminating grounding conductors.
2. Couplings: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type, concrete tight.
C. Threadless: GRC and IMC couplings and box connectors may be steel threadless,
compression ring or set screw type for use with conduits 1 inch and smaller where installed in
1
poured concrete locations or where limited working space makes threaded fittings impractical.
D. Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded.
1
E. Expansion Couplings: Equal to O.Z. type EX with jumper.
F. Seal -Offs: With filler fiber, compound, removable cover.
2.5 METALLIC BOXES:
A. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears for device ring
1
mounting, knock -out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required, RACO or equal.
B. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings; cast steel
or aluminum with threaded hubs or bosses for use on walls.
C. Large Boxes: Boxes exceeding 4 -11/16 inches square when required shall be welded steel
construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as required by physical size, Hoffman,
Circle AW or equal.
D. Systems: Boxes for systems devices shall be as recommended by the systems manufacturer,
suitable for the equipment installed. Equip with grounding lugs, brackets, device rings, etc., as
required.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1 Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 0533
Page 3
September 3, 2008
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Conceal all conduits in finished spaces. Concealed conduits shall run in a direct line with long
sweep bends and offsets. GRC and IMC embedded in concrete below grade or in damp
locations shall be made watertight by painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal
1 primer or equal before assembly.
B. Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines and neatly offset into
1 boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces shall closely follow the surfaces. Conduit
fittings shall be used to "saddle" under beams. Drilling or notching of existing beams, trusses
on structural members shall be coordinated with Architect prior to commencing.
1 C. GRC and IMC terminations at boxes, cabinets, and general wiring enclosures shall be rigidly
secured with double locknuts and bushings or approved fittings. Conduit shall be screwed in
and shall engage at least five threads in hub where conduit boxes with threaded hubs or bosses
1 are used. Insulating bushings shall be used for conduits 1 -1/4 inches or larger.
D. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent
entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete, or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before
installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.
E. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane
1 caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block -outs
penetrating moisture barriers.
3.2 CONDUIT:
A. GRC may be used in all areas for wiring systems. GRC shall be installed for wiring
underground in cast concrete construction, in damp locations, and in hazardous areas for
serving fire pump controllers and where subject to mechanical injury with threaded fittings made
up tight. IMC may be used in locations not in contact with earth or fill.
B. EMT may be used in all other dry protected locations. Provide green equipment bonding
1 conductor where used for power circuit feeders 2 -inch and larger. EMT, whether exposed or
concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened at intervals of nominally every 8 feet and
within 24 inches of each outlet, ell, fitting, panel, etc.
1 C. Flex shall be used for connections to vibration producing equipment and where installation
flexibility is required with a minimum 12 inches slack connection. Limit flex length to 36 inches
for exposed equipment connections and 72 inches in concealed ceiling and wall cavities. PVC
1 jacketed flex shall be used in wet locations, areas subject to washdown, and exterior locations.
D. PVC Type II Schedule 40 may be used underground and in and under interior slabs, poured
concrete walls, and where scheduled or noted on the Drawings. Make connections with
1 waterproof solvent cement. Provide GRC at 60 degree and larger bends and where penetrating
slabs.
1 3.3 RACEWAYS:
A. Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters or other control
devices where required by a multitude of wiring interconnections or physical layout.
•
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 0533
Garden Room Addition Page 4
1 September 3, 2008
3.4 FITTINGS:
A. Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels, 1
etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity. All conduit joints shall be cut
square and reamed smooth with all fittings drawn up tight.
B. Crimp -on, tap -on, indenter type, malleable iron or cast set screw fittings shall not be used.
3.5 BOXES: 1
A. Boxes and outlets shall be mounted at nominal center line heights shown on the drawings.
Adjust heights in concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls to prevent devices or finish plates from
spanning masonry joints.
B. Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires, fittings, and devices.
Provide multi -gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with no more than one device
per gang. Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions.
C. Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets- used with conduit systems shall be 4 inches square, 1-
1/2 inches or more deep, with one or two -gang plaster ring mounted vertically. Where three or
more devices are at one location, use one piece multiple gang tile box or gang box with suitable
device ring.
D. Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted luminaire outlets shall be 4 -inch octagon 1 -1/2 inches
deep with 3/8 -inch fixture stud where required. Wall bracket outlets to have single gang
opening where required to accommodate fixture canopy. Provide larger boxes or extension
rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic capacity.
E. Junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling or wall cavities or exposed in utility areas shall be
a minimum of 4 inches square, 1 -1/2 inches deep with appropriately marked blank cover. 1
F. Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment installed. Coordinate size and
type with the system supplier.
G. Provide pull boxes where shown for installation of cable supports or where required to limit the
number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree bends. Use galvanized boxes
of code required size with removable covers installed so that covers will be accessible after
work is completed.
H. Recessed boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than 1/8 -inch back and be
level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or shims for mounting devices will not be
acceptable. No combustible material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets.
I. Covers for flush mounted boxes in finished spaces shall extend a minimum of 1/4 -inch beyond
the box edge to provide a finished appearance. Finish edge of cover to match cover face.
J. Boxes installed attached to a stud in sheet rock walls shall be equipped with opposite side box
supports equal to Caddy #760. Install drywall screw prior to finish taping. Methods used to
attach boxes to studs shall not cause projections on the face of the stud to prevent full length
contact of sheet rock to the stud face.
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
t Tigard Senior Center Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 0533
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
3.6 PULL WIRES:
A. Install nylon pull lines in all empty conduits larger than 1 inch where routing includes 25 feet or
•
more in length or includes 180 degrees or more in bends.
B. Where conduits requiring pull lines are stubbed out and capped, coil a minimum of 36 inches of
pull line and tape at termination of conduit for easy future access. Label pull lines as to conduit
1 starting or terminations point and intended future use.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
•
1
' Tigard Senior Center Identification: 26 0553
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
1 A. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the
function of each item of equipment connected under this work.
1 PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 LABELS:
A. Pre - printed: Permanent material pre - printed with black on white, with adhesive backing, Brady,
3M or equal.
B. Laminated Plastic: 3 -ply laminated plastic, black with white letters, for 208/120V equipment and
red with white letters for 480/277V equipment. Lamicoid or equal.
' C. Clear Plastic Tape: Black 12 point Helvetica medium characters machine imprinted on clear
tape, Merlin, Kroy or equal.
D. Plastic Tape: Black or red with white letters, adhesive backing, field printed with proper tool,
' Dymo -tape or equal.
E. Wire Markers: White with black numbers, adhesive backed tape on dispenser roll, Brady, 3M or
' equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:
A. Indicate panel number with laminated plastic labels. Indicate voltage phase and feeder source,
feeder wire size, and feeder breaker or fuse size with plastic tape labels on the inside of the
1
panel door.
B. Provide typewritten panel directories, with protective, clear transparent covers, accurately
' accounting for every breaker installed including spares. Schedules shall use the actual room
designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work and not the space
designation on the Construction Drawings.
3.2 EQUIPMENT:
A. Label all disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, and time switches indicating
equipment served with plastic tape labels.
B. Where the controlling device is remote mounted from the serving panel, include the serving
' panel designation and circuit number with additional plastic tape labels.
3.3 DEVICES:
A. Label each receptacle plate with preprinted clear plastic press on labels with 3/16" minimum
black letters indicating serving panel and circuit number. Clean all oils, dirt and any foreign
materials from plate prior to label application.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Identification: 26 0553
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Receptacles connected to a GFCI protected circuit downstream from the protecting device shall
be so labeled.
3.4 RACEWAYS AND BOXES:
A. Label all pull boxes and junction boxes for systems with paint or marker pen on box cover
identifying system. Where box covers are exposed in finished areas, label inside of cover.
Covers shall be color labeled as follows: 208Y/120V wiring - black; fire alarm - red;
communications - green; security - blue.
B. Label each end of pull wires left in empty conduits with tags or tape indicating location of other
end of wire.
3.5 SYSTEMS:
A. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each conductor identified
throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use the number or letters shown where the
Drawings or operation and maintenance data indicate wiring identification.
B. Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls, indicators, etc., with 1
machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the equipment installed as supplied or
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Secondary Distribution System: 26 2000
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Tie new panelboards into existing secondary power distribution system as specified herein and
shown on drawings. Secondary distribution system shall be fully rated. Series rating shall not be
acceptable.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
1 C. Operation and maintenance data.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1 A. Match existing manufacturer: Eaton Corporation (Westinghouse).
2.2 BRANCH PANELBOARDS:
' A. Branch Circuit Panels: Bolt -in circuit breaker type with aluminum or copper bussing. Panels
shall be fitted with flush lift latches and locks keyed alike, same as existing. Deliver all panel
keys to the Owner at completion of the project.
' B. Main Circuit Breakers: Equip panels indicated with main circuit breakers sized as scheduled
and mounted behind door at top of panel. Back feeding of branch circuit breakers is not
' acceptable.
C. Branch Circuit Breakers: Molded case, thermal magnetic type. Breakers shall have short circuit
capacity rating to withstand the maximum short circuit duty which can be expected at the
breaker location in the electrical system. Breakers mounted in branch panelboards shall be of
the bolt -in type. Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed for that purpose and
marked "SWD ". Minimum short circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and
208V breakers.
D. Wiring Gutters: A minimum of 4 inches wide except where feeder conductors enter where a
minimum of 6 inches clear shall be provided. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug
' terminals wherever practicable. Provide separate feeder studs for each feeder conductor
compression lug.
E. Cabinets: Flush doors with concealed hinges and mounting clamps equal to Square D Mono
1 Flat, or ITE Decor trim. Surface panels shall have metal face trims with no sharp edges or
corners. Finish surface panel tubs to match face trim.
' F. Ground Bus: Provide a grounding bus with termination capacity for the grounding conductor
sized for the branch circuit equipment grounding conductors in isolated ground 208Y/120V
panels identified by suffix IG. Grounding bus shall be bonded to the panel cabinet.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Secondary Distribution System: 26 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the secondary distribution system assemblies and equipment as specified, parallel and
square with the building lines.
B. Neatly lace and secure the conductors of the feeder circuits individually at maximum 2 foot
intervals. The cable lugs shall not support the weight of the cables. 1
3.2 BRANCH PANELBOARDS:
A. Install panelboards plumb and level, 6' -0" to top unless noted otherwise. 1
B. Equip selected breakers with mechanical locking devices such that they may be locked in the
"on" position. Selected breakers shall include those serving alarm systems, fire suppression
systems, communications systems and other critical Toads directed.
C. Install a spare 3/4 -inch conduit from flush panels for each three single pole breakers or spaces
provided. Terminate conduits above accessible ceiling or as directed.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Wiring Devices and Plates: 26 2726
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide wiring devices and plates or blank plates only for all outlet boxes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
1 A. Product data.
t PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Wiring Devices and Plates: Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour.
2.2 MATERIALS:
1 A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as specified and required.
Furnish a matching cap for all special purpose devices that do not have the common 120 volt
NEMA 5 -20R configuration.
B. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall have similar appearance
characteristics unless noted otherwise.
2.3 WALL SWITCHES:
A. Line Voltage Switches: 20 ampere, 277 volt, quiet type, back and side wired. Verify finish color
with architect. Hubbell CS -1221 series.
B. Switch with pilot, lighted clear toggle, Hubbell HBL- 1221 -PL.
1 C. Momentary Contact Switches: 15A, SPDT, center off. Verify finish color with architect. Hubbell
HBL -1556.
' 2.4 RECEPTACLES:
A. Normal Power Duplex: 3 -wire, 2 -pole grounding, steel backstrap, NEMA 5 -20R, back and side
wired. Verify finish color with architect.
1. General Application: Hubbell CR -5362 series.
' B. Ground Fault Interrupting Duplex: NEMA 5 -20R. Verify finish color with architect. UL 943, Class
A. Hubbell GFR -5352A series.
' C. Special Purpose Receptacles: As noted on Drawings with NEMA configurations.
2.5 PLATES:
' A. Flush Finish Plates: .040" thick, type 302 stainless steel, brush finish.
B. Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2" raised industrial type with openings
appropriate for device installed.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Wiring Devices and Plates: 26 2726
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
C. Weatherproof: Standard duplex GFI receptacle. Hubbell WP26MH cover mounted horizontally
with hinges up. Special purpose receptacles. Hubbell WP723D.
D. Identification: Identify receptacle plates with press on labels indicating serving panel and branch
circuit number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: 1
A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. Wall mounted receptacles
shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted
on the drawings or shown /specified in the architectural drawings, details, and elevations the
centerline of all receptacles shall be 18 inches above finished floor and the centerline of all light
switches shall be 48 inches above finished floor per ADA. For all above counter devices, verify
exact mounting heights with architectural drawings, details, and elevations.
B. Finish plates and devices are not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or
splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted.
C. Provide weatherproof device covers on devices at all exterior locations and damp or wet label
areas. 1
3.2 CORD CAPS:
A. All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in their cartons with a
letter stating the date and the Owner's representative that received the materials.
3.3 COORDINATION:
A. Refer to Architectural elevations, sections and details for exact locations.
B. Coordinate with equipment installer the locations and methods of connection to devices
1
mounted in cabinets, counters, work benches, service pedestals and similar equipment.
3.4 TESTING:
A. Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults.
Correct any defective wiring.
B. Test all GFI receptacles and replace defective units.
END OF SECTION
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Disconnect Switches: 26 2816
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
1 A. Provide switches of proper characteristics as disconnecting means.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
1 A. Shop Drawings: Indicate field dimensions, description of materials and finishes, component
connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures.
B. Product Data.
C. Operating and Maintenance Data.
1.3 WORK IN RELATED SECTIONS
' A. 26 0553 Identification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer or Approved.
2.2 DISCONNECTS:
A. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick -make, quick- break,
' dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served.
Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock and indicating handle that will
accept a minimum of three padlocks.
B. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for indoor use, unless specifically noted otherwise and NEMA 3R
where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript "WP ".
' C. Disconnects shall be fusible or non - fusible as designated on Drawings.
D. Rejection Fuse Clips: Provide for fusible switches (30 to 600A) to prevent the installation of
Class H and Class K non - current - limiting fuses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Provide all code required disconnect switches under this work, whether specifically shown or
not.
1 B. Provide one manufacturer for all disconnect switches on the project.
' C. Disconnect switches shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be
square with the building structural lines.
D. Install fuses in all fused switches.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Disconnect Switches: 26 2816
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
E. Provide identification as specified in Section 26 05 53.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc. 1
1
1
1 Tigard Senior Center Lighting: 26 5100
Garden Room Addition Page 1
I September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide all lighting outlets as specified with a luminaire of the type designated and appropriate
I
for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a
luminaire the same as those used in similar or like locations.
I B. Where a luminaire type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by the
Contractor, request a clarification from the Engineer and provide a suitable luminaire type as
directed.
I C. Coordinate installation of luminaires with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a
total system that is neat and orderly in appearance.
D. Install all remote ballasts in enclosures as required by luminaire specified. Remote mounted
1 ballasts shall be located within the distance limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: '
I A. The provisions of Section 26 0500 — Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to work
specified in this section.
I B. Section 26 2726, Wiring Devices
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
I A. The lighting design for this project was based on luminaire types and manufacturers as
specified.
B. Other "Or Equal" Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution Request, complying with
I requirements of Section 01 Product Options and Substitutions.
C. Equality shall be determined by the following luminaire characteristics.
Lack of data on any characteristic shall constitute justification for rejection of the submittal.
I
1. Performance
I a. Distribution.
b. Utilization.
c. Average brightness /maximum brightness.
d. Spacing to mounting height ratio.
1 e. Visual comfort probability.
2. Construction
I a.
b. Engineering.
Workmanship.
c. Rigidity
I d. Permanence of materials and finishes.
I LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Lighting: 26 5100
1
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
3. Installation Ease
a. Captive parts and captive hardware.
b. Provision for leveling.
c. Through- wiring ease.
4. Maintenance
a. Relamping ease.
b. Replacement of ballast and lamp sockets.
5. Appearance
a. Light tightness.
b. Neat, trim styling.
c. Conformance with design intent
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 26 0500:
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product Data.
3. Photometric Reports consist of a minimum of:
a. Candlepower Distribution Curves.
b. Coefficient of Utilization Table.
c. Zonal Lumen Summary.
4. Certification of lamp ballast compatibility.
5. Operation and Maintenance Data.
6. Operational Sample upon request.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Recessed luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they
are installed without leaks or gaps. Where necessary, install heat resistant non - rubber gaskets
to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between luminaires trim and the surface to
which they are mounted.
B. Recessed luminaires installed in fire rated ceilings and using a fire rated protective cover shall
be thermally protected for this application and shall carry a fire rated listing.
C. Luminaires installed under canopies, roofs or open areas and similar damp or wet locations
shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations.
D. Aligners: Ball type with nominally 45 degree movement either side of center. Provide white 1
stem aligner canopies where installed in finished areas.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Lighting: 26 5100
Garden Room Addition Page 3
' September 3, 2008
2.2 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES:
' A. Doors 12" X 48" and larger: Flat metal equipped with mitered corners, rotary cam or spring
assisted latches to hinge from either side.
' B. Diffusers 12" X 48" and larger: Extruded of clear acrylic plastic, 0.125" minimum overall
thickness, 0.045 minimum unpenetrated thickness, pattern 12 with flat sided prisms unless
otherwise specified in the luminaire schedule by catalog number or remarks. Concave prisms
will not be acceptable.
' C. Finish: Baked white dry polyester powder, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average
reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be
prepared for finishing with a 5 -step zinc phosphating process.
1 D. Ship all parabolic luminaires with a protective plastic wrap around parabolic louver to prevent
dust buildup during construction.
' E. Ballasts shall operate a maximum of two lamps in each luminaire. Three and four lamp ballasts
shall not be provided.
' 2.3 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES:
A. Ballasts: High power factor, suitable for lamp type(s) specified and switching controls indicated
on drawings.
' B. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the
luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
' C. Recessed: Equip with through wire junction box. Box, ballast and replaceable components
shall be accessible from the ceiling opening.
D. Reflector Cones: Of uniform gauge aluminum, free of spinning marks or other defects and
' have an integral trim flange. Color as specified in Luminaire Schedule and of the Alzak®
process. All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones to be supplied by the same manufacturer
unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule. Reflector cones shall be the low irridescent
' type.
E. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All
concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black.
1 2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRES:
A. Ballasts: Pulse start, high power factor, constant wattage auto - transformer type, suitable for
' lamp type specified.
B. Luminaire dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as
recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
1 C. Reflector Cones: Of uniform gauge aluminum, free of spinning marks or other defects and
have an integral trim flange. Color as specified in Luminaire Schedule and of the Alzak®
process. All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones to be supplied by the same manufacturer
1
unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Lighting: 26 5100
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2.5 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:
A. Electronic: Electronic program start ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL 935 and shall
bear the appropriate UL label and have the same physical dimensions and mounting
arrangement as those of their core and coil counterparts. Tandem wiring between luminaires
may be used to minimize the number of ballasts while accomplishing the switching
requirements shown on the drawings. Advance Mark V and Mark VII, or equal. Ballasts shall
have the following electrical characteristics.
1. Withstand input power line transients as defined in ANSI C62.41. The ballasts shall
tolerate a line voltage variation of 10 %. The power factor shall be 90% or higher. The
lamp crest factor shall measure 1.7 or less. The average Ballast Factor (BF) shall be a
minimum of 92.5% under ANSI C82.2 conditions unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2. Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast shall not exceed
10% of the input current and comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 conceming
the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency
interference).
3. The electronic ballasts shall be Class "A" sound rated and UL Class "P" thermally
protected. The ballast shall be provided with an internal fuse to protect the electrical
power supply from internal component failure. The ballast shall also be short- circuit
protected in the event of miswiring.
4. Ballasts shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for five years.
The warranty shall include either a $10 replacement labor allowance or complete
replacement including labor by an agent of the manufacturer.
B. Ballasts used in enclosed and gasketed luminaires listed for use in wet locations shall be of
Type I construction.
C. Ballasts shall be rated for the expected ambient temperature in which they are installed. All
exterior installed ballasts shall be rated to start the lamps at 00 F.
D. Systems using tandem wired luminaires shall be labeled accordingly. Label shall be in the
lamp compartment of each luminaire and identify the function of that luminaire. '
2.6 LAMPS:
A. Lamp each luminaire with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific luminaire type and as
indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, Osram /Sylvania, Venture or approved
equal. All fluorescent lamps shall be of the same manufacturer.
B. Fluorescent lamps: T -5 and T -8 lamps shall be 48" 32 watt, inside tri- phosphor coated, 3500
Degress Kelvin color temperature or as required by luminaire specified in the luminaire
schedule. Provide low mercury content and extra life lamps, 30,000 average hours. General
Electric or equal.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Of wattage and configuration indicated in Luminaire Schedule,
Tri- Phosphor, 3500 °K color temperature. Lamps shall be single ended dual pin plug -in base,
except those used with dimming ballasts, which shall utilize the 4 -pin configuration.
D. Metal halide lamps: Of wattage, base style, color and type indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
Provide pulse start lamps.
LRS Architects, Inc. '
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Lighting: 26 5100
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
2.7 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LAMP POWER SUPPLY:
A. Manufacturers: Bodine, Iota, Lithonia
' B. Description: Self- contained battery- operated power supply for operating one T8 or compact
fluorescent lamp for a minimum output of 90 minutes. Full lumen output.
C. Provide access hatches, for emergency battery backup ballasts, adjacent to recessed 6 -inch or
less diameter downlights installed in inaccessible ceilings. Full lumen output.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable accessories and mounting frames
' where required for recessed luminaires. Luminaire catalog numbers do not necessarily denote
specific mounting accessories for type of ceiling in which a luminaire may be installed.
B. The Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans shall take preference as to the exact placement of the
1
luminaires in the ceiling.
C. Leave luminaires clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If
' luminaires are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the work, the Contractor shall
clean them at no additional cost.
D. Level luminaires, align in straight lines, and locate as shown on the architectural elevations and
' reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment, will be given
by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported by separate means from the building structure
and not from the ceiling system, ductwork, piping or other systems.
' E. Aim luminaires to provide the lighting pattern for which the luminaire is designed and as
directed by Engineer.
F. Manufacturer's labels or monograms shall not be visible after luminaire is installed, but must be
1 included for future reference.
3.2 WIRING:
' A. Recessed luminaires served from a junction box above the ceiling may be connected with 3/8"
flex, 2 No. 18. Provide 3 No. 18 wires where dual circuiting is called for. Provide ground
continuity.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center
Garden Room Addition Exterior Lighting: 26 5600
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
1 A. Provide all lighting units as specified with a luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for
the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a luminaire
the same as those used in similar or like locations.
1 B. Where a luminaire type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by the
Contractor, request a clarification from the Engineer and provide a suitable luminaire type as
' directed.
C. Coordinate installation of luminaires with all other trades to provide a total system that is neat
and orderly in appearance.
1 D. Install all remote ballasts in enclosures as required by luminaire specified. Remote mounted
ballasts shall be located within the distance limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. The provisions of Section 26 0500 — Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to work
specified in this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. The lighting design for this project was based on luminaire types and manufacturers as
specified.
' B. Other "Or Equal" Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution Request, complying with
requirements of Section 01 Product Options and Substitutions.
C. Equality shall be determined by the following luminaire characteristics.
Lack of data on any characteristic shall constitute justification for rejection of the submittal.
1. Performance:
' a. Distribution.
b. Utilization.
c. Average brightness /maximum brightness.
1
d. Spacing to mounting height ratio.
2. Construction
a. Engineering.
b. • Workmanship.
c. Rigidity.
1
d. Permanence of materials and finishes.
3. Installation Ease
a. Captive parts and captive hardware.
b. Provision for leveling.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Lighting: 26 5600
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
4. Maintenance
a. Relamping ease.
b. Replacement of ballast and lamp sockets.
5. Appearance
a. Light tightness.
b. Neat, trim styling.
c. Conformance with design intent
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 26 0500:
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product Data.
3. Photometry Reports consist of a minimum of: Candlepower Distribution Curves.
4. Certification of lamp ballast compatibility as well as lamp and lamp socket compatibility.
5. Operation and Maintenance Data.
6. Operational Sample upon request.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed
without leaks or gaps. Where necessary, install heat resistant non - rubber gaskets to prevent
Tight leaks or moisture from entering between luminaires trim and the surface to which they are
mounted.
B. Luminaires installed under canopies, roofs or open areas and similar damp or wet locations
shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations.
2.2 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES:
A. Ballasts: High power factor, suitable for Tamp type(s) specified and switching controls indicated
on drawings.
B. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the
luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
1
C. Recessed: Equip with through wire junction box. Box, ballast and replaceable components
shall be accessible from the ceiling opening.
D. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All
concealed luminaire surfaces to be matte black.
2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRES:
A. Ballasts: Pulse start, CBM labeled, high power factor, constant wattage auto - transformer type,
suitable for lamp type specified.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Exterior Lighting: 26 5600
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2006
' B. Luminaire dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended
by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
2.4 LAMPS:
A. Lamp each luminaire with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific luminaire type and as
indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, Osram /Sylvania, Venture or approved
1 equal.
B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Of wattage and configuration indicated in Luminaire Schedule,
1 Tri- Phosphor 3500 °K. Lamps shall be single ended dual pin plug -in base, except those used
with dimming ballasts, which shall utilize the 4 -pin configuration.
D. Metal halide lamps: Pulse start lamps of wattage, base style, color and type indicated in
' Luminaire Schedule.
2.5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS:
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cast -in -place concrete foundations with constructed forms
for square foundations or round foundations with spirally wrapped treated paper forms. Provide
concrete, anchor bolts, and reinforcing steel as indicated on the drawings.
' B. Poles shall be of material and form as indicated in the luminaire schedule. Poles shall be able to
withstand winds of not less than 100 MPH and a gust factor of 1.30 with an ice load criteria up
' to .5 inch thick without damage to the pole and attached luminaire.
C. All poles shall have a handhole with removable handhole coverplate which matches the material
and finish of the pole. Handhole shall be located approximately 12 inches up from the pole
1 base.
D. All poles shall have an internal ground lug easily accessible from the handhole.
' E. Anchor Bolts shall be provided by the pole manufacturer and shall be of size and length and
quantity as recommended by the pole manufacturer. Anchor bolts shall be fabricated from hot
rolled carbon steel bar and shall have an "L" bend on one end and shall be galvanized a
' minimum of 12 inches on the threaded end. Manufacturer shall provide bolt circle and bolt
projection dimensions with shop drawings.
F. Poles shall have a base plate welded to the pole utilizing a back -up -ring and full - penetration
welded connection.
G. Provide a one piece base cover to completely cover all foundation hardware. Base Cover shall
' be of the same material and .finish as the pole.
H. All external surfaces of the pole, base cover, support arms, and luminaires shall be finished in
the same material and color. The pole shall be chemically cleaned, rinsed, phosphatized, sealed
' and dried. An electrostatic application of polyester -power paint shall be applied to all external
surfaces. The complete unit shall be oven -baked to form a homogeneous, non - porous surface.
The completed finish shall not have any sags, drips, oxidation or runs.
1
1 LRS Architects, Inc.
•
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Exterior Lighting: 26 5600
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
I. Aluminum Poles: Poles shall be seamless extruded aluminum shaft fully welded to a cast
aluminum anchor base assembly. Shaft shall be [round] [square], straight [tapered] and shall
meet all requirements of AASHTO Standard Specifications. Pole shall be height as indicated in
the Luminaire Schedule.
J. Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for wet location installation.
1
K. The luminaires shall have a NEMA distribution pattern as indicated in the luminaire schedule.
L. All poles shall be wrapped in a protective material for shipment to the job site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. The locations of exterior lighting poles shall be staked out for review and acceptance by the
Engineer prior to foundation or conduit rough -in.
B. Leave luminaires clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If •
luminaires are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the work, the Contractor shall
clean them at no additional cost.
C. Level and align luminaires, and locate as shown on the drawings. The final decision as to
adequacy of support and alignment, will be given by the Architect. .
D. Aim luminaires to provide the lighting pattern for which the luminaire is designed and as directed
1 by Engineer.
E. Manufacturer's labels or monograms shall not be visible after luminaire is installed, but must be
included for future reference. 1
F. Provide cast -in -place foundations for pole mounted luminaires. Concrete shall be as specified
in Division 03. Foundation form shall be as specified. Place anchor bolts in foundation as
recommended by manufacturer in the required bolt circle size. Tie reinforcing steel in
foundation to the anchor bolts to form a solid cage. Tamp wet concrete as pouring to assure
complete coverage below, around and within the cage and form. Hand finish top of foundation
to produce a smooth, level surface.
1
G. Provide a minimum 10' copper -clad steel ground rod at each pole base. Connect from ground
rod to the ground lug in the pole with minimum AWG No. 8 copper conductor.
H. Pole mounted luminaires shall be installed plumb with luminaires level and with reflector
distribution in the direction as indicated on the drawings. Grout around the pole base at the
foundation to close all openings. Install pole base cover over all exposed installation hardware.
•
3.2 WIRING:
A. Wiring within pole mounted units shall be field installed and shall be the same size and type as
the circuit supply conductors, unless a fuse is specified or shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Communications 27 0500
1
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Furnish and install complete raceway system and backboards for telephone /data equipment and
devices as noted on the Drawings.
' B. Coordinate incoming service with telephone utility and comply with all telephone utility
requirements.
' C. Comply with TIA/EIA Standards 568 -B, 569 and 607, latest edition.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ANSI TIA/EIA- 568 -B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
B. ANSI/TIA/EIA -569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
' C. ANSI/TIA/EIA -606, The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings.
D. ANSI/TIA/EIA -607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
' Telecommunications.
E. BICSI, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, latest edition.
1.3 SUBMITTAL:
1
A. Product Data.
' B. Shop Drawings.
C. Test Reports.
' 1. Copper cables: Provide electronic (CD) and hard copy test reports from. an
ANSI/TIA/EIA -568 -B Cat5e cable system testing device for all backbone and horizontal
twisted pair cable runs. Test backbone cables for Cat3 or Cat5e performance, as appropriate.
Test all Cat5e cables for NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT at each end of the cable,
wire map, length, attenuation, attenuation to crosstalk ratio, impedance, structural return Toss,
DC loop resistance, noise and propagation delay skew. Submit test data in virgin format, as
output by the testing device. Test reports that have been modified in any way, as with a word
processor, will not be acceptable. Repair, replace and reterminate all cables that do not meet
' the specified requirements. Retest and repair cable systems as necessary until the entire
cable system meets all specified requirements.
D. Installation and record drawings.
' 1.4 WARRANTY:
A. Upon completion of the installation, provide a manufacturer's extended product warranty
with a minimum 15 -year assurance of compliant performance with any current or future
' application based on ANSI/TIA/EIA -568 -B for the backbone and horizontal cable system
infrastructure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER:
•
LRS Architects, Inc
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Communications 27 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
A. Manufacturers shall have a recognized certified installer program in place for the system
components proposed. Cable approved with the system installed. Provide products with UL
listing.
2.2 COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS:
A. Wall Outlet Boxes: 4 -inch square, 2 5/8 -inch deep, minimum, with single -gang mud ring unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings.
B. Conduits: 1 -inch minimum size with larger sizes indicated on the Drawings. Provide PVC
Schedule 40 with steel sweep ells for direct - buried conduit runs.
D. Backboards: 3/4 -inch 8 -foot high, fire rated fir plywood, width as shown on the Drawing.
1
E. Grounding busbar: 2 -inch by 10 -inch by 1/4 -inch solid copper. Wall mount with insulated standoffs
per TIA/EIA -607.
1
F. Provide system components that are necessary to construct a complete and operable system that
meets the Specifications.
G. Jacks: ANSI /EIAlTIA- 568 -B, T568B, Cat5e, unshielded.
H. Faceplate: Coordinate color and finish with Architect.
1
I. Cable:
1. Horizontal: 100 ohm, Cat5e, 24AWG, 4 -pair unshielded twisted pair, one, two or
four cables to each outlet, as noted on Drawings.
2. Twisted Pair Backbone: 100 ohm, Category-3, 24AWG, multiple -pair cable with
an overall shield, ARMM or GFMW, as required.
3. Fiber Backbone: 24- strand enhanced grade 62.5/125- micron premises
distribution cable with maximum attenuation of 3.0 dB /km at 850 nm and 1.0
dB /km at 1300 nm. Minimum bandwidth is 200MHZ -km at 850 nm and
500MHZ -km at 1300 nm.
J. Termination Blocks: Cat5e, 110- style, with mounting legs and wire management troughs, wall -
mount.
K. Equipment Rack: Homaco, Chatsworth or approved, 19- by 84 -inch double- sided, freestanding
equipment rack with EIA standard mounting holes.
L. Patch Panels:
1. Twisted Pair: Provide fully loaded multi -port patch panel with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-
B, T568B Cat5e unshielded jacks.
M. Wire Management:
1. Termination Blocks: Provide a minimum of one wiring trough between each
300 -pair set of 110 -style termination blocks. Provide at least one wire manager
block at the top and at least one at the bottom of each column of termination
blocks. Square off empty column spaces with wiring troughs to provide a
continuous wire management path across the width of thetermination field.
2. Panels: Provide a minimum of one double row wire management panel between
each patch panel and equipment item that uses patch cords. Provide at least one
single row wire management panel at the top and at the bottom of•each column of
patch panels and equipment. For enclosed cabinets or wall- mounted racks, wire
management panels shall have vertical management as an integral part of the
LRS Architects, Inc
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Communications 27 0500
' Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' panel. Back management must be provided where not integral to the connector
patch panels.
3. Equipment Racks: Provide a minimum of one 6 -inch wide vertical wire manager
between adjacent equipment racks and at each end of each row of adjacent
racks.
N. Patch (Jumper) Cords:
1. Twisted Pair: Provide unshielded Cat5e patch cords for all telecom outlets.
Provide cable lengths for a neat and organized equipment rack at the TR and 10
feet at each terminal. Provide at least one voice or data patch cord, as
appropriate, in the TR and at least one workstation connection cord for each user
' workstation location.
O. Cross - Connect Wire: Category-3, 24AWG twisted pair.
P. Miscellaneous: Provide supporting hardware, cable ties, labels, racking and the like. Provide
cable supports rated for Cat5e cable.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:
A. The installers of the cable system must be Certified Installers, individually registered and trained by
the manufacturer for the products submitted to meet the Specifications.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Conduit bends shall be large radius field bends or factory ells. Cast type fittings or sharp bends
' shall not be installed unless specifically approved by the systems installer. No section of conduit
shall be longer than 100 feet or contain more than 180 degrees of bend between pull points or pull
boxes.
•
' B. Where conduits are shown stubbed into a terminal area, stub 6 inches above•floor or 12 inches
down from ceiling at the appropriate terminal board location, terminating in insulating bushings.
C. Provide a pull wire in all conduits longer than 15 feet or with more than 90 degrees of bend.
' D. Protect all existing telephone /data equipment and devices that will remain in service during
construction from mechanical injury and dust entry.
E. Paint front and ends of all terminal boards with two coats of enamel to match interior color specified
by the Architect.
F. Coordinate with system supplier for phasing and work scheduling.
G. The inside radius of a bend in conduit shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter. When the
' conduit size is greater than 2 inches, the inside radius shall be at least 10 times the internal
diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside radius of a bend shall always be at least
10 times the internal diameter of the conduit.
H. Provide all low voltage conduit stub -outs with insulated bushings.
I. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, provide #6CU ground minimum per telephone utility
' requirements.
LRS Architects, Inc
1
Tigard Senior Center Common Work Results for Communications 27 0500
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
J. Twisted Pair Backbone Cabling:
1. Install Category-3 24AWG multiple twisted pair backbone cable with overall shield
for close - coupled grounding and bonding per ANSI /EIA/TIA -607; ARMM indoor,
GFMW outdoors.
2. Terminate twisted pair backbone cabling on 110 -style IDC connectors at both
ends. Terminate and support all cables in compliance with the
ANSI/TIA/EIA -568 -B and ANSI /EIA/TIA -569 standards. Label all cables in
accordance with ANSI /EIA/TIA -606.
K. Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling:
1. Install horizontal cabling consisting of one, two or four 4 -pair 24AWG Cat5e 1
unshielded twisted pair cables for each user outlet.
2. Terminate all cables onto ANSI/TIA/EIA -568 -B T568B unshielded 8 pin modular
jacks at each end. The modular jacks will mount in multi -port patch panels at the
TR and in 4 -port single gang faceplates or an approved substitute at each user
location.
L. Supporting Hardware, Labeling and Identification:
1. Install patch panels and wire managers in 19 -inch racks in the TR. Coordinate
placement of equipment with Owner.
2. Bond all cabling, equipment racks, cable trays and other hardware to the ground
bus in the TR per ANSI /EIA/TIA -607.
3. Provide proper bracing and wire management from the backboard to any
freestanding equipment racks, per the Oregon UBC.
4. Support, identify and label all cabling per ANSI /EIA/TIA -569 and
ANSI /EIA/TIA -606 Specifications. Provide independent support from building
structure for all components.
5. Seal all conduits entering from outside the building and install listed firestop
material in all conduits and sleeves as required to satisfy NEC and local codes.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc 1
1
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Fire Detection and Alarm: 28 3100
' Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
' PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
' A. Extend new and relocated fire alarm devices to existing Edwards Model No. 5751 B Fire
Alarm Control Panel and Bosch / Detection System Model No. DS9471 alarm monitoring
communicator. Reuse existing fire alarm devices as noted on contract drawings.
System: Provide all design, equipment, installation, and testing for the existing system
1 expansion herein described.
1.2 LISTING REQUIREMENTS
' A. Component Listing: All fire detection and alarm components furnished under this section
shall be UL listed in the Fire Equipment List for FM approved for fire signaling or fire
suppression use. All accessory equipment shall be manufactured with UL listed
' components.
1.3 DOCUMENTATION
' A. Record drawings: Fire alarm shop drawings shall be revised to reflect the accurate as-
built condition. Working plans shall show actual and accurate locations and circuit
addresses of devices, actual locations of j -boxes and splices, actual routing and fill of
' conduit or plenum cabling, and actual location of end -of -line devices.
B. System operation, installation, maintenance, and programming manuals shall be
provided.
1 C. Shop drawings shall be prepared using AUTOCAD Release 2000 or later version and
submitted to the Fire Marshal for approval. The shop drawings will show actual conduit
' routing, conductors as to be installed, and circuit numbers for each device.
D. Product data with wiring schematics.
' E. Back -up battery calculations to support operation of system.
1.4 OWNER NOTIFICATION
A. Contractors shall give owner adequate notification for all fire alarm testing (including fire
marshal acceptance testing), programming, and shutdowns.
' B. Technical questions regarding the design, layout, operation, and,code requirements for the
fire alarm system shall be directed to the current managing fire alarm consultant Metro
Safety & Fire, Inc. Phone #503.231.2999.
C. Prior to connecting any circuits to the active existing fire alarm system, all circuits shall be
complete with all specified devices installed and shall be verified free from all open
' circuits, short circuits, and ground faults. Connection of said circuits shall be coordinated
with City of Tigard and fire alarm consultant Metro Safety & Fire, Inc. technical
representative.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Fire Detection and Alarm: 28 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Equipment shall be approved in accordance with NFPA and IBC requirements and shall
be UL listed both in individual components and as a system.
B. The system supplier shall furnish evidence that there is an experienced and efficient
service organization that carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished and
that the organization is capable of providing repair service within 24 hours of a trouble call.
C. The system shall be installed by an electrical contractor experienced in the installation of
fire alarm systems and voice communication systems. The services of a technician
provided by the control equipment manufacturer shall be provided to supervise installation,
adjustment and tests and final connection of the system. All alarm and trouble conditions
shall annunciate at the 80- character LCD display at the control panel.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INITIATING DEVICES
A. All area smoke detectors shall match existing manufacturer brand and type.
1
2.2 ALARM INDICATING APPLIANCES (chimes /homs /bells /strobes)
A. All alarm indicating appliances shall match existing manufacturer brand and type or
otherwise listed and specified to operate with match existing manufacturer brand and
type equipment.
B. All visual indicating devices shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for
flash rate and synchronization.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING, CIRCUIT ROUTING, AND DEVICE LAYOUT
A. Circuit routing shall follow the logical layout of the planned riser diagram for that building.
B. Addressable device circuits, horn /strobe circuits, and door holder circuits shall be run
horizontally from a common point on the building fire alarm system riser and shall not
ascend or descend to another floor at any point except at the designated fire alarm riser.
1. Audible circuits and strobe circuits shall be installed on separate circuits following
the same path and having the end -of -line resistors terminating at the same
device. This device shall be labeled EOL.
2. All cabling shall be in accordance to the specified cable found in the wiring
schedule of the match existing manufacturer shop drawings.
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Fire Detection and Alarm: 28 3100
' Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' 3. Device layout shall be in compliance with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and local
authority having jurisdiction.
4. The manner of workmanship shall be clean and professional (NEC 70 Article
800-6, ANSI /EIA/TIA 569 -1990, and ANSI /EIA/TIA 569- 1991). All panels shall be
1 neatly dressed and all cabling secured in place with cable ties.
3.2 LABELING
A. All cables shall be clearly labeled with circuit type and identifier at the termination of the
wire within the fire panel, in the termination enclosure listed above, and at any other
' junction box used to break out the wiring.
3.3 REMODELS AND RETROFITS
' A. On remodels and retrofits, the owner reserves the right to conduct a pre - demolition walk -
through with the contractor to pre -mark, tag, and secure all sensitive cables, boxes and
devices.
B. All fire alarm equipment removed during demolition shall be stored and protected for
reuse in construction phase.
C. Any fire alarm devices found on equipment to be abandoned (i.e. duct detectors on
abandoned ducts, refrigerator /freezers being monitored by fire system, suppression
panels, etc.) shall be reported to the City of Tigard and Metro Safety & Fire, Inc. technical
representative.
' 3.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. The contractor shall submit shop drawings to local Fire Marshal's office for approval
before installation is started. The Contractor shall also provide the Owner with complete
wiring diagrams, instructions, and maintenance manuals upon acceptance of the
installation.
3.5 FIRE ALARM TESTING:
' A. Prior to the acceptance test of the project by the Owner, a factory- trained technician on
the equipment installed shall inspect, test and adjust the complete fire alarm system
according to NFPA -72, and shall also include the following: Provide a reduced copy of
the floor plans (minimum size 11 "x17 ") showing all of the devices, all zones, wiring, and
with detector location identification numbers, firing voltages and serial numbers.
1. Test for proper operation of system horn /speaker /strobes.
B. At completion of visual inspection and installation testing, perform a complete system test
as outlined in NFPA 72. Complete NFPA 72 Figure 2 -2.2 Certificate of Compliance Form
' for Fire Alarm Certification and Description (4 pages). Submit three copies of the
completed forms to the Architect prior to application for final payment. Include one copy
of completed forms in each Operations and Maintenance manual submitted.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Fire Detection and Alarm: 28 3100
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
C. The contractor shall perform these tests in the presence of the Owner or the Owner's
representative. The Contractor shall repair or replace at his expense any defective
devices, equipment or wiring and shall again perform the required testing as determined
by the Owner to assure that the system is in compliance with the drawings and
specifications.
D. The cost of any retesting as a result of the failure of the system to operate in accordance
with these specifications and /or non -compliance with the drawings or applicable codes
shall be paid by the Contractor to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Site Clearing: 31 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, plants, and grass to remain.
2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, plants, and grass.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
' 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements.
6. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
1 B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1 A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2
inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil
materials.
B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
' A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,
adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by site clearing.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
Ti Tigard Senior Center 1
9 Site Clearing: 31 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
B. Record drawings identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface
structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site - clearing operations. 1
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on
property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.
C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's 1
premises where indicated.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site
clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during 1
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Site Clearing: 31 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
D. The boundaries of the clearing limits shown on this plan shall be clearly flagged in the field prior
to construction. During the construction period, no disturbance beyond the flagged clearing
1 area shall be permitted. The flagging shall be maintained by the contractor for the duration of
the construction.
' 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
1 according to the City of Tigard and Erosion Control Plans.
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
' until permanent vegetation has been established.
1. Erosion Control Inspection: Contractor will inspect all erosion and sediment control
facilities, document all inspections in a log and maintain an active Erosion and Sediment
Control Plan in accordance with the NPDES General Permit and Governing Agency. The
' erosion and sediment control facilities will be inspected daily when runoff is occurring. If
sediment or turbidity is detected in amounts greater that what is allowed by Governing
• Agency, Contractor will submit an Action Plan to the Governing Agency within ten days
as required.
2. The ESC facilities shall be inspected daily by the contractor and maintained as necessary
to ensure their continued functioning.
3. At no time shall more than one foot of sediment be allowed to accumulate within a
' trapped catch basin. All catch basins and conveyance systems shall be cleaned prior to
paving. The cleaning operation shall not flush sediment laden water into the downstream
system.
4. Stabilized construction entrances shall be constructed at the beginning of construction
and maintained for the duration of the project. Additional measures may be required to
ensure that all paved areas adjacent to the project are kept clean for the duration of the
project.
5. Sediment fences, straw waddles, triangular silt dikes, and straw bale barriers shall be
' removed when they have served their useful purpose and when approved by the
engineer, but not before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized.
6. Construction and maintenance of graveled construction entrance, temporary sediment
' fences, and all erosion control work shall follow the guidelines established by the local
municipalities.
7. All materials shall be in good physical condition to provide proper sediment retention.
8. Sediment fences and barriers shall be inspected by the contractor immediately after each
rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Any required repairs shall be made
immediately.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
1 removal.
3.3 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
1 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Site Clearing: 31 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. 1
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or
other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of
proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full - growth status, as determined
by Architect.
3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, stumps, roots, buried logs, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to
permit installation of new construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner'
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18
inches below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off -site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
LRS Architects Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Site Clearing: 31 1000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
' C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
' 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
' A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of
existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces
' • vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
' materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
•
1. Preparing subgrades for walks.
2. Subbase course for concrete walks.
1 B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control
' measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and below -
grade improvements and utilities.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation.
' 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill.
D. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
' 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
' and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
H. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete walk.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 1
J. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results 1
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock - definition testing, as documented according
to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
PART2- PRODUCTS 1
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Classification: All material shall be defined as "Unclassified Excavation ", or "Borrow
Excavation ".
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
C. Unclassified Excavation: Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of
all material, regardless of its nature, required to complete the project not otherwise classified
and included in the bid schedule under other pay items. This includes rock and boulder
1
excavation.
D. Borrow Excavation: Borrow excavation shall consist of excavation made from borrow areas
' within the limits of the project outside the normal grading limits, or from areas outside the project
when specified.
E. Unclassified Excavation and Embankment: Unclassified Excavation and Embankment shall
' consist of the excavation and disposal of all material, regardless of it's nature, as well as the
embankment and embankment material regardless of it's source when complying with the
requirements herein and with the project geotechnical report, necessary to complete the project
' as described within the project documents.
F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch
' sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve, as outlined in the Geotechnical
Report.
G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded `mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
' stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve, as outlined in the Geotechnical
Report
H. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 3/4 -inch
sieve and at least 50% retained on the No. 16sieve, such as pit run gravel or sand, or non-
plastic soil excavated from the trench..
I. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse - aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve
1 and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1 A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
' operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing."
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
1 D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 4
1 September 3, 2008
E. General
1. The rough excavation shall be carried to the necessary depth to obtain the specified
depth of subgrade densification shown on the plans. Likewise, on embankments, the
depth of subgrade densification shall be as shown on the plans or specified. Should the
Contractor, through negligence or other fault, excavate below the designated lines, he
shall replace the excavation with approved materials, in an approved manner and
condition, at his own expense. All excavating, moving, placing and depositing of all
materials are subject to approval by the Engineer and the Engineer shall determine the
suitability of material to be placed in embankments. All materials determined unsuitable
shall be disposed of in waste areas or as directed. Topsoil and strippings shall not be
used in fills or in subgrades but shall be handled and placed as specified.
2. The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to the character, quantity, and
distribution of all material to be excavated. No payment will be made for any excavated
material which is used for purposes other than those designated. All spoil areas shall be
leveled to a uniform line and section and shall present a neat appearance before project
acceptance.
3. If existing pavement areas that will be left in place are damaged due to hauling or to any
other activity of the Contractor, they shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense as
directed by the Engineer. Those areas outside of the pavement area which are disturbed • -
due to the Contractor's operations shall be restored to their original condition prior to final
acceptance of the project.
4. Spillage of excavation materials on paved areas shall be immediately cleaned up by the
Contractor. Cleanup shall include brooming and flushing with water, by mechanical
means.
5. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or underdrainage,
conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, or parts thereof, the Contractor shall
be responsible for and shall take all necessary precautions to protect and preserve or
provide temporary services. When such facilities are encountered, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal, if necessary. The Contractor
shall, at his own expense, satisfactorily repair all damage to such facilities or structures
which may result from any of his operations during the period of the contract.
6. Where remaining ends of abandoned pipes or portions of other items partially removed
under this specification would be left exposed, removal shall be carried into the slope or
below grade to furnish no evidence of their existence in the finish surface. Remaining
ends of sewer pipes and conduits shall be capped or plugged in a watertight manner.
F. Contractor's responsibility for utility properties and services.
1. At points where the Contractor's operation could cause damage or interference to 1
railway, telegraph, telephone, television, power, oil, gas, water, irrigation, or other private,
public, or municipal utilities, the Contractor shall suspend work until all arrangements
necessary for the protection thereof have been made by the Contractor.
2. The Contractor shall notify all utility offices which are affected by the construction
operation at least 48 hours in advance of excavation. Under no circumstances shall the
Contractor expose or interrupt any utility without first requesting permission and being
granted to do so from the affected agency. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility,
once permission from the utility has been granted, to locate, if necessary, and expose all
of the existing underground utilities in advance of the trenching operation.
3. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and utility
companies for any damage, expense, or claims of any kind brought because of injuries,
damages or delay which may result from the carrying out of the work to be done under
the Contract.
LRS Architects Inc. 1
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
' 4. In the event of interruption to domestic water or to other utility services as a result of
accidental breakage, or as a result of being exposed, unsupported, or a lack of
coordination, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer and the agency involved.
' The Contractor shall cooperate with, the said authority in restoration of services as
promptly as possible and shall bear any and all costs of repairs. In no case shall
interruption of any water or utility service be allowed to exist outside working hours unless
prior to approval of the Engineer or agency involved is granted.
' 5. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor for
damages as a result of the location of the underground utilities being other than that
shown on the plans or for the existence of underground utilities not shown on the plans.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
' A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
' construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
' b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
d. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
' B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be
classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross
sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit
prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be authorized
1
for rock excavation.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
' underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not
classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
' 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
3.4 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1
LRS Architects Inc. •
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.5 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION '
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
1
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
B. Location of Excavated Materials: During excavation the Contractor shall locate excavated
material so as not to block any public right -of -way, traveled roadways, public or private; and
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, roadway shall be kept open to at least on lane of
traffic. The Contractor shall store or waste excavated materials only in designated areas unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Utmost care shall be taken to prevent spillage or damage
to property adjacent to the project.
3.7 BACKFILL 1
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
LRS Architects Inc. ,
1
' Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
3.8 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
' material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
' 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
' C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
' D. Immediately prior to the placing of the fill materials, the entire area upon which the embankment
is to be placed, except where limited by rock, shall be scarified and broken by means of a disc
harrow or plow, or other approved equipment, to a depth of six inches. Scarifying shall be done
approximately parallel to the axis of the fill. All roots, debris, large stone, or objectionable
' material that would cause interference with the compaction of the foundation or fill shall be
removed from the area and disposed of as specified.
E. The grading operations shall be conducted, and the various soil strata placed, to produce a soil
t structure as shown on the typical cross section or as specified. All materials entering the
embankment shall be reasonably free of organic matter such as leaves, grass, roots and other
objectionable material. Soil, granular material, and any other material permitted for use in
embankment shall be spread in successive layers as specified.
F. Operations on earth work shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be
obtained because of rain, freezing weather, o other unsatisfactory conditions of the field. The
' Contractor shall drag, blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
G. The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling to obtain the
' prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material and manipulation when necessary to
secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer shall be required. Should the material
be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all work on all portions of the embankment
thus affected shall be delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content.
Sprinkling shall be done and approved equipment that will sufficiently distribute the water.
Sufficient equipment to furnish the required water shall be available at all times. Samples of all
embankment materials for testing, both before and after placement and compaction, will be
taken at frequent intervals. From these test, corrections, adjustments and modifications of
methods, materials, and moisture content shall be made to construct the embankment.
H. During construction of the embankment, the contractor shall route his equipment at all times,
both when loaded and when empty, over the layers s they are placed and shall distribute the
travel evenly over the entire width of the embankment. The equipment shall be operated in such
a manner that cemented gravel or other chunky soil material will be broken up into small
particles and become incorporated with the other material in the layer.
I. In the construction of embankments, starting layers shall be placed in the deepest portion of the
fill; as placement progresses, layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to the finished
pavement grade line.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 8
1 September 3, 2008
J. When rock and other embankment materials are excavated at approximately the same time,
the rock shall be incorporated into the outer portion of the embankment and the other material
shall be incorporated under the future paved areas. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than
eight (8) inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed in the top one (1) foot of the
subgrade. Rock fill shall be brought up on layers as specified or as directed and every effort
shall be exerted to fill the voids with the finer material to form a dense, compact mass. Rocks or
boulders shall not be disposed of outside the excavation or embankment areas, except at
places and in the manner designed by the Engineer.
K. Where embankments are constructed predominately of rock fragments, the thickness of layers
shall be as the Engineer may direct, but not greater than 18 inches. All voids between rocks,
boulders, etc. shall be filled with earth material brought to optimum moisture content and
compacted as specified.
L. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the material is unstable, rolling shall continue until the
embankment is stable.
M. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments made under the
contract and shall replace any portion, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has become
displaced due to carelessness or negligence on the part of the Contractor.
3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand - operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent, as
outlined in the Geotechnical Report.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent, as outlined in the Geotechnical Report.
1
LRS Architects Inc. '
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
•
t 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent, as outlined in the
Geotechnical Report.
1 3.11 GRADING
' A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
' 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch
' 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-
foot straightedge.
3.12 SUBBASE COURSES
A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under walks as follows:
' 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
' 2. Place base course material over subbase course.
3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades.
4. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or Tess than 3 inches thick.
6. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 1557, as outlined in the Geotechnical Report.
1 C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials
' and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not Tess than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.13 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 10
September 3, 2008
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in -place concrete slabs-
on-grade
as follows:
1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557, as outlined
in the Geotechnical Report.
1
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality - control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacitie Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies: 1
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no
case fewer than 3 tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
1
LRS Architects Inc. 1
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Earth Moving: 31 2000
Garden Room Addition Page 11
September 3, 2008
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
' 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
' trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
1 3.17 FINISHING:
' A. Work under this specification is to be done after the earthwork has been substantially completed
and will involve any or all of the following items of work as may be applicable or pertinent.
B. All side slopes in excavation and fills shall be trimmed and shaped as specified herein and shall
' be made free of all exposed roots and debris and of all stones exceeding two inches in size
which are loose or liable to become loosened. Embankments need not be finished to a fine
degree of perfection, but shall be made as smooth, safe and sightly as practicable with the
compatibility of materials used in construction of the embankments. If directed by the Engineer,
' embankment slopes flatter than four to one and constructed of rocky material shall be covered
with a layer of earth, talus or other fine material
t C. In the vicinity of bridge ends, culvert ends, inlets, walls, etc., all extraneous matter shall be
removed and the areas shaped and trimmed as directed. All sewers, culverts, drains and their
appurtenances constructed under the contract shall be cleaned out.
' D. All materials removed in connection with the above operations shall be disposed of in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
' Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 1
September 3, 2008
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
•
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Walkways.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase
course.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast- furnace slag.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
' B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1 C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
' 1 Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Curing compounds.
' 4. Applied finish materials.
5. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
6. Joint fillers.
1 D. Field quality - control test reports.
E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 2
1 September 3, 2008
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with 1
ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. 1
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified
by requirements in the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and
examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement
construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity
directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready -mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete pavement subcontractor.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
' 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
' 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
' 2.2 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials
to provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
1 B. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
•
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
1
brand, and source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150
1 a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618.
b. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
' B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse - Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
1
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. . Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
' admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water - soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
' 1. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High- Range, Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
' 5. High - Range, Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing 1
approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. dry.
B. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1
1. Available Products:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. 1
b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure.
c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure Clear.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J- 11 -W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure - Clear.
i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L &M Cure R.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.
k. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E.
I. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem Clear.
m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30.
n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309.
o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure 100.
E. White Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
1. Available Products: 1
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 WP WB.
b. Burke by Edoco; Resin Emulsion White.
c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure 2000.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem White Pigmented Cure (J- 10 -W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez VOX White Pigmented.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450.
h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure - White.
i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L &M Cure R -2.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1200 - White.
k. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem White.
I. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure 200 -W.
m. Unitex; Hydro White.
n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure White 100.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS 1
A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 5
September 3, 2008
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non- redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
' C. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water - soluble, liquid -set retarder with color dye, for horizontal
concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a
depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch .
' 1. Available Products:
a. Burke by Edeco; True Etch Surface Retarder.
b. ChemMasters; Exposee.
' c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Delay S.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Surface Retarder S.
e. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Expose.
' f. Metalcrete Industries; Surftard.
g. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Crete -Nox TA.
h. Scofield, L. M. Company; Lithotex.
i. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Rugasol -S.
' j. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Envioset.
D. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8-
inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve.
1
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
' A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal- weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
' 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.
' B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.
2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
' 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch .
C. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal- weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1 1. Air Content: 3 -1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
D. Limit water - soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
1
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 6
September 3, 2008
•
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been
corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to 1
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form - release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one -half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
LRS Architects Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 7
September 3, 2008
' 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
' 4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint - filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 25 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
' 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
' 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint - filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
' temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on
both sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement:
' 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 3/8 -inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction
joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
' abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random
contraction cracks.
3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
' indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding
to one side of joint.
•
' E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to a 3/8 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
' reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
1 B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
' place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation
and alignment.
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 8
1 September 3, 2008
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. 1
F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms.
Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with
care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without
being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. 1
I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
J. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength.
K. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
L. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot - weather conditions
exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32
deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water- soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
111
3.6 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. 1
LRS Architects Inc. 1
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 9
September 3, 2008
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power - driven
floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
1 texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float - finished concrete,
' perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium -to- Fine - Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float - finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture.
3. Medium -to- Coarse - Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-
finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff- bristled broom, perpendicular
to line of traffic.
1 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection.
' C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
' E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture - retaining -cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
' 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
' a. Water.
b. Continuous water -fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
1 2. Moisture- Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
' least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
' within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving: 32 1313
Garden Room Addition Page 10
September 3, 2008
3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch..
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length
of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Pius 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 1
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks
or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
1
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects Inc.
1
t Tigard Senior Center
Garden Roof Addition Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373
Page 1
September 3, 2008
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement.
1 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints related to
buildings.
2. Section 32 1313; Concrete Paving, for constructing joints in concrete pavement.
1 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated.
1 B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required.
C. Product Certificates.
1 D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
' 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint - sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
' preparation needed for adhesion.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
t A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants to joint sealant manufacturers for testing according to
ASTM C 1087, or manufacturer's standard test methods, to determine whether priming and
' other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates
1. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturer submits joint preparation
' data that is based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products
for compatibility with and adhesion to joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
' deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 321373
Garden Roof Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. •
2. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 COLD - APPLIED TRAFFIC -GRADE JOINT SEALANTS 1
A. Single component, pourable, self - leveling, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T,
Use related to joint substrate M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1
1. Pecora Ufexpan NR -201.
2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 1.
3. Tremco Vulkem 45 or Tremflex S /L.
B. Two component, pourable, self - leveling, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T,
Use related to joint substrate M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1. Pecora Ufexpan NR -200 (self - leveling), or Dynatred (slope - grade).
2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2, or SL 2 Slope- grade.
3. Tremco THC- 900/901.
4. Tremco Vulkem 245 or THC -900 (self - leveling), or THC -901 (slope - grade).
5. W.R. Meadows Sealtight Gardox.
2.3 JOINT - SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
1
A. General: Provide joint - sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. One of the following types, as applicable:
a. Round Backer Rods for Cold- Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1 or 3, 1
of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent
bottom -side adhesion of sealant.
LRS Architects, Inc.
11
1
I Tigard Senior Center
Garden Roof Addition Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373
Page 3
September 3, 2008
I b. Backer Strips for Cold- Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom -side adhesion of
sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Product recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant
I to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests
and field tests.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
I A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint - sealant performance.
I 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint - sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior
I experience.
1. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond.
1 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
1 products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
I joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
I to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
I 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
I D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
I 2.
3. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373
Garden Roof Addition Page 4
September 3, 2008
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur. D
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with
repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 11
11
1
a
1
0
0
11
0
LRS Architects, Inc.
11
1
I Tigard Senior Center Unit Masonry Retaining Walls: 32 3219
Garden Roof Addition
September 3, 2008 Page 1
I PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes unit masonry for retaining walls.
B. Related Sections:
I 1.
2. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements
Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for aggregate base and backfill requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1
A. Shop Drawings:
I 1. Drawings and structural calculations prepared and sealed by Engineer licensed in state in
which project is located.
2. Show retaining wall layout, construction details, reinforcement, and backfill.
3. Installation instructions.
I 4. . Base design of walls on National Concrete Masonry Associations "Design Manual for
Segmental Retaining Walls."
B. Submit a geotechnical report defining parameters used in design of retaining walls.
1 C. Submit manufacturer's test data for geogrid, masonry units, and geogrid /masonry unit assembly.
D. Samples: Two full size samples of each type of Masonry Units for approval prior to starting work
I indicating:
1. Face Texture.
2. Full Color Range.
I 1.3 FIELD MOCKUP
A. Construct a mock -up for approved by Architect to include the following:
1
1. Exposed masonry conditions.
2. Inside and outside corners.
I 3. Color range.
4. Typical coursing and bond.
5. Reinforcing.
6. Joint treatment.
•
I 7. Corner construction.
B. Mock Up Size: 10 feet Long by 3 feet High.
I C. Approved mock -up represents minimum acceptable workmanship standard for acceptance.
D. Approved mock -up may be incorporated into Project.
I 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect materials against damage and discoloration.
I 1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
Tigard Senior Center Unit Masonry Retaining Walls: 32 3219
Garden Roof Addition Page 2
September 3, 2008
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Keystone Retaining Wall Systems Modular Retaining Wall units.
B. Type: Hollow -core and load bearing Concrete Blocks '
C. Minimum Compressive Strength Pm: 3000 psi.
D. Integral Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard color range.
E. Face Size: Manufacturer's standard
F. Face Shape: Sculptured. ,
G. Interlocking Pins:
1. , Material: fiberglass
2. . Minimum Flexural Strength: 128,000 psi
3. Location: As required to off -set units back from face of adjacent lower unit as shown in
Drawings.
H. Special Shapes:
1. Return Ends.
2. Others required so exposed face of units match face texture of standard units.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated or required.
2.3 UNIT FILL
A. Material: Crushed rock without fractured faces.
B. Maximum Size: 3/4 inch
2.4 DRAINAGE FILL (AGGREGATE BASE)
A. Material: As specified in Section 31 2000.
B. Minimum Horizontal Thickness beyond Rear Face of Wall: 12 inches
2.5 BACKFILL
A. Material:
1. Crushed Rock.
2. Comply with recommendations of the geotechnical report.
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify footing to receive masonry is accurately located, level, and properly prepared. 1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1
' Tigard Senior Center Unit Masonry Retaining Walls: 32 3219
Garden Roof Addition Page 3
September 3, 2008
3.2 MASONRY UNIT INSTALLATION
A. General:
1 1. Comply with manufacturer's design drawings and written instructions.
2. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units.
3. Lay units true to line and with level courses.
1 B. First Course:
1. Install level and in full contact with footing.
' 2.
3. Install Interlocking Pins: Project pins into adjacent course minimum 1 inch.
Pull Masonry Unit forward (away from embankment) against pins of previous course, and
backfill as course is completed.
' 4. Fill unit voids with unit fill and compact fill by tamping.
5. Remove foreign matter from unit tops, and install next course.
6. Fill unit voids and compact before proceeding to next course.
7. Provide special shaped units, including corner units as required.
1 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
•
A. Remove Stains from exposed Masonry surfaces.
1 B. Clean, repair or replace soiled, discolored, or damaged units.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LRS Architects, Inc.
1